Skip to main content

Full text of "Essays and addresses"

See other formats


FRQM  THE  LIBR^JQC  OF 

TP^TY  COLLEGE 


X 


PROPERTY    OF 
RE/,  H.\.      CLA  iKE 


PROPERTY    OF 
REV.H.A.E.CLA.iKE 


Mlorfcs  bp  f&enrp  Iparrp  ILiDDon,  D.D..  D.C.L.,  LL.D. 

Z*fc  CaiMM  Residentiary  and  Chancellor  of  St.  Pouts. 


ADVENT  IN  ST.  PAUL'S.  Sermons  bearing  chiefly 
on  the  Two  Comings  of  Our  Lord.  Two  Vols.  Crown  8vo. 
3s.  6d.  each. 

CHEAP  EDITION,  in  one  Vol.    Crown  8vo.     55. 

CHRISTMASTIDE    IN    ST.    PAUL'S.      Sermons 

bearing  chiefly  on  the  Birth  of  Our  Lord  and  the  End  of  the  Year. 
Crown  8vo.     $s. 

PASSIONTIDE  SERMONS.    Crown  8vo.     5s. 

EASTER  IN  ST.  PAUL'S.  Sermons  bearing  chiefly 

on    the    Resurrection    of   our    Lord.  Two    Vols.      Crown    8vo. 
35.  6d.  each. 

CHEAP  EDITION,  in  one  Vol.  Crown  8vo.     55. 

THE  MAGNIFICAT.  Sermons  in  St  Paul's,  August 
1889.  Crown  8vo.  2s.  6d. 

SERMONS     PREACHED     BEFORE    THE 

UNIVERSITY    OF    OXFORD.     Two   Vols.      Crown    8vo. 
35.  6d.  each. 

CHEAP  EDITION,  in  one  Vol.     Crown  8vo.     $s. 

SERMONS  ON  OLD  TESTAMENT  SUB 
JECTS.  Crown  8vo.  55. 

SERMONS  ON   SOME  WORDS  OF  CHRIST. 

Crown  8vo.     58. 

SOME     ELEMENTS     OF     RELIGION.       Lent 

Lectures.     Small  8vo,  2s.  6d.  ;  or  in  Paper  Cover,  is.  6d. 
The  Crtntm  %vo  Edition ,  $s. ,  may  still  be  had. 

THE  DIVINITY  OF  OUR  LORD  AND  SAVIOUR 

JESUS  CHRIST.    Being  the  Hampton  Lectures  for  1866.    Crown 
8vo.     5s. 

SELECTIONS    FROM    THE   WRITINGS    OF 

H.  P.  LID  DON,  D.D.    Crown  8vo.     35.  6d. 

MAXIMS  AND  GLEANINGS  FROM  THE 

WRITINGS    OF    H.    P.    LIDDON,    D.D.      Selected    and 
arranged  by  C.  M.  S.     Crown  i6mo.     is. 


LONDON :  LONGMANS,  GREEN,  &  CO. 


WOKKS  />'>'  HENRY  PARKY  LID  DON— Continued. 

Walter  Kcrr  Hamilton,  Bishop  of  Salisbury.     A 

Sketch,  with  Sermon.     8vo.     2s.  6d. 

Of  the  Five  Wounds   of  the    Holy   Church.    By 

ANTONIO  ROSMINI.  Edited,  with  an  Introduction,  by  H.  P. 
LIDDON.  Crown  8vo.  ?s.  6d. 

Edward  Bouverie  Pusey.     A  Sermon  preached  in  St. 

Margaret's  Church,  Prince's  Road,  Liverpool,  in  aid  of  the  Pusey 
Memorial  Fund,  on  Sunday,  January  20,  1884.  8vo.  is. 

The  Recovery  of  St  Thomas.    A  Sermon  preached  in 

St.  Paul's  Cathedral  on  the  Second  Sunday  after  Easter,  April  23, 
1882.  With  a  Prefatory  Note  on  the  late  Mr.  Darwin.  8vo.  is. 

Love  and  Knowledge.  A  Sermon  preached  in  King's 
College  Chapel  at  its  Inauguration,  on  the  Twenty-second  Sunday 
after  Trinity,  1873.  8vo.  Is- 

The  Moral  Groundwork  of  Clerical  Training.     A 

Sermon  preached  at  the  Anniversary  Festival  of  Cuddesden  College, 
on  Tuesday,  June  10,  1873.  8vo.  Is- 

The  Inspiration  of  Selection.  A  Sermon  preached 
before  the  University  of  Oxford,  in  the  Church  of  St.  Mary  the 
Virgin,  on  Whit  Sunday,  May  25,  1890.  Crown  8vo.  6d. 

Devotion  to  the  Church  of  Christ.    A  Sermon  preached 

before  the  University  of  Cambridge,  in  Great  St.  Mary's  Church,  on 
October  28,  1888.  8vo.  is. 

Religion  and  Arms.  A  Sermon  preached  in  St.  Paul's 
Cathedral  before  the  Officers  and  Men  of  the  London  Rifle  Brigade, 
on  Low  Sunday,  April  28,  1889.  Crown  8vo.  6d. 

A  Father  in  Christ    A  Sermon  preached  in  St.  Paul's 

Cathedral  at  the  Consecration  of  the  Right  Rev.  Edward  King, 
D.D.,  and  of  the  Right  Rev.  Edward  Henry  Bickersteth,  D.D.,  on 
the  Feast  of  St.  Mark  the  Evangelist,  1885.  tfifth  Edition.  8vo.  is. 

The  Vision  at  Corinth.  A  Sermon  preached  in  the 
Cathedral  Church  of  Christ,  at  Oxford,  on  behalf  of  the  Christ  Church 
Minion  at  Poplar,  East  London,  on  the  Third  Sunday  after  Eas^r. 
May  12,  1889.  8vo.  is. 

The  Worth  of  the  Old  Testament    A  Sermon  preached 

in  St.  Paul's  Cathedral  on  the  Second  Sunday  in  Advent,  December  8, 
1889.  8vo.  is. 


LONDON:  LONGMANS,  GREEN,  &  CO. 


ESSAYS    AND    ADDRESSES 


ant) 


BY 
H.  P.  LIDDON,  D.D.,  LL.D.,  D.C.L 

I.ATK   CANON    AND  CHANCELLOR  OP   ST.    PAUL'S 


LONDON 
LONGMANS,    GREEN,    AND    CO. 

AND  NEW  YORK:  15  EAST  16x11  STREET 
1892 


U8952 
MJ61  7  1992 


ADVERTISEMENT 

fTlHE  four  Lectures  with  which  this  volume  com 
mences  were  delivered  by  Dr.  Liddon  on  Tuesday 
evenings  in  St.  Paul's  Cathedral ;  those  on  Buddhism 
in  the  year  1873,  those  on  St.  Paul  in  1874.  The 
three  papers  which  complete  the  volume  were  pre 
pared  for  and  read  to  the  Oxford  Dante  Society. 
The  difference  of  occasion  and  audience  will  readily 
explain  the  marked  change  of  method  in  the  two 
parts  of  the  book.  For  most  valuable  and  kindly 
help  in  the  preparation  of  the  Dante  papers  the 
Editors  are  indebted  to  the  Rev.  Dr.  Moore,  Principal 
of  St.  Edmund  HalL  They  have  also  to  acknowledge 
gratefully  the  assistance  and  warm  encouragement  of 
the  Rev.  Dr.  G.  U.  Pope,  of  Balliol  College,  in  connec 
tion  with  the  lectures  on  Buddhism. 


CONTENTS 

PAOK 

LECTURES  ON  BUDDHISM. 

1.  TIIK  LIKE  OF  THE  FOUNDER,        .  .  .          1 

2.  COMPARISON  BKTWEEN  BUDDHISM  AND  CHRISTIANITY,        31 

LECTURES  ON  THE  LIFE  OF  ST.  PAUL. 

1.  THE  PREPARATION,      .  .  .  .  .Go 

2.  THE  MISSIONARY,  THE   CHURCH   RULER,  AND  THE 

MARTYR,    .  .  .  .  .  yo 

PAPERS  ON  DANTE. 

1.  DANTE  AND  AQUINAS.    PARTI.,  .  .  .121 

2.  DANTE  AND  AQUINAS.     PART  n.,  .  .  .       140 

3.  DANTE  AND  THE  FRANCISCANS,  .  .  .178 


JESUS  CHRIST  AND  BUDDHA. 

L   THE  LIFE  OF  BUDDHA.1 

TT7HEN  I  propose  on  this  and  next  Tuesday  even- 
'  ^  ing  to  discuss  with  you  the  origin  and  charac 
teristics  of  Buddhism,  while  keeping  an  eye  on 
Christianity,  it  may,  I  fear,  be  thought  at  first  that 
such  a  subject  is  somewhat  needlessly  remote  from  the 
practical  interests  of  our  country  and  our  generation. 
But,  not  to  insist  upon  the  advantages  of  an  intel 
lectual  change  of  air,  the  subject  is  not  so  removed 
from  practical  interests  as  we  may  suppose.  What 
ever  we  English  may  think  about  ourselves,  the 
aspect  in  which  England  presents  herself  to  the 
imagination  of  Europe  and  of  the  world  is  that  of 
the  power  which  has  won,  and  still  holds,  the  empire 
of  India.  No  man  who  believes  in  a  Providence  can 
suppose  that  we,  the  inhabitants  of  a  small  island 
in  the  remote  West,  have  been  introduced  to  these 
high  destinies  for  nothing,  or  only  for  commercial 
or  political  ends;  and  as  soon  as  the  eye  catches 
sight  of  any  higher  horizons  than  those  which  might 

>  Lecture    delivered    in    St.    Paul's   Cathedral,   on  Tuesday    evening, 
January  ai,  1873. 

A 


JESUS  CHRIST  AND  BUDDHA. 

I.   THE  LIFE  OF  BUDDHA.1 

YITHEN  I  propose  on  this  and  next  Tuesday  even 
ing  to  discuss  with  you  the  origin  and  charac 
teristics  of  Buddhism,  while  keeping  an  eye  on 
Christianity,  it  may,  I  fear,  be  thought  at  first  that 
such  a  subject  is  somewhat  needlessly  remote  from  the 
practical  interests  of  our  country  and  our  generation. 
But,  not  to  insist  upon  the  advantages  of  an  intel 
lectual  change  of  air,  the  subject  is  not  so  removed 
from  practical  interests  as  we  may  suppose.  What 
ever  wo  English  may  think  about  ourselves,  the 
aspect  in  which  England  presents  herself  to  the 
imagination  of  Europe  and  of  the  world  is  that  of 
the  power  which  has  won,  and  still  holds,  the  empire 
of  India.  No  man  who  believes  in  a  Providence  can 
suppose  that  we,  the  inhabitants  of  a  small  island 
in  the  remote  West,  have  been  introduced  to  these 
high  destinies  for  nothing,  or  only  for  commercial 
or  political  ends;  and  as  soon  as  the  eye  catches 
sight  of  any  higher  horizons  than  those  which  might 

1  Lecture   delivered    iu    8t.    Paul's   Cathedral,   on  Tuesday    evening, 
January  ai,  1873. 

A 


JESUS  CHRIST  AND  BUDDHA. 

I.   THE  LIFE  OF  BUDDHA.1 

TTTHEN  I  propose  on  this  and  next  Tuesday  even- 
'  *  ing  to  discuss  with  you  the  origin  and  charac 
teristics  of  Buddhism,  while  keeping  an  eye  on 
Christianity,  it  may,  I  fear,  be  thought  at  first  that 
such  a  subject  is  somewhat  needlessly  remote  from  the 
practical  interests  of  our  country  and  our  generation. 
But,  not  to  insist  upon  the  advantages  of  an  intel 
lectual  change  of  air,  the  subject  is  not  so  removed 
from  practical  interests  as  we  may  suppose.  What 
ever  wo  English  may  think  about  ourselves,  the 
aspect  in  which  England  presents  herself  to  the 
imagination  of  Europe  and  of  the  world  is  that  of 
the  power  which  has  won,  and  still  holds,  the  empire 
of  India.  No  man  who  believes  in  a  Providence  can 
suppose  that  we,  the  inhabitants  of  a  small  island 
in  the  remote  West,  have  been  introduced  to  these 
high  destinies  for  nothing,  or  only  for  commercial 
or  political  ends;  and  as  soon  as  the  eye  catches 
sight  of  any  higher  horizons  than  those  which  might 

»  Lecture   delivered    in   St.    Paul'*  Cathedral,   on  Tuesday   evening, 
January  21,  1873. 

A 


Jesus  Christ  and  Buddha. 


have  satisfied  a  Phoenician  or  a  Roman  conqueror,  it 
is  at  once  felt  that  the  greatest  interest  must  attach 
to  the  mental  and  religious  history  of  the  highly- 
gifted  races  with  which  we  are  now  so  closely 
connected.  And  Buddha  was  an  Indian  prince. 
Buddhism  was  for  two  centuries  an  exclusively  Indian 
religion.  Although  driven  from  Central  India  five 
centuries  since,  it  still  lingers  in  the  north,  beneath 
the  shadow  of  the  Himalayas  in  Nepaul,  and  further 
north-west,  in  Cashmere;  it  is  still  vigorous  to  the 
south  in  our  own  island  of  Ceylon.  It  does  not 
simply  fringe  the  Indian  peninsula;  to  the  north 
and  east  it  dominates  in  those  dense  populations 
which  are  so  impervious  to  European  ideas  and 
European  enterprise:  Burmah  and  Siam,  Tonquin 
and  Cochin-China,  are  Buddhist.  Buddhism  domi 
nates  throughout  a  great  part  of  China  and  Japan; 
it  is  the  religion  of  Thibet ;  it  is  still  found  in  Tartary 
and  Mongolia.  In  short,  we  cannot  move  in  the  East 
without  encountering  it,  wellnigh  on  all  sides  of  us ; 
and  if  it  did  not  thus  appeal  to  our  political  instincts 
as  Englishmen,  it  would  still  appeal,  at  least  as 
powerfully  to  our  human,  not  to  speak  of  our  Chris 
tian,  interests.  A  religion  which  has  lived  on  for 
four-and-twenty  centuries,  and  which,  it  is  probable, 
counts  more  votaries  at  this  moment  than  any  other 
on  the  face  of  the  globe, — probably  not  less  than  a 
third  of  its  inhabitants, — is  a  subject  of  study  to  which 


Jesus  Christ  and  Buddha. 


thoughtful  men  need  not  be  coaxed  by  any  merely 
national  interest,  at  least  if  it  still  holds  that  to  be 
a  man  is  to  deem  nothing  human  strange.  Besides 
which  Buddhism,  side  by  side  with  differences  of  the 
most  vital  and  fundamental  character  that  can  be 
conceived,  presents  some  singular  points  of  resem 
blance  to  Christianity, — in  its  ethical  teaching,  in  its 
law  of  self-propagation,  and  notably  in  the  character 
of  some  of  its  institutions;  so  that,  if  it  were  only 
possible  to  do  no  more  than  glance  at  a  subject  so  rich 
in  interest,  we  need  not  fear  disappointment.  As  it 
is,  our  danger  lies  in  the  difficulty  of  honestly  treat 
ing  a  vast  subject  within  very  limited  space,  without 
stripping  all  the  flesh  from  the  skeleton,  without 
reducing  a  story,  which  says  so  much  to  feeling  and 
to  thought,  to  the  form  and  proportions  of  an  index 
or  a  dictionary. 


Buddhism  was  an  attempted  reform  of,  it  was  a 
revolt  against,  Brahminism, — an  older  historical  re 
ligion  which  had  been  for  many  centuries  in  possession 
of  India, — as  even  now,  although  exposed  to  more 
or  less  rapid  decomposition  under  the  influence  of 
European  thought,  it  holds  much  of  its  ancient 
ground.  What  were  the  circumstances  of  Brahmin- 
ism  at  the  date  of  the  foundation  of  Buddhism  ? 


Jesus  Christ  and  Buddha. 


It  is  only  within  the  last  hundred  years  that  it 
has  been  at  all  possible  to  answer  a  question  like 
this.  The  knowledge  of  ancient  India  which  was 
derived  from  the  early  Jesuit  missionaries  was  in 
evitably  vague  and  inaccurate;  and  for  the  rest, 
Indian  thought  was  studied  either  in  the  sparse 
notices  of  the  ancient  Greek  classical  writers,  or  in 
the  prejudiced  pages  or  mutilated  translations  of 
the  Mohammedans.  Commentaries  on  the  Vedas — 
the  ancient  religious  Indo- Aryan  poetry — were  read  in 
translations  from  Persian  translations  of  the  Sanskrit 
originals;  there  were  Arabian  versions,  which  were 
distrusted  in  Europe,  as  likely,  for  more  reasons  than 
one,  to  misrepresent  Indian  manners  and  theology. 
A  change  came  with  the  establishment  of  our  Indian 
empire,  and  the  accompanying  necessity  of  studying 
fundamentally  the  languages  and  ideas  of  our  new 
subjects.  Sir  William  Jones — whose  statue  faces  me 
— gave  the  first  great  impulse  to  those  investigations ; 
but  the  name  which  is  most  prominently  associated 
with  the  discovery  to  Europe  (for  it  was  nothing  less) 
of  the  philosophy  and  religion  of  the  great  Aryan 
race  was  that  of  Colebrooke.  The  formation  of  the 
Asiatic  Society  of  Calcutta,  and  the  study  of  Sanskrit, 
the  literary  and  sacred  language  of  ancient  India, 
were  the  two  great  steps  in  this  direction;  and  the 
labours  of  scholars  like  the  late  Professor  Wilson, 
Eugene  Burnouf,  and  Professor  Max  Miiller  have 


Jesus  Christ  and  Buddha. 


carried  us  onwards  to  our  present — still  advancing 
and  still  imperfect — knowledge  of  an  antiquity  which, 
from  its  bearing  on  the  languages  and  civilisation  of 
the  Indo-Germanic  races  in  Europe,  as  well  as  from 
its  relations  to  the  Eastern  world,  has  an  interest  all 
its  own. 

These  studies  reveal  to  us  a  world  of  thought  and 
activity  which  is  the  produce  of  centuries.  Here  is  a 
sacred  literature  with  its  religious  code,  its  several 
systems  of  philosophy,  its  pious  legends,  its  practical 
commentaries  designed  for  edification,  its  cherished 
historical  traditions,  its  liturgies,  its  religious  instruc 
tions,  its  sacred  epics.  But  these  are  merely  so  many 
incrustations,  accumulated  during  centuries  upon 
primitive  texts  which  had  become  more  sacred  with 
the  lapse  of  ages.  Beyond,  before,  above  all  else,  in 
the  Indian  literature  stand  the  Vedas, — books,  as  the 
word  signifies,  presumably  at  least,  of  the  highest 
knowledge.  They  embody  the  earliest  traditions  of 
the  Aryan  race ;  they  are  poems  of  the  most  primi 
tive  type,  which  were  written  out  upon  palm-leaves 
some  twelve  or  more  centuries  before  the  coming  of 
our  Lord.  At  least  this  description  would  apply  to 
the  Rig- Veda,  the  most  ancient  and  the  most  vene 
rated  of  the  four  Vedas :  it  gives  us  a  picture  of  the 
family  life  of  India  in  the  earliest  period  known  to 
history.  It  must  have  been  composed  in  the  Punj- 
aub,  the  country  of  the  seven  rivers  which  form  tho 


Jesus  Christ  and  Buddha. 


Indus,  and  at  a  period  when  as  yet  caste  did  not  exist 
in  India.  It  is  a  collection  of  hymns  for  family  wor 
ship  conducted  upon  the  green  turf,  under  the  blue 
vault  of  heaven,  accompanied  by  sacrifices  of  the 
rudest  and  most  domestic  description ;  hymns,  such 
as  a  primitive,  highly-gifted  race,  itself  inheriting 
echoes  of  a  Divine  tradition,  would  compose  when 
face  to  face  with  the  natural  features  of  north 
western  Hindustan.  All  the  beauty  of  nature,  all 
its  rigour,  its  productiveness,  as  well  as  its  surprises 
and  disappointments,  icy  cold  and  tropical  heat,  the 
equinoctial  gales  and  the  outburst  of  spring  life,  come 
before  us  in  these  poems.  They  rarely  if  ever  con 
tain  practical  or  moral  precepts ;  they  are  passionate 
invocations  to  the  power  which,  under  various  names 
and  conceptions,  is  believed  to  rule  the  natural  world ; 
prayers  that  He  would  make  it  a  fit  and  serviceable 
house  for  His  faithful  worshippers.  If  any  creed  can 
be  here  detected,  it  is  perhaps  a  monotheism,  un 
tainted  as  yet  by  the  pantheism  of  a  later  age ;  but 
constantly  tending  by  its  realistic  invocations  of  the 
various  powers  of  nature  to  become  a  polytheism. 
Fire  is  invoked  as  Agni;  the  sun,  as  one  of  the 
greatest  benefactors  of  humanity,  as  Surya;  the 
atmosphere  penetrated  by  sunlight  as  Indra;  the 
vault  of  heaven  as  Varuna;  earth  in  its  robe  of 
beauty  as  Prithivi ;  the  terrific  mountain  blasts  which 
sweep  the  forests  as  Rudra.  Each  aspect  of  nature 


Jesus  Christ  and  Buddha. 


is  individualised ;  each  is  a  Deva,  or  luminous  spirit, 
to  the  primitive  Aryan.  But  the  Veda  is  also  full  of 
human  passion;  there  is  no  attempt  to  conceal  the 
hatred  and  contempt  for  the  Dasyu  or  primitive  race, 
which  the  Aryan  conquerors  of  the  Punjaub  had 
driven  southwards.  The  Dasyu  is  a  brigand ;  he  has 
neither  law  nor  faith;  he  despises  heaven;  he  is 
vowed  to  execration;  heaven  is  invoked  to  blast,  to 
destroy  him.  For  himself  the  worshipper  prays  for 
increase  of  goods,  for  flocks,  for  horses — later  for 
gold ;  always  for  something  material,  for  victory,  for 
fortune,  for  happiness — immediate  and  complete. 

How  Brahminism — an  elaborate  system  of  poly 
theism,  priesthood,  and  caste — superseded  this  primi 
tive  Indian  life  and  religion,  we  can  as  yet  rather 
guess  than  say.  But  we  see  the  beginnings  of  the 
process  in  the  Vedas  themselves.  Criticism  has  re 
marked  three  distinct  stages  or  types  of  thought  in 
the  process  before  us ;  ( i )  the  most  ancient,  and  the 
purest,  original  in  form,  monotheistic  in  creed,  dwell 
ing  on  the  most  obvious  features  of  the  world  of 
nature;  (2)  a  second,  with  more  of  speculation  and 
IMS  of  fresh  feeling,  elaborating  and  dwelling  more 
intensely  upon  the  nature-powers  around  man,  making 
a  step  thus  towards  polytheism ;  (3)  a  third,  in  which 
later  speculation  has  got  the  upper  hand  of  early  feel 
ing,  in  which  abstraction  is  piled  upon  abstraction,  till 
all  becomes  indistinct,  and  men  are  willing  to  recover 


8  Jesus  Christ  and  Buddha. 

definiteness  at  any  cost,  though  it  be  such  only  as 
Brahininism  could  give.  How  the  family  became 
lost  hi  the  tribe;  how  the  solemn  sacrifice  of  the 
horse  was  substituted  for  the  simpler  sacrifices  and 
libations  of  the  Rig- Veda ;  how  the  family  poets  were 
transformed  into  a  sacrificing  class  for  the  whole  tribe, 
guarding  their  entire  literary  inheritance  as  a  sacred 
literature ;  how  prayer,  personified  as  Brahma,  became 
itself  an  object  of  worship,  and  the  starting-point  for  a 
construction  or  reconstruction  of  the  Hindu  Pantheon; 
how  finally  this  gradual  change  or  development  of  a 
faith  expressed  itself  politically  in  the  growth  of  caste — 
these  are  points  which  can  here  and  now  only  be  glanced 
at.  £y  the  seventh  century  before  Christ,  the  Hindu 
Trimurti,  or  Triad,  of  Brahma,  Siva,  and  Vishnu,  was 
well  established  in  the  popular  faith ;  there  was  a  vast 
collection  of  lower  deities;  the  ancient  vedas  were 
used,  but  overlaid  by  commentaries,  which  appro 
priated  them  to  Brahrninical  purposes ;  the  Brahmin 
caste  had,  after  a  struggle,  conquered  the  warriors  and 
the  statesmen,  and  placed  itself  in  the  forefront  of 
society  and  thought. 

As  masters  of  the  religious  literature  and  ideas  of 
the  country,  the  Brahmin  caste  controlled  its  political 
rulers,  the  immense  number  of  petty  sovereigns  who 
ruled  ancient  India.  But  in  questions  of  government,  of 
peace  and  war,  the  kingly  and  governing  class  still  held 
its  own ;  it  formed  a  second  caste,  that  of  the  warriors 


Jesus  Christ  and  Buddha. 


or  kshatriyas.  The  people,  engaged  in  agriculture 
and  commerce,  formed  a  third  caste,  the  vai9yas: 
and  below  this  was  a  fourth,  the  sowing-class  or 
sudras,  probably  the  relics  of  more  ancient  conquered 
populations.  Not  that  they  were  the  lowest  base  of 
ancient  Indian  society;  they  were  honourable  com 
pared  with  the  mongrel  race,  as  it  was  deemed,  which 
resulted  from  incidental  connection  between  the  higher 
castes,  and  which  formed  a  refuse  population,  the 
colluvies  of  all  the  caste-impurity  of  the  land. 

Now  Buddhism  stood  towards  this  earlier  system 
of  life  and  thought  in  the  relation  of  a  revolt.  It  was 
a  social  and  a  doctrinal  rebellion  against  Brahminism. 
Socially,  it  rebelled  against  the  system  of  caste ;  it 
protested  in  the  name  of  Justice  that  all  had  a 
right  to  the  knowledge  and  the  privileges  which 
were  monopolised  by  the  Brahmins.  Doctrinally,  it 
attempted  to  provide  an  escape  for  the  human  soul 
from  the  miseries  of  transmigration  to  another  body 
after  death  which  the  Brahminical  creed  insisted  on ; 
and  it  did  this  not  by  denying  transmigration  alto 
gether,  but  by  pointing  to  the  possibility  of  self- 
annihilation,  through  contemplation  and  virtue,  in 
the  Nirvana.  Upon  this  subject  more  hereafter. 
Enough  has  been  said  to  show  that  Buddhism  was 
no  more  an  original  religion  than  Mohammedanism ; 
that  it  took  a  great  deal  of  Brahminism  for  granted 
while  endeavouring  to  improve  on  it;  that  it  pre- 


io  Jesus  Christ  and  Buddha. 

supposes  Brahininism,  and  is  a  modified  continuation 
of  it,  although  at  deadly  feud  with  its  later  represen 
tations;  and  we  may  now  turn  to  the  life  of  the 
remarkable  man  to  whom  the  new  religion  owes  its 
origin. 

II. 

Here,  perhaps,  it  may  be  well  to  say  a  word  as  to 
some  of  our  sources  of  information.  First  among 
these  must  be  placed  the  French  translation  of  The 
Lotus  of  the  Good  Law,  as  the  work  is  named,  by  M. 
Eugene  Burnouf,  with  his  accompanying  dissertations ; 
as  well  as  his  Introduction  to  the  History  of  Indian 
Buddhism.  Then  several  papers  in  the  Transactions 
of  the  Royal  Asiatic  Society,  and  the  Journal  of  the 
Asiatic  Society  of  Bengal,  especially  the  sketch  of 
Buddhism  from  the  Nepalese  Sutras  in  the  second 
volume  of  the  former  series,  may  be  mentioned.  Mr. 
Hodgson  was  for  many  years  British  Resident  at 
Nepaul,  and  to  his  enterprise,  his  scholarship,  and  his 
unbounded  liberality,  Europe  is  mainly  indebted  for 
its  present  knowledge  of  the  subject  before  us. 

Not  to  go  further  into  particulars  on  this  matter, 
much  fuller  information  will  be  found  in  Professor 
Max  Miiller's  article  on  "  Buddhism "  in  the  first 
volume  of  his  collected  Essays,  an  article  which  shows 
at  once  the  vastness  of  the  subject,  the  caution  with 
which  almost  any  conclusions  must  be  received  in 


Jesus  Christ  and  Buddha.  \  i 

our  present  state  of  knowledge,  and  the  rich  crop 
of  information  which  may  be  expected  from  future 
investigations. 

There  is  some  difficulty  in  fixing  the  date  at  which 
the  founder  of  Buddhism  appeared  in  history.  The 
earliest  of  the  fourteen  dates  assigned  to  him  in  Thibet 
is  2422  B.C.  In  China,  Mongolia,  and  Japan  he  is 
generally  placed  at  950  or  940  B.C.:  among  the 
southern  Buddhists  of  Siam,  Burmah,  and  Ceylon  at 
543  B.C.  The  latter  would  seem  to  be  the  probable 
date;  to  omit  other  considerations,  the  earlier  dates 
do  not  leave  sufficient  room  for  the  extraordinary 
development  of  Brahminism,  itself  the  work  of  very 
many  centuries,  which  Buddhism  presupposes.  The 
scene  of  his  birth  was  at  the  town  of  Kapilavatthu, 
capital  of  a  small  kingdom  at  the  north  of  the  modern 
Oude,  and  at  the  foot  of  the  range  which  divides  it 
from  NepauL  His  father,  Suddhodana,  was  head  of 
the  family  of  the  Sakyas,  and  king  of  the  territory. 
Buddha  was  thus  of  the  warrior,  and  not  of  the 
Brahmin  caste,  a  point  of  much  significance.  His 
mother's  beauty,  her  intelligence,  her  virtue,  are  cele 
brated  in  the  most  glowing  terms  in  the  Buddhist 
sutra — the  Lalita-vistara.  She  retired,  to  give  him 
birth,  to  the  beautiful  park  or  gardens  of  TAimbini, 
some  twenty  miles  north-east  of  Kapilavatthu:  she 
died  seven  days  after  her  labour.  Her  child's  personal 
name  was  Siddhatthu,  but  he  is  more  generally  known 


1 2  Jesus  Christ  and  Buddha. 

as  Sakya-mouni,  i.e.  the  solitary  or  monk  of  the  Sakya 
family.  He  is  also  the  Samana  Gotama,  or  ascetic 
of  the  sun-descended  race  of  the  Gotamides;  the 
Sougata,  or  saviour  of  men ;  the  Bhagavat,  the  blessed 
or  fortunate  one,  the  name  commonly  given  him  in 
the  writings  of  Nepaul ;  the  Arhat,  or  Venerable  One, 
a  title  which  he  shares  with  his  most  distinguished 
disciples ;  the  Bodhisatta,  one  who  by  science  and 
virtue  is  in  a  fair  way  to  become  Buddha ;  the  Tatha- 
gata, — the  title  which  he  gave  himself, — one  who  had 
gone  as  his  predecessors,  the  earlier  Buddhas :  above 
all,  the  Buddha,  which  means  the  Man  of  Science,  the 
Enlightened,  the  Awakened  One.  This  indeed,  his 
most  famous,  is  not  a  proper  or  personal  name;  it 
describes  a  quality ;  others  became  Buddha ;  the 
Prince  of  Kapilavatthu  was  the  Buddha,  par  excel 
lence  :  but  this,  as  well  as  the  other  titles,  excepting 
his  personal  and  family  names,  did  not  originally 
belong  to  him,  but  were  given  or  assumed,  in  the 
course  of  years. 

The  infant  was  consigned  to  the  care  of  his  maternal 
aunt,  Mahapajapati  Gotami,  who  became  one  of  his 
most  attached  converts  in  later  years;  he  was  pro 
nounced  by  the  eminent  Brahmin  Asita  to  have  the 
thirty-two  principal  signs  and  the  eighty  secondary 
marks  of  the  great  man ;  he  was  soon  able,  as  a  boy, 
to  learn  all  that  his  teachers  had  to  tell  him.  In  his 
earliest  years  he  was  disinclined  for  amusements,  pen- 


Jesus  Christ  and  Buddha.  \  3 

sive,  fond  of  retirement.  The  king's  advisers  insisted 
on  his  marriage,  in  order  to  defeat  a  Brahminical 
prophecy  that  he  would  abdicate  the  throne  to  become 
an  ascetic.  After  taking  time  for  reflection,  the  boy  of 
sixteen  years  consented;  if  only  his  wife  had  high 
personal  qualities,  she  might,  he  said,  be  of  any  caste 
of  the  people,  or  even  of  the  enslaved  race,  as  well  as 
of  the  Brahmins  or  the  warriors.  A  commission  of 
old  men  made  a  selection  of  women  in  Kapilavatthu, 
from  among  whom  Siddhatthu  had  to  choose :  but,  at 
her  father's  demand,  he  was  not  allowed  to  win  his 
bride  until  he  had  proved  himself,  in  Indian  learning 
as  well  as  in  athletic  exercises,  the  best  man  of  his 
day.  It  is  right  to  add  that  all  this  has  been  treated 
by  Professor  Wilson  as  an  allegory,  indicating  the 
philosophical  position  of  Buddhism;  his  contention 
being  that  we  know  almost  nothing  of  the  founder  of 
Buddhism.  But  this  fervid  scepticism  is  checked  by 
the  journals  of  the  Chinese  pilgrims  who  visited  the 
sites  and  verified  the  traditions  of  the  early  Buddhist 
writings  some  centuries  afterwards. 

Buddha  lived  until  the  age  of  twenty-eight  in  the 
three  palaces  which  his  father  had  built  for  him,  sur 
rounded  with  all  that  wealth,  luxury,  and  affection 
could  yield;  but  he  was  not  happy.  To  him  the 
world,  or  rather  the  universe,  for  he  included  the 
Indian  deities  in  his  melancholy  estimate,  appeared 
to  labour  under  the  threefold  misery  of  ignorance, 


14  Jesus  Christ  and  Buddha. 

desire,  and  existence.  He  believed  that  he  could 
attain  to  that  higher  intelligence  of  "  the  Good  Law," 
the  communication  of  which  to  others  would  put  an 
end  to  human  misery ;  by  which  the  highest  know 
ledge  would  be  attained ;  by  which  desire  and  passion 
would  be  extinguish  ad ;  by  which  the  miseries  of  exist 
ence,  of  death,  which  leads  only  to  transmigration, 
would  be  escaped  in  the  self-accomplished  annihilation 
of  Nirvana.  His  father's  suspicions  were  aroused,  and 
every  effort  was  made  to  detain  him.  But  the  sights 
which  met  him  in  every  direction  only  matured  his 
resolution.  On  his  way  to  the  gardens  of  Lumbini 
he  encounters  a  decrepit  old  man  :  he  reflects  that  he 
too  will  become  old ;  what  right  has  he  to  enjoy  him 
self?  He  turns  his  carriage  in  thoughtful  sorrow 
back  to  the  royal  palace.  On  another  similar  occasion 
he  meets  a  sick  man,  in  great  suffering  and  want,  in 
an  advanced  stage  of  illness,  and  breathing  with  diffi 
culty.  "Health,"  he  cries,  "is  but  a  dream;  who, 
having  seen  this,  would  think  of  enjoying  himself?" 
Again  he  turns  homeward  in  disquiet  and  humiliation. 
On  another  side  of  the  city,  and  on  a  third  occasion, 
he  meets  a  funeral ;  the  dead  is  followed  by  a  long  pro 
cession  of  mourners,  whose  grief  is  shown  in  all  the 
demonstrative  forms  of  Eastern  vehemence.  He  again 
utters  a  few  passionate  words  on  the  misery  of  life : 
"  Let  us  go  back,"  he  exclaims :  "  I  will  try  to  effect 
a  deliverance."  Once  more  he  meets  a  bhikshu  or 


Jesus  Christ  and  Buddha.  1 5 

mendicant  ascetic,  with  a  collected,  disciplined  appear 
ance,  with  downcast  eyes  and  subdued  gait  On  his 
inquiry  as  to  who  it  was,  "  This  man,"  replies  the  ser 
vant  in  attendance,  "  is  a  bhikshu ;  he  has  renounced 
all  the  pleasures  of  desire  and  leads  now  an  austere 
life ;  he  is  engaged  in  crushing  out  self  and  has  be 
come  a  mendicant.  Without  passion,  without  desire, 
he  goes  about  asking  alms." 

Siddhatthu's  resolution  was  taken :  it  was  now  only 
a  question  of  opportunity.  He  opened  his  design  to 
his  wife,  who  in  vain  endeavoured  to  dissuade  him. 
He  then  told  his  Royal  father.  "  1\Vhat  can  I  do  for 
thee,  my  son,"  cried  the  long,  in  tears,  "  to  make  thee 
change  thy  purpose  ?  Myself,  this  palace,  these  ser 
vants,  this  realm  —  all  is  thine."  "  Four  things," 
replied  Siddhatthu,  "  I  ask :  and  if  thou  canst  grant 
them  I  will  remain  with  thee.  That  old  age  may 
never  come  to  me:  that  I  may  for  ever  enjoy  the 
beauty  of  youth :  that  illness  may  never  assail  me : 
that  my  life  may  know  no  limits,  no  decline."  "  Thou 
askest  for  the  impossible,  my  child,"  cried  the  king  in 
agony.  "  At  least,"  replied  the  prince,  "  if  thou  canst 
not  grant  me  these  four  things,  deign  to  grant  me  one, 
one  only.  Let  it  be  that,  when  I  go  hence,  I  may 
escape  tho  vicissitudes  of  transmigration." 

An  Indian  would  have  thought  it  just  as  reasonable 
to  ask  that  the  sun's  course  might  be  changed. 
Algument  was  no  longer  possible:  the  prince  must 


1 6  Jesus  Christ  and  Buddha. 

be  prevented,  if  possible,  by  force  from  taking  flight. 
The  family  of  Sakyas  was  convoked :  the  palace  was 
surrounded  with  guards  ;  the  king  himself  super 
intended  in  person  the  efforts  of  his  officers.  But  it 
was  to  no  purpose.  With  the  aid  of  a  trusted  con 
fidant  the  prince  escaped  from  the  palace  of  Kapila- 
vatthu  at  midnight;  his  heart  for  a  moment  sank 
within  him,  as  he  turned  to  cast  a  last  look  upon  the 
home  which  he  was  leaving,  it  might  be  for  ever. 
"  Never  again,"  he  said,  "  will  I  enter  the  town  of 
Kapila  till  I  have  secured  the  supreme  dwelling,  the 
pure  intelligence,  which  makes  free  from  old  age  and 
death."  He  rode  hard  all  night ;  he  passed  the 
frontier  of  his  father's  realm :  and  when  the  morning 
broke  he  dismounted,  stripped  himself  of  his  pearls 
and  of  his  royal  ornaments,  and  sent  back  his  horse 
and  servant;  cut  off  with  his  sword  the  long  hair 
which  marked  him  as  belonging  to  the  warrior-caste, 
and  changed  his  robe,  made  of  the  finest  silk  of 
Benares,  with  a  huntsman  who  was  dressed  in  deer 
skins.  In  this  guise  he  then  crossed  to  the  southern  side 
of  the  Ganges,  to  the  kingdom  of  Magadha.  Some  of 
the  most  celebrated  Brahmin  solitaries  lived  on  a 
mountain  near  the  capital  town  of  this  State ;  and  the 
prince  became  a  disciple-  of  two  famous  teachers, 
Alata  and  Rudraka,  who,  however,  failed  to  satisfy 
him.  The  Brahmin  doctrines,  as  explained  by  their 
highest  representatives,  did  not,  he  said,  "  create 


Jesus  Christ  and  Buddha.  1 7 

indifference  for  the  things  of  the  world;  did  not  secure 
enfranchisement  from  passion;  provided  no  insur 
ance  against  the  vicissitudes  of  existence;  did  not 
lead  to  peace  of  soul — to  the  Nirvana."  Siddhatthu 
withdrew  publicly  from  the  class  of  Rudraka,  five  of 
whose  disciples  accompanied  him ;  and  for  six  years 
he  devoted  himself  to  the  practice  of  the  severest 
austerities  in  the  retreat  of  Uruvela.  At  the  end  of 
that  period  he  became  persuaded  that  asceticism  does 
not  lead  the  soul  to  the  supremo  knowledge;  and 
accordingly,  while  still  remaining  in  the  hermitage  of 
Uruvela,  he  took  abundant  food,  while  yet  continuing 
his  meditations.  This  was  considered  by  his  five 
disciples  as  a  fall  which  ought  to  forfeit  their  respect 
and  confidence ;  and  they  left  him  for  one  of  the  great 
Brahminical  establishments  in  Benares.  It  was  in  the 
solitude  of  the  later  period  of  his  retreat  that  Sid 
dhatthu  would  appear  to  have  finally  determined  the 
principles  of  his  system,  and  the  rules  of  life  which  he 
meant  to  propose  to  his  followers.  Here,  too,  his 
deerskin  dress  fell  to  pieces,  and  by  way  of  marking 
his  progress  in  asceticism,  as  understood  in  India,  he 
dressed  himself  hi  the  rags  of  a  winding-sheet  which 
had  been  thrown  round  a  corpse  in  a  neighbouring 
cemetery,  and  which  was  disinterred  for  the  purpose. 
But  he  was  still  short  of  the  object  of  his  efforts. 
"  By  all  that  I  have  acquired,"  ho  said,  "  I  have  far 
surpassed  human  law ;  but  I  have  not  yet  succeeded 

B 


1 8  Jesus  Christ  and  Buddha. 

in  clearly  distinguishing  the  really  venerable  wisdom. 
Not  yet  have  I  reached  the  true  way  of  understand 
ing.  My  present  attainments  do  not  really  put  an 
end  to  old  age,  to  sickness,  to  death." 

However,  the  moment  of  the  ecstasy  in  which 
Siddhatthu  believed  that  he  did  thus  attain  to  the 
supreme  intelligence  was  at  hand.  The  place  is  marked 
with  special  particularity  in  the  Buddhist  literature ;  it 
shares  their  importance  with  Uruvela,  the  scene  of 
his  six  years'  retirement,  and  Kusinara,  the  scene 
of  his  death.  It  is  termed  Bodhimanda,  the  seat  of 
understanding :  and  all  the  details  of  the  ecstasy  are 
preserved  with  scrupulous  care.  We  are  told  how 
the  future  Buddha  met  a  man  who  was  cutting  down 
herbs,  and  asked  him  for  sufficient  to  make  a  carpet 
with;  which  he  carefully  arranged  with  the  foliage 
downwards  and  the  root  upwards,  under  a  species  of 
fig-tree,  which,  as  the  Bodhidrouma  or  tree  of  intel 
ligence,  became  an  object  of  Buddhist  veneration,  and 
was  visited  ten  centuries  later  by  the  Chinese  pilgrims. 
Here  he  remained  motionless  for  a  day  and  a  night, 
plunged  hi  contemplation,  until  at  last  the  perfect 
and  absolute  science  (Bodhi)  came  to  him,  illuminated 
him,  changed  him  into  the  Buddha.  Just  at  the 
breaking  of  the  dawn,  when  they  beat  the  drums,  the 
triple  science  was  reached  by  him.  He  rose,  with  the 
energy  of  a  profound  conviction  that  he  had  mastered 
the  remedy  for  human  pain:  he  rose  the  sincere 


Jesus  C/irist  and  Buddha.  \  9 

founder  of  a  now  and    powerful  religion,  albeit  a 
miserably  false  one. 

He  was  now  thirty-six  years  old,  and  he  spent  nine 
teen  years  from  this  date  in  propagating  his  religion 
in  Central  and  Eastern  India.  He  had  to  pass  through 
a  new  period  of  hesitation  and  anguish.  Was  it  not 
enough  to  have  discovered  for  himself  the  secret  of 
human  deliverance  :  must  he  encounter  the  opposi 
tion  which  would  follow  any  attempt  to  announce  it 
to  others  ?  Three  times  he  was  on  the  point  of  yield 
ing  to  this  passing  weakness ;  he  overcame  it  by  u 
reflection  which,  while  it  seriously  limits  the  claims 
which  were  advanced  on  his  behalf,  is  illustrative  of 
the  great  common  sense  which  accompanied  his 
singular  reveries.  "  All  living  beings,"  said  he,  "  may 
be  ranged  hi  three  classes:  one-third  lives  in  false 
hood,  and  may  be  expected  to  remain  there ;  another 
third  lives  in  truth ;  another  in  uncertainty.  Whether 
I  teach  or  not,  they  who  are  fixed  in  falsehood  will 
not  know  the  law,  and  they  who  are  in  the  truth  will 
know  it  But  they  who  are  in  uncertainty  depend 
upon  my  efforts :  they  will  know  the  law  if  I  teach  it, 
they  will  remain  ignorant  if  I  am  silent."  An  ad 
mirable  reflection  for  any  man  who  proposes  on  what 
ever  scale  to  do  good  to  his  fellow-creatures.  There 
are  many  who  do  not  need,  and  many  who  cannot 
profit  by  his  efforts;  but  there  is  an  intermediate 
class,  within  and  for  which  he  works,  and  which  will 


2O  Jesus  Christ  and  Buddha. 

depend  altogether  upon  his  activity  and  determina 
tion. 

The  Buddha  (for  such  he  now  was)  bethought  him 
self  of  teaching  his  new  knowledge  to  his  old  friends, 
the  Brahmins  Uddaka  and  Alara.  They,  however, 
were  both  dead — beyond  the  reach  of  his  specific  for 
escaping  transmigration,  so  he  determined  to  seek 
his  fugitive  disciples  at  Benares.  He  turned  his  face 
northward,  towards  the  Ganges  :  he  found  his  disciples 
in  a  wood  near  the  great  city  Benares.  They  were 
still  angry,  and  agreed,  as  he  approached,  that  they 
would  not  show  him  any  mark  of  respect,  or  touch 
his  mendicant  vestment,  or  his  box  for  alms,  or  give 
him  aught  to  drink,  or  offer  him  a  carpet,  or  rise 
from  their  seats  at  his  approach.  "  But  as  he  came 
on,"  says  the  Sutra,  "  a  resistless  instinct  overcame 
them  in  spite  of  themselves.  One  after  another  they 
rose;  they  lavished  upon  him  successively  all  the 
marks  of  hospitality  and  consideration  which  they 
had  just  forbidden  themselves ;  and  he  in  turn  an 
nounced  to  them  that  he  was  now  the  Buddha,  who 
knew  all,  saw  all,  understood  all,  and  only  waited  to 
instruct  them  in  the  secret  of  existence,  in  the  way 
lo  arrive  at  Nirvana."  They  were  from  that  moment 
devoted  to  him ;  and,  as  the  scene  of  his  first  public 
preaching,  Benares  became  more  sacred  in  the  eyes  of 
Buddhists  than  it  had  already  been  for  ages  in  those 
of  Brahmins.  Of  his  work  at  Benares  we  know  little ; 


Jesus  Christ  and  Buddha.  2 1 

for  here  the  Lalita-vistara  fails  us;  and  no  other 
Sutra  accessible  to  Europeans  enters  so  fully  into  the 
details  of  his  life.  His  remaining  years  were  passed 
in  incessant  preaching.  Some  of  his  disciples  followed 
him  in  his  wanderings ;  others  retired  to  woods  and 
solitudes  to  practise  the  contemplations  by  which 
they  might  attain  the  wished-for  rest  of  Nirvana.  He 
was  protected  by  powerful  monarchs  on  either  bank 
of  the  Ganges,  especially  by  Bimbasara,  the  friend  of 
his  early  years,  and,  after  an  interval  of  estrangement 
and  persecution,  by  his  son :  the  former  offered  him 
a  residence  near  his  capital,  where  the  Buddha  lived 
for  a  long  period  and  made  his  most  considerable 
converts.  The  king  of  Sravasti  was  equally  hospitable ; 
and  at  last  he  won  his  own  family  to  his  convictions. 
His  father,  the  aged  king  of  Kapilavatthu,  came  after 
a  parting  of  twelve  years'  duration  to  visit  a  son,  the 
reputation  of  whose  sanctity  and  knowledge  was 
spreading  through  Northern  Hindustan ;  and  the  visit 
was  solemnly  returned :  the  race  of  the  Sakyas  fur 
nished  converts  to  the  new  creed,  especially  Ananda, 
nephew  of  the  Buddha,  whose  name  enters  largely 
into  the  literature  of  his  life. 

Of  his  struggles  with  the  angry  Brahmins  we  know 
little;  but  there  can  be  no  doubt  that  his  success 
roused  their  fears  and  wounded  their  vanity.  The 
later  legends  describe  a  species  of  religious  tourna 
ment,  in  which,  before  a  kiner  and  an  assembled 


2  2  Jesus  Christ  and  Buddha. 

people,  the  Buddha  defeated  his  Brahmin  oppon 
ents;  the  Chinese  pilgrims  collected  traditions  to 
the  effect  that  the  Brahmins  menaced  and  nearly 
took  his  life.  The  wonder  is  that  they  did  not  take 
it;  there  can  be  no  doubt  what  they  would  have 
done,  could  they  have  seen  its  importance  in  the 
light  of  later  centuries. 

Buddha  died  at  the  ripe  age  of  eighty,  surrounded 
by  an  enormous  crowd  of  disciples  and  mendicants,  and 
attended  by  his  devoted  relative,  Ananda.  He  knew 
that  his  end  was  near.  He  crossed  the  Ganges  for 
the  last  time;  paid  a  last  visit  to  the  sacred  city 
Benares;  and,  in  his  quality  of  Arhat,  bestowed  a 
religious  commission  on  several  mendicants,  specially 
on  Soubhadra.  It  was  in  a  wood  near  the  town 
of  Kusinara  that  he  breathed  his  last,  believing 
himself,  believed  by  his  followers,  to  have  attained 
the  supreme  bliss  of  ecstatic  annihilation.  The  de 
tails  of  his  funeral  have  been  scrupulously  described. 
His  body  was  burned  eight  days  after  his  decease; 
the  struggles  for  the  ashes  threatened  even  blood 
shed.  The  ashes  were  enclosed  in  a  golden  urn,  and 
carried  to  the  public  hall  of  the  town,  where,  during 
seven  days,  feasts  were  celebrated  in  his  honour.  The 
relics  were  then  divided  into  eight  parts,  and  distri 
buted  among  eight  towns,  each  of  which  built  a  shrine 
(tochaitya)  for  their  reception. 

The  founder  of  the  new  religion  was  dead,  but  his 


Jesus  Christ  and  Buddha. 


followers  assembled  in  a  species  of  synod  to  systema 
tise  his  teaching.  The  first  meeting  lasted  for  seven 
months.  The  result  was  that  the  teaching  of  the 
master  was  drawn  up  under  the  threefold  heads  of 
precepts,  discipline,  and  philosophy;  but  a  century 
later  abuses  hi  discipline  made  a  second  assembly 
or  synod  necessary.  It  sat  for  eight  months.  It 
decided,  inter  alia,  that  salt  might  not  be  kept  for 
more  than  ten  days;  that  nothing  might  be  eaten 
after  mid-day;  that  no  act  might  be  undertaken 
without  permission;  that  milk  might  not  be  taken 
after  a  repast ;  that  splendid  carpets  were  not  to  be 
purchased  for  sitting  on ;  that  jewels  set  in  gold  and 
silver  might  not  be  worn.  The  schisms  which  grew 
up  after  this  second  synod  led  to  a  third,  under  the 
King  Asoka, — the  Constantino,  as  he  has  been  called, 
of  Buddhism, — about  246  years  before  Christ.  Asoka, 
after  being  a  vehement  partisan  of  Brahminism,  was 
a  passionate  convert  to  the  rival  religion;  and  at 
his  instigation,  during  a  sitting  of  nine  months,  the 
Buddhist  sacred  books  were  digested  and  collected. 
A  fourth  synod  was  held  in  Cashmere,  during  the 
very  time  that  our  Lord  was  in  Palestine,  between 
the  years  10  and  30  of  the  Christian  era.  The  occasion 
was  the  claim  of  a  certain  mendicant  of  Cashmere  to 
be  an  incarnation  of  Mara,  the  god  of  death.  At  this 
JMOrnbly  the  doctrines  and  the  sacred  writings  of 
Buddhism  received  their  definitive  form;  and  although 


24  Jesus  Christ  and  Buddha. 

its  authority  was  not  acknowledged  by  the  southern 
Buddhists,  it  completed,  for  all  practical  purposes,  and 
for  the  great  bulk  of  Buddhist  believers,  the  work 
which  had  begun  five  centuries  and  a  half  before. 

For  nearly  three  centuries  Buddhism  was  confined 
to  the  districts  of  India  which  gave  it  birth.  It  was 
only  after  the  third  synod,  held  in  the  year  246  B.C., 
that  it  became  a  missionary  power.  It  was  then  re 
solved  to  make  a  great  effort  for  the  conversion  of 
other  races ;  and  although  the  stories  of  the  successes 
achieved  by  the  Buddhist  ascetics  can  hardly  be 
regarded  as  trustworthy,  it  seems  clear  that  they 
penetrated  with  success  into  Cabul,  Cashmere,  even 
the  Caucasus ;  that  they  came  into  contact  with  the 
Syro- Greek  civilisation  of  Western  Asia,  and  were 
heard  even  in  Macedonia.  Asoka  did  much  to  organise 
and  sustain  these  efforts;  his  own  son,  Mahinda, 
undertook  the  conversion  of  Ceylon,  in  B.C.  245.  He 
was  accompanied  by  four  disciples,  and  the  young 
monarch  of  the  island  assigned  them  a  garden  for 
their  public  conferences.  Here  Mahinda  preached 
for  twenty-six  days,  and  at  the  end  of  that  period 
received  the  adhesion  of  the  king  and  a  great  part 
of  his  people  to  the  Buddhist  doctrines.  Ceylon  was 
endowed  with  two  of  the  greatest  Buddhist  relics — 
the  alms-box  which  Sakya-Mouni  had  carried  as  a 
mendicant,  and  a  branch  of  the  tree  under  which  he 
had,  in  ecstasy,  become  the  Buddha.  When  the  king 


Jesus  Christ  and  Buddha.  25 

of  the  island  sent  an  embassy  to  the  Roman  Emperor 
Claudius,  it  must  have  been  entirely  Buddhist. 
Pliny  probably  means  Buddha  when  he  says  that  the 
inhabitants  of  Taprobana  adored  Hercules — an  odd 
kind  of  equivalent  to  Buddha  no  doubt,  but  the  best 
Pliny  could  think  of.  When  the  Chinese  pilgrim 
Fa-Hien  visited  the  island  at  the  beginning  of  the 
fifth  century  of  the  Christian  era,  he  found  in  it  a 
much  more  intense  and  fervid  Buddhism  than  that 
on  the  Indian  continent.  A  long  line  of  kings  of 
Ceylon,  with  few  exceptions,  were  devoted  Buddhists ; 
Ceylon  alone  produced  a  copious  and  rich  Buddhist 
literature.  From  it  the  new  religion  spread  to  the 
countries  east  of  the  Ganges — to  Burmah,  Siam,  the 
whole  western  and  central  portion  of  the  Burmese  pen 
insula;  the  eastern  side,  Cochin-China  and  Tonquin, 
would  seem  to  have  been  Buddhised — if  I  may  coin 
the  word — from  China.  Into  China  Buddhism  was 
introduced  first  after  the  third  synod — two  centuries 
and  a  half  before  our  Lord — but  with  poor  success.  It 
was  in  the  year  A.D.  65  that  the  reigning  Emperor  sent 
a  commission  of  inquiry  into  India,  which  resulted  in 
the  return  of  some  eminent  Buddhist  ascetics,  and  the 
building  of  a  magnificent  convent  in  Lo-yang.  The 
Indian  books  (the  Lalita-vistara,  in  particular)  were 
translated  into  Chinese;  the  new  religion  made  its 
way  in  the  imperial  family ;  it  profited  by  the  division 
of  the  empire  after  the  fall  of  the  Han  dynasty ;  it 


26  Jesus  Christ  and  Buddha. 

profited  by  the  restored  unity  of  the  empire  under 
the  Tsui  dynasty.  Then  began  that  wonderful  inter 
course  of  pilgrimages  between  China  and  India,  some 
records  of  which  poured  such  a  flood  of  light  about 
fifteen  years  ago  upon  Buddhist  history,  and  which 
deepened  and  consolidated  Buddhism  in  what  is  now, 
perhaps,  the  chief  seat  of  its  power. 

The  Buddhist  propaganda  in  Central  and  West 
Central  Asia  was  earlier  hi  point  of  time.  The  mis 
sionaries  of  Buddhism  were  preaching  in  Bactriana 
at  least  sixty  years  before  the  Incarnation  of  our 
Lord;  Alexander  Polyhistor  refers  to  them  as  the 
Samaneans.  St.  Clement  of  Alexandria  was  much 
interested  in  what  he  heard  of  them  in  the  second 
century  of  the  Christian  era.  The  powerful  prince 
Kanichka, — whose  empire  at  the  beginning  of  the 
Christian  era  included  Cabul  and  part  of  India,  while 
it  extended  to  the  banks  of  the  Oxus, — became  a  fervid 
Buddhist,  and  threw  the  whole  weight  of  his  political 
influence  into  the  cause  of  this  creed.  From  Bactriana, 
Buddhism  penetrated  northward,  and  into  the  western 
kingdoms  of  Central  Asia,  the  region  of  Khotan, 
Yarkand,  and  Kashgar,  with  the  actual  condition  of 
which  the  English  public  has  been  recently  made 
familiar  by  the  highly  interesting  and  instructive  work 
of  Mr.  Commissioner  Shaw.  From  these  countries  of 
Western  Turkestan  Buddhism  was  driven  by  the  great 
Mussulman  invasion  of  the  twelfth  century.  It  does 


Jesus  Christ  and  Buddha.  2  7 

not  seem  to  have  reached  Thibet  until  the  seventh 
century  of  the  Christian  era.  The  reigning  monarch 
sent  his  prime  minister,  Tuomi,  with  sixteen  others, 
into  India,  in  the  year  A.D.  632,  to  study  the  Buddhist 
doctrines  and  bring  back  the  sacred  books.  On  his 
return,  the  king  built  the  great  Buddhist  temple  of 
Lhassa,  and  married  two  princesses, — one  a  Nepalese 
and  the  other  a  Chinese,  both  of  whom  had  been 
brought  up  as  Buddhists.  They  came  with  an 
immense  assortment  of  Buddhist  books  and  images; 
but  the  first  Grand  Lama,  Tischeu,  who  also  came 
from  India,  was  not  established  before  the  middle  of 
the  ninth  century.  He  was  made  administrator  of 
the  kingdom  by  the  reigning  king,  and  thus  his 
successors  became  sovereigns  of  the  country,  after 
the  reform  of  the  Lamas  in  the  fourteenth  century— 
a  singular  institution,  which  is  no  essential  part  of 
the  Buddhist  hierarchy,  but  is  profoundly  inspired  by 
the  spirit  of  Buddhism. 

Buddhism,  while  achieving  these  conquests  beyond 
the  Himalayas,  was  losing  ground  in  the  country 
which  gave  it  birth.  The  great  struggle  with  Brah- 
minisin  appears  to  have  already  begun  in  the  second 
century  of  the  Christian  era.  Buddhism  was  not 
finally  beaten  and  expelled  from  Bengal  until  the 
fourteenth  century.  Of  the  details  of  the  struggle  we 
know  little,  although  it  is  not  difficult  to  understand 
its  motives.  The  persecuted  Buddhists  took  refuge 


28  Jesus  Christ  and  Buddha. 

in  Nepaul  at  the  southern  foot  of  the  Himalayas,  or 
they  passed  into  China  and  Thibet ;  and  at  this  date 
nothing  remains  to  attest  their  ancient  power  in  large 
districts  of  India  but  the  deserted  stoupas,  which,  like 
Druidical  stones  in  this  country,  witness  to  the  power 
of  a  religion  that  has  passed  away. 

It  is,  as  it  appears  to  me,  impossible  not  to  recognise 
in  the  founder  of  Buddhism  one  of  the  most  interesting 
and  beautiful  figures  which  are  to  be  found  hi  the 
annals  of  Paganism.  Here  is  a  young  man,  born  in  a 
happy  tune,  born  of  a  just  and  generous  father  and 
a  loving  mother,  cradled  in  wealth  and  luxury,  wel 
comed  to  life  by  all  that  it  has  best  to  offer  in  the 
way  of  outward  advantages,  the  heir  of  a  noble  name, 
the  heir  of  a  throne.  He  is  virtuous;  he  is  intel 
lectual;  he  is  good-looking;  he  is  popular;  he  marries 
a  young  wife  who  is  also  pre-eminently  beautiful  and 
good ;  life  opens  on  him,  as  far  as  outward  blessings 
go,  with  all  the  glow  and  splendour  of  an  Eastern 
morning.  But  his  happiness  is  poisoned  by  the 
spectacle  of  sufferings  around  him,  which  are  too 
great,  too  many,  too  rooted  in  the  fixed  conditions  of 
human  life,  to  admit  of  his  relieving  them ;  and  his 
sense  of  these  sufferings  is  heightened  by  his  inherited 
belief  in  the  transmigration  of  souls  from  body  to 
body,  a  doctrine  which,  while  making  existence  a 
curse,  makes  escape  from  it,  if  possible,  a  blessing. 
His  thoughts,  his  studies,  his  enthusiasms  are  thus 


Jesus  Christ  and  Buddha.  29 

grounded  in  a  most  unselfish  and  generous  impulse ; 
and  when  he  renounces  his  home  and  his  crown,  his 
wealth  and  his  power,  to  become  a  beggar  and  a  soli- 
tary,  to  meditate,  amid  self-imposed  hardships,  upon 
the  ultimate  secrets  of  human  destiny,  we  do  better 
perhaps  in  admiring  the  loftiness  of  his  motive  than 
in  wondering  at  the  results  of  his  career.  Clearly 
his  was  a  character  to  which  power  over  the  outward 
circumstances  of  his  fellows  was  of  little  account  in 
comparison  with  power  to  elevate,  perhaps  to  govern, 
hearts  and  minds ;  he  belonged  to  that  higher  order 
of  men  who  think  more  of  the  charities  of  life  than  of 
its  outward  advantages ;  more  of  independence  of  con 
science  than  of  the  lore  of  easy  circumstances ;  more  of 
the  happiness  of  multitudes  than  of  personal  privileges 
and  position ;  more  of  the  future  destinies  of  man  than 
of  the  splendid  but  transient  present.  If  in  his  efforts 
to  admit  all  to  the  knowledge  which  Brahrninism  re 
served  for  a  favoured  few,  and  to  modify  the  con 
sequences  of  a  doctrine  which,  perhaps  inevitably,  he 
never  thought  of  questioning,  he  became  the  victim 
of  a  self-deluding  and  stupefying  ecstasy,  and  the 
author  of  a  creed  which  is  a  thinly  disguised  atheism, 
this  must  not  blind  us  to  his  real  titles  to  respectful 
sympathy.  If  we  measure  his  failure  in  the  light  of 
a  revelation  of  absolute  Truth  which  he  never  heard 
of,  we  must  admit  that  his  love  of  such  truth  as  he 
hoped  to  win,  and  the  sacrifices  ho  so  cheerfully  and 


30  Jesus  Christ  and  Buddha. 

unflinchingly  made  in  order  to  attain  it,  are  Christian 
at  least  as  well  as  Pagan  virtues,  and  that  it  may  be 
impossible  for  honest  Christians  to  think  over  the 
career  of  this  heathen  prince  without  some  keen  feel 
ings  of  humiliation  and  shame. 

In  truth,  from  age  to  age,  Tyre  and  Sidon  are 
rebuking  the  indifference  of  Capernaum  to  its  awful 
privileges;  and  Sakya-Mouni  is  not  the  last  Pagan 
who  might  read  a  useful  lesson  to  the  children  of 
the  Church. 

I  have  not  suggested,  except  indirectly,  the  com 
parison  or  contrast  between  Christianity  and  Buddhism 
which  it  was  proposed  to  institute.  But  much  will 
have  occurred  to  you  incidentally,  almost  inevitably,  in 
what  has  been  said.  And  why  Buddhism  succeeded 
as  it  did,  and  how  in  its  conceptions  of  heaven,  of 
life,  of  destiny,  of  conduct,  it  contrasts  with  the  Faith 
which  dates  from  Calvary  and  Pentecost,  will  be  the 
subject  of  another  lecture. 


JESUS  CHRIST  AND  BUDDHA. 


II.  COMPARISON  BETWEEN  BUDDHISM  AND  CHRISTIANITY.1 


review  of  the  life  of  Buddha,  and  of  the  his 
torical  development  of  Buddhism,  which  engaged 
our  attention  last  Tuesday  will  probably  have  sug 
gested  a  question  that,  in  one  form  or  another,  presses 
heavily  upon  the  thought  of  the  present  generation. 
That  question  is,  whether  Christianity  is  or  is  not 
ESSENTIALLY  different  from  this  and  the  other  great 
religions  of  the  world  ;  whether  it  is,  so  to  speak,  in 
the  same  line  with  them,  the  product  of  a  race,  the 
product  of  the  intellectual  and  moral  circumstances  of 
an  epoch  ;  or  whether  it  has  that  in  it  which  makes 
it  altogether  distinct,  so  that  while  they  are  the 
shadow,  it  is  the  reality,  —  while  they  are  the  human 
and  the  relative,  it  is  the  absolute  and  the  Divine  ? 

This  question  belongs  to  our  present  state  of  know 
ledge  rather  than  to  that  of  former  centuries.  When 
men  knew  little  of  the  great  Eastern  religions,  witli 
the  one  exception  of  Mohammedanism,  it  never  oc 
curred  to  them  to  compare  Buddhism  or  Parseeisin  or 

1  Lecture    delivered    in    8t   Paul's    Cathedral,   oil  Tuesday  evening, 
January  a8,  1873. 

n 


Jesus  Christ  and  Buddha. 


Confucianism  with  Christianity  in  this  way.  They 
lived,  like  the  Tyrolese  peasantry  in  their  beautiful 
valleys,  in  an  intellectual  world  whose  horizons  were 
sharply  bounded  on  this  side  and  on  that ;  and  they 
never  thought  of  asking  themselves  the  question, 
what  was  the  aspect,  what  the  relative  beauty,  of  the 
plains  which  stretched  away  beyond  the  mountains 
which  limited  their  view.  It  is  far  otherwise  now. 
And  although  it  will  be  quite  impossible  to  give  a  full 
answer  to  so  grave  a  question  as  that  before  us,  we 
may  do  well  to  keep  it  in  view  during  the  course  of 
the  ensuing  discussion. 


(a)  Here  it  is  natural  to  reflect  that  a  true  and 
a  false  religion,  the  most  absolutely  true  and  the 
most  certainly  and  irretrievably  false,  must,  from  the 
nature  of  the  case,  have  much  in  common.  They 
must  have  many  common  elements,  and  especially  for 
this  reason:  both  religions,  the  true  and  the  false, 
have  to  make  themselves  at  home  among  men;  to 
provide  for  their  recognition,  their  permanence, — if  it 
may  be,  their  empire ;  and  in  order  to  do  this,  they 
have,  in  varying  degrees,  to  accommodate  themselves 
to  certain  fixed,  unchanging  conditions  of  thought, 
life,  feeling,  social  organisation.  The  human  intellect 
is  the  same  thing  in  Thibet  and  in  Europe ;  the  human 
heart  is  under  the  empire  of  the  same  attractions  and 


Jesus  Christ  and  Buddha.  33 

repulsions  in  one  continent  as  in  another ;  the  ultimate 
laws  of  social  organisation  and  the  conditions  of  its 
modification  are  everywhere  the  same.  Every  religion, 
be  it  true  or  false,  has  to  take  these  things  into  account, 
at  least  to  a  certain  extent ;  and  in  its  outward  exhi 
bition  of  itself  every  religion  is  influenced  by  them. 
Human  nature,  in  short,  reflects,  or  inflicts,  a  common 
human  element  on  all  religions,  true  and  false  alike. 
No  religion  can  ignore  the  laws  of  association  in 
a  common  conviction;  the  laws  of  propagating  a 
common  conviction;  the  necessity  of  expressing  a 
common  conviction  in  language,  in  the  outward  cir 
cumstances,  habits,  surroundings  of  life.  And  the 
result,  let  me  repeat,  is  that  all  religions,  the  truest 
and  the  most  false,  have,  from  the  nature  of  the  case, 
certain  elements  in  common;  they  have  that  in 
common  which  is  imposed  on  them  from  without  by 
the  laws  of  that  society  and  life  with  which  they  deal 
And  these  common  features  are  often  so  numerous 
and  so  complex,  they  say  so  much  to  the  eye  and  to 
the  imagination,  that  men,  forgetting  the  underlying 
and  ineffaceable  distinctness,  are  tempted  to  exclaim, 
"  Surely  these  religions  are  merely  different  forms  of 
the  same  thing ;  plants,  both  of  them,  of  human  growth, 
with  only  such  differences  as  are  imposed  on  them 
respectively  by  their  date,  their  country,  their  circum 
stances."  And  yet  such  a  judgment  is  irrational,  since 
it  confuses  the  accidental  with  the  essential  not  less 


34  Jesus  Christ  and  Buddha. 

completely  than  would  a  naturalist  who  should  mis 
take  like  influences  of  climate  or  training  on  the  colour 
or  habits  of  two  distinct  animals  for  specific  identity 
of  type. 

Now  Buddhism  undoubtedly  presents  some  resem 
blance  to  particular  features  of  the  Christian  Church, 
or  to  matters  common  to  all  Christian  Churches, 
which  have  been  largely  insisted  on  by  a  certain 
school  of  modern  writers.  Thus  the  Buddhist  insti 
tutions  for  leading  a  common  life,  under  somewhat 
severe  rule,  have  often  been  compared  with  Christian 
monasticisin. 

The  mendicants  or  monks,  who  copied  Buddha's 
life  more  exactly,  and  who  aimed  at  a  higher  standard 
than  that  of  ordinary  Buddhists,  were  under  rules  of 
exceptional  severity.  Like  the  Buddha,  they  were 
ordered  to  wear  rags  dug  up  from  a  cemetery  and 
covered  only  by  a  yellow  linen  overcoat.  None  might 
possess  more  than  three  sets  of  such  rags.  They  were 
to  live  only  on  what  could  be  procured  by  begging 
alms  from  house  to  house,  in  a  wooden  box.  While 
doing  this  they  were  to  preserve  the  strictest  silence : 
nothing  might  induce  them  to  break  it.  A  single 
meal  in  the  day  was  all  that  they  might  take.  They 
were  never  to  eat  after  noon  on  any  pretence.  Except 
in  the  rainy  season,  when  they  might  live  in  the 
viharas  or  convents,  they  were  to  live  and  sleep  in  the 
woods  or  open  fields :  they  might  come  into  the  towns 


Jesus  Christ  and  Buddha.  35 

only  to  beg.  They  were  to  cover  themselves  at  night, 
if  at  all,  with  the  leaves  of  trees ;  to  rest,  if  at  all, 
against  the  trunks  of  trees;  to  go  to  sleep  sitting, and  not 
lying  down ;  not  to  rearrange  their  carpet,  when  it  had 
once  been  spread.  Once  a  month  every  Buddhist  men 
dicant  was  to  repair  to  a  cemetery,  to  meditate  amongst 
the  dead  on  the  instability  of  human  things.  He  was 
to  expel  covetousness  by  renouncing  property :  he  was 
to  crush  sensuality  by  leading  a  single  life.  He  was 
to  keep  before  him  as  the  six  transcendental  virtues, 
which,  in  Buddhist  language,  "  carry  man  over  to  the 
other  bank,"  almsgiving,  poverty,  patience,  courage, 
contemplation,  knowledge  of  the  law.  This  was  the 
general  rule  of  life  for  men — the  bhikshus,  or  Bud 
dhist  mendicants.  Sakya-Mouni's  aunt  and  nurse 
became  the  founder  of  a  similar  method  of  life  for 
women.  When  these  mendicants  lived  together,  others 
who  wished  to  live  according  to  the  stricter  Buddhist 
life,  and  yet  not  to  bind  themselves  to  all  the  obliga 
tions  of  a  religious  order,  were  associated  with  the 
regular  mendicants  as  a  kind  of  lay  brethren.  At  this 
moment  the  soil  of  China  and  Thibet  is  covered  with 
Buddhist  convents  of  this  description. 

Profound  as  are  differences  both  in  the  object  and 
spirit  of  these  institutions  and  those  in  Christendom, 
the  great  general  resemblance  is  undeniable ;  and  the 
same  observation  has  been  extended  to  the  details  of 
t!i'  I Uiddhist  ritual  and  hierarchy.  When  MM.  Hue 


36  Jesus  Christ  and  Buddha. 

and  Gabet,  the  Roman  Catholic  missionaries,  published 
their  well-known  Travels  in  Thibet,  they  described  all 
the  Buddhist  ceremonials  in  the  usual  language  of  the 
Roman  Catholic  Church.  "  It  is  impossible,"  says  the 
Abb6  Hue,  "  not  to  be  struck  with  the  resemblance  to 
Catholicism."  He  then  enumerates  a  long  list  of  cor 
respondences  in  matters  of  order  and  ceremonial :  he 
describes  the  proceedings  of  the  Lamas  in  the  regular 
terms  of  the  Roman  Pontifical.  He  had,  in  fact,  no 
other  language  at  command  to  describe  what  he  saw : 
but  his  book  was  stupidly  put  upon  the  Index,  as  if  it 
were  intended  to  imply  that  Roman  Catholicism  and 
Buddhism  were  substantially  identical  In  the  same 
manner  a  comparison  has  been  drawn  between  the 
Grand  Lama  of  Thibet  and  the  Pope,  and  between 
such  Buddhist  monarchs  on  the  other  side  of  the 
Himalayas  as  Asoka  and  his  successors  and  the  Con- 
stantinopolitan  Emperors,  or  the  Czars  of  Russia,  or 
Henry  vm.  and  the  Tudor  and  Stuart  sovereigns  of 
this  country,  in  their  relations  to  particular  sections 
of  the  Christian  Church.  Such  resemblances  are 
due,  not  to  any  essential  correspondence  between  the 
Buddhist  and  Christian  religions,  but  to  the  general 
laws  which  govern  the  self-presentation  and  activities 
of  any  religion  in  this  human  world,  at  particular 
social  epochs,  and  under  certain  recurring  circum 
stances. 

Again,  to  take  points  which  concern  all  Christians 


Jesus  Christ  and  Buddha.  37 

equally,  the  Buddhist  missionaries  are  undeniably 
more  like  missionaries  of  the  Christian  Church  than 
are  the  propagators  of  any  other  known  religion. 

Contrast  them  with  the  apostles  of  Islam.  Moham 
medanism  too  aimed  at  the  conversion  of  the  world, 
but  its  instrument  was,  not  preaching,  but  the  sword. 
The  followers  of  the  Prophet,  encouraged  to  believe 
that  Paradise,  peopled  with  beautiful  houris,  would 
open  its  gates  immediately  to  the  Moslem  who  had 
died  fighting  for  the  sacred  cause,  swept  through 
Western  Asia  and  Northern  Africa,  with  the  cry, 
"Death  or  Conversion!"  The  Buddhist  prince, 
Mahinda,  who  converted  Ceylon,  addressed  himself  to 
his  work  just  as  any  quiet  Christian  missionary  would 
do  at  the  present  day :  he  succeeded  in  getting  the 
government  to  allow  him  a  fair  hearing,  and  he  made 
the  most  of  it.  So  far  as  its  method  went,  the  con 
version  of  Ceylon  was  in  no  way  distinguishable  from 
St.  Paul's  labours  at  Philippi  and  Thessalonica ;  it  was 
a  work  of  moral  and  spiritual  influence,  as  distinct 
from  violence  or  compulsion  of  any  kind.  Again,  the 
process  whereby  the  Buddhist  Councils  formulated 
their  common  stock  of  doctrines,  and  defined  what, 
for  want  of  a  better  name,  we  must  call  the  canon  of 
their  sacred  books,  cannot  but  remind  us  of  what  took 
place  in  the  early  centuries  of  Christendom.  Any  one 
who  will  read  such  accessible  and  entirely  trustworthy 
manuals  as  Professor  Westcott's  History  of  the  Canon 


38  Jesus  Christ  and  Buddha. 

of  ike  New  Testament,  or  his  Bible  in  the  Church,  will 
see  what  I  mean,  in  observing  how,  gradually,  and 
in  some  cases  only  after  very  grave  hesitation,  the 
Church  of  Christ  too  arrived  at  the  recognition  of  her 
Scriptures.  These  admissions,  I  must  repeat,  prove 
nothing  as  to  the  worth  of  the  teaching  of  the  Bud 
dhist  missionary,  or  as  to  the  truths  of  the  Buddhist 
sacred  books,  still  less  as  to  the  human  origin  or 
authority  of  Christian  Doctrine  or  the  Christian  Scrip 
tures.  The  undeniable  resemblance  is  to  be  referred 
to  the  operation  of  those  general  laws  which  govern 
the  expression  and  propagation  of  religious  thought, 
whatever  be  its  real  claims  upon  our  faith  and  obedi 
ence. 

(@)  A  second  reflection  which  must  be  made  is  this. 
No  religion,  however  false,  is  so  false  as  not  to  con 
tain  some  elements  of  truth.  The  fetich-worship  of 
the  lowest  savage  affirms  this  great  truth,  that  man 
must  look  out  of,  beyond,  above  himself,  for  a  worthy 
object  of  his  intellectual  and  moral  aspirations.  And 
the  truth  which  is  imbedded  in  a  false  religion  is  its 
element  of  permanency  and  strength :  the  false  creed 
lives  on  and  spreads,  if  it  does  live  and  spread,  because, 
amid  all  the  falsehood  which  it  teaches,  it  teaches  also 
truth,  and  so  justifies  itself  to  the  deepest  instincts  of 
the  human  conscience.  The  conscience  cannot  gene 
rally  analyse  the  food  which  is  offered  to  the  soul  at 
the  moment  of  reception,  and  it  is  coaxed  into  receiv- 


Jesus  Christ  and  Buddlia.  39 

ing  an  immense  conglomerate  of  truths  and  lies,  by  its 
profound  affinity  for  the  truths  which  make  the  lies 
tolerable,  or  even  welcome.  Who  shall  deny,  for 
instance,  the  splendour  of  the  truth  upon  which 
Mohammedanism  traded,  and  which  it  still  puts  for 
ward,  the  truth  of  the  Divine  Unity  ?  "  There  is  no 
God  but  God : "  it  is  a  glorious  confession,  if  only  it 
could  be  divorced  from  the  ambition  of  an  impostor, 
and  from  a  theory  of  heaven  which  would  make  the 
Divine  Presence  the  scene  of  a  sensual  revel. 

Now,  the  strength,  the  invigorating  element  of 
truth  in  Buddhism,  lies  especially  in  its  moral  teach 
ing.  On  this  head  there  is,  so  far  as  I  am  aware,  no 
room  for  controversy.  "Taken  by  itself,"  says  Pro-  \ 
fessor  Max  Miiller,  "  the  moral  code  of  Buddhism  is  I 
one  of  the  most  perfect  that  the  world  has  ever/ 
known."1  "  A  collection  might  be  made  from  the  pre 
cepts  of  a  single  Buddhist  work,  The  FooMcps  of  the 
Law,"  says  Mr.  Spence  Hardy,  the  Wesleyan  missionary, 
"which  in  the  purity  of  its  ethics  could  hardly  bo 
equalled  in  any  other  heathen  author." 2  "  It  is  diffi 
cult,"  says  M.  Laboulaye,  "  to  comprehend  how  men 
not  assisted  by  Revelation  could  have  soared  so  high 
and  approached  so  near  the  truth." 3  This  language 
may  appear  to  be  exaggerated,  and  it  certainly  cannot 
be  adopted  without  some  reserve  ;  but  let  us  consider 
what  the  moral  teaching  of  Buddhism  is.  Every 

1  Chiptfrom  a  German  Workshop,  i.  p.  221.  *  76.  *  /&. 


40  Jesus  Christ  and  Buddha. 

Buddhist,  be  his  home  in  Ceylon,  in  Burmah,  in  China, 
in  Thibet,  or  in  Cashmere,  has  to  be  well  acquainted 
with  the  four  Sublime  Truths,  as  they  are  called. 
They  form  his  creed.  These  truths  are  (i)  the  exist 
ence  of  pain,  in  some  shape  or  other,  in  every  human 
life.  This  truth  is  the  base  of  the  rest.  (2)  The  cause 
of  pain.  This  is  traced  to  passion,  to  indulged  desire. 
(3)  The  remedy  for  pain :  man,  according  to  Bud 
dhism,  may  escape  from  it  in  the  Nirvana,  the  highest 
object  and  reward  of  his  efforts.  (4)  The  means  of 
arriving  at  this  cessation  of  pain,  the  method  which 
leads  to  the  Nirvana.  In  this  method  there  are  eight 
parts  or  stages :  each  is  a  condition  of  ultimate  suc 
cess.  First,  the  Buddhist  must  have  a  right  belief. 
Next,  he  must  have  a  good,  clear,  unhesitating  judg 
ment.  Thirdly — and  here  we  reach  what  I  am  anxious 
to  insist  upon — he  must  be  perfectly  veracious :  he 
must  hate  a  lie.  Fourthly,  in  all  that  he  does  he  must 
aim  at  a  pure  and  straightforward  object  which  shall 
govern  his  actions  throughout.  Fifthly,  he  must 
engage  in  no  profession  to  gain  his  livelihood  that  is 
tainted  by  moral  laxity,  i.e.  practically  he  ought  to  be 
a  Buddhist  mendicant.  Sixthly,  he  must  give  his 
mind  to  understanding  the  precepts  of  the  law. 
Seventhly,  he  must  keep  an  honest  memory  of  all  his 
past  actions.  Lastly,  he  must  meditate  earnestly,  if 
he  would  raise  his  understanding  from  this  lower 
world  to  the  quiet  of  the  Nirvana. 


Jesus  Christ  and  Buddka.  4 1 

It  was  in  understanding  these  truths,  say  the  Bud 
dhists,  that  Sakya-Mouni  became  the  Buddha,  after 
six  years  of  austerity  and  meditation  at  Uruvela. 
They  formed  the  main  feature  in  his  popular  teaching 
during  the  later  years  of  his  life.  They  were  the 
weapon  which  he  wielded  with  most  effect  against  the 
Brahmins.  They  occupied  the  attention,  almost  to 
the  exclusion  of  other  matter,  of  the  first  Buddhist 
synod.  They  are  the  subject  of  the  earliest  treatises 
or  Sutras.  A  stanza,  which  is  often  found  under  the 
statues  of  Buddha,  and  which  all  Buddhists  know  by 
heart,  embodies  them.  Besides  these  there  were  five 
dissuasive  precepts,  of  universal  obligation:  Not  to 
kill ;  not  to  steal ;  not  to  be  unchaste ;  not  to  lie ;  and 
not  to  get  drunk.  Five  other  precepts  run  thus: 
Take  no  food  between  meals ;  keep  away  from  dances 
and  theatres ;  use  no  perfumes ;  do  not  sleep  in  a  mag 
nificent  high  bed ;  do  not  take  any  gold  or  silver.  The 
elements  of  the  highest  wisdom,  when  the  Buddhist 
has  only  one  step  to  make  to  enter  Nirvana,  are  said 
to  be:  (i)  Reflection;  (2)  Study;  (3)  Perseverance; 
(4)  Inward  joy;  (5)  Confidence;  (6)  Entire  self- 
control  ;  (7)  Indifference  to  the  opinion  of  the  world. 

We  shall  best  understand  the  working  of  the 
Buddhist  morality  by  one  or  two  stories,  selected 
from  the  Sutras  by  Saint-Hilaire,  which,  whatever 
their  exact  historical  value,  have  an  indisputable 
beauty,  as  teaching  what  Buddhism  was  meant  to 


42  Jesus  Christ  and  Buddha. 

be  in  actual  life,  and  what  it  probably  has  been  in 
very  many  lives. 

The  first  shows  us  the  undeniable  charity  and 
courage  of  the  Buddhist  missionary.  Powma  was  a 
self-made  man,  the  son  of  a  slave  who,  by  application 
to  business,  had  realised  a  large  fortune.  He  fell  in 
with  some  merchants  of  Sravasti  during  one  of  his 
voyages,  and  was  much  attracted  by  their  prayers  and 
hymns.  Sakya-Mouni  was  working  there  at  the  time ; 
Powma  was  presented  to  him;  and  Sakya-Mouni 
instructed  the  neophyte  in  the  law.  Powma  then 
became  anxious  to  convert  to  the  Buddhist  faith  a 
neighbouring  tribe  of  peculiar  ferocity,  but  Sakya- 
Mouni  endeavoured  to  dissuade  him.  "  The  men  of 
Sronaparanta,"  said  he,  "  where  thou  wouldest  fix  thy 
abode,  are  violent,  cruel,  insolent,  ferocious.  What 
wilt  thou  think,  0  Powma,  when  these  men  address 
thee  in  insolent  and  abusive  language,  as  they  will  ? " 

"If,"  replied  Powma,  "the  men  of  Sronaparanta 
abuse  me  to  my  face  in  gross  and  insolent  language, 
1  shall  think  to  myself,  Certainly  these  men  of  Srona 
paranta  are  sweet-tempered  and  excellent  people, 
since  they  neither  beat  me  with  their  hands  nor 
wound  me  with  stones." 

"  But,"  replied  Sakya-Mouni,  "  if  the  men  of  Srona 
paranta  should  beat  thee  with  their  hands,  or  wound 
thee  with  stones,  what  wouldest  thou  think  of  it  ? " 

"  I  should  think,"  said  he,  "  that  they  are  good  and 


Jesus  Christ  and  Buddha.  43 

gentle,  because  they  at  least  do  not  use  sticks  or 
swords." 

"  But  if  they  did  use  sticks  or  swords,  what  then  ? " 

"  Then,"  replied  Powma,  "  I  should  say  to  myself 
still,  These  men  are  good  and  gentle,  since  they  do 
not  take  my  life." 

"But  if  they  do  take  thy  life,"  rejoined  Sakya- 
Mouni,  "  what  then  ? " 

"  I  shall  reflect,"  said  Powma,  "  that  the  men  of 
Sronaparanta  are  good  and  gentle,  for  delivering  me 
so  easily  from  this  body,  which  is  filled  with  cor 
ruption." 

"Good,  O  Powma,"  replied  Sakya-Mouni.  "Thou 
mayest,  if  thou  wilt,  fix  thy  abode  in  the  country  of 
the  Sronaparantakas.  Go  then  ;  and  as  thou  art 
delivered  from  pain,  save  others :  as  thou  hast  gained 
the  further  bank,  help  others  over :  as  thou  art  con 
soled,  be  the  consolation  of  others:  as  thou  hast 
reached  the  true  Nirvana,  make  others  reach  it 
too." 

Powma  obeyed;  and  by  his  dauntless  resignation 
he  won  the  hearts  of  the  savages,  and  taught  them 
the  Buddhist  religion  and  law. 

A  second  narrative  may  exhibit  the  power  of  bearing 
wrong  and  forgiving  its  authors,  which  the  Buddhist 
morality  insisted  on. 

Kunala  was  the  son  of  Asoka,  the  Indian  monarch 
of  the  third  century  before  Christ,  whose  conversion 


44  Jesiis  Christ  and  Buddha. 

to  Buddhism  did  so  much  for  its  extension  in  India 
and  beyond.  Kunala  was  governor  of  a  province, 
and  was  extremely  popular  among  his  subjects.  One 
day  an  order  arrived  from  the  capital  that  Kunala's 
eyes  were  to  be  put  out ;  the  order  was  signed  with 
the  royal  signet.  The  fact  was  that  Rishya-Rakshita, 
one  of  the  wives  of  Asoka,  had  tempted  Kunala's 
virtue;  and  when  he  resisted  her  wicked  advances, 
she  had  determined  to  punish  him,  and  had  possessed 
herself  surreptitiously  of  the  royal  signet,  after  the 
fashion  of  Jezebel  in  the  matter  of  Naboth,  in  order 
to  do  so.  When  the  order  arrived,  the  people  at  first 
refused  to  carry  it  out.  But  the  young  prince,  recog 
nising  his  father's  seal,  said  that  it  would  be  right  to 
submit.  A  deformed  leper  was  the  only  person  who 
could  be  found  to  carry  out  the  cruel  mandate. 

"  It  was  to  prepare  me  for  this  misery,"  said 
Kunala,  while  they  were  waiting,  "  that  the  wise  men 
who  knew  the  truth  said  to  me,  So  all  this  world 
perishes;  no  man  remains  what  he  was  for  ever. 
Those  virtuous  friends,  those  high-minded  sages,  who 
are  free  from  all  passions,  told  me  then  the  truth. 
My  eyes,  too,  are  perishable :  when  I  think  of  this,  I 
do  not  tremble  at  the  threatened  pain.  Let  my  eyes, 
then,  be  taken  out  or  left,  just  as  the  king  likes. 
They  have  already  done  me  all  the  service  they  can : 
they  have  taught  me  that  all  here  perishes."  Then 
addressing  himself  to  the  executioner,  "Now,"  said 


Jesus  Christ  and  Buddha.  45 

he,  "take  out  one  eye,  and  give  it  me  in  my 
hand." 

In  spite  of  the  cries  of  the  multitude  the  man 
carried  out  the  order ;  and  the  young  prince,  taking 
his  one  eye  in  his  hand,  said,  "Why  dost  thou,  O 
vile  lump  of  flesh,  no  longer  see  forms  around  thee, 
as  just  now?  How  foolish  are  they  who  can  so 
attach  themselves  to  thee,  as  to  say,  It  is  my  very 
self." 

Then  the  second  eye  was  cut  out.  Kunala  cried, 
"The  eyes  of  the  flesh  have  been  taken  out,  but  I 
have  gained  the  vision  of  wisdom.  If  the  king  for 
sakes  me,  I  become  the  son  of  the  King  of  the  Law 
(he  means  Buddha).  If  I  have  fallen  from  the  royal 
dignity  which  brings  in  its  train  so  much  pain  and 
disappointment,  I  have  acquired  the  sovereignty  of 
the  law,  which  destroys  pain  and  grief." 

Some  time  afterwards  Kunala  was  told  that  he 
had  been  the  victim  of  Rishya-Rakshita's  intrigue. 
"  May  she  long  enjoy  happiness,  life,  and  power,"  ho 
cried,  "  for  having  done  me  in  this  way  so  great  a 
service."  He  wandered  about  India,  led  by  the  hand 
of  his  young  wife,  and  at  last  they  reached  the  palace 
of  Asoka.  Asoka  was  shocked  at  what  had  happened, 
and  especially  at  the  wickedness  of  Rishya-Rakshita, 
whom  he  determined  to  put  to  death.  Kunula 
begged  for  her  life,  and  saved  it  Ho  assured  his 
father  that  he  believed  his  misfortune  to  bo  a  just 


46  Jesus  Christ  and  Buddha. 

punishment  for  some  crime  which  he  had  committed 
in  a  previous  state  of  existence. 

Other  histories  of  the  same  kind  might  be  quoted 
from  the  Sutras, — one  in  particular  which  illustrates 
the  union  of  chastity  and  charity  to  which  some 
Buddhists  attained.  It  describes  a  young  merchant's 
resistance  to  the  advances  of  a  very  famous  courtesan 
who  at  last  committed  a  murder,  and  was  punished 
by  having  all  her  limbs  cut  oft'  and  being  left  to  die 
hi  a  cemetery.  Then,  and  not  till  then,  the  young 
man  visited  her ;  and  she,  hi  her  agony,  expressed  her 
surprise  at  seeing  him.  He  had  come,  he  said,  not  to 
reproach,  but,  if  he  could,  to  console  her :  now  she 
might  know,  as  he  did,  how  all  on  earth  is  perishing ; 
he  would  help  her  to  learn  something  of  the  law  of 
Buddha  before  she  died.  She  died,  it  is  added,  con 
soled  and  in  peace. 

It  is  plain  that  a  system  which  could  teach  a 
morality  like  this  had  in  it  an  element  of  enormous 
power.  The  human  conscience  could  not  but  love 
these  sublime  and  gentle  virtues — this  heroism,  this 
patience,  this  purity,  this  charity,  this  forgivingness, 
this  wealth  of  passive  endurance.  There  is  nothing 
like  it  hi  Mohammedanism,  which,  whatever  it  may 
teach  in  other  ways,  consecrates  on  a  great  scale  im 
purity  and  cruelty.  There  is  nothing  like  it  even  in 
the  old  Roman  Stoicism,  which  in  some  ways  ap 
proached  the  revealed  morality  of  the  Church  so 


Jesus  Christ  and  Buddha.  47 

remarkably:  the  Stoic  was  always  at  bottom  hard 
and  proud;  he  never  reached  the  humility,  the 
sublime  patience  of  the  Buddhist.  The  religion  of 
Jesus  Christ,  and  it  alone,  equals  and  surpasses  this 
side  of  the  Buddhist  morality.  But  we  can  hardly 
wonder  at  the  success  of  the  Buddhist  missionaries. 
They  had  quite  truth  enough  in  their  mouths  and  in 
their  hands  to  account  for  it ;  and  as  men  listened  to 
the  precepts  and  to  the  histories  of  the  Sutras,  they 
did  not  inquire  very  closely  into  what  there  was 
beyond.  If  its  doctrine  of  the  Unity  of  God  made 
the  fortune  of  Islam,  the  beauty  of  its  passive  morality 
made  that  of  the  religion  of  Buddha, 


II. 

What  is  it,  then,  which  differentiates  Christianity, 
which  makes  it  impossible  for  us  Christians  to  admit 
that  Christianity   and   Buddhism   are   two  different 
forms  of  some  one  universal  religion  of  humanity  ?  • 
In  order  to  answer  this  we  must  ask  three  questions,  I 
which  are  the  measure  of  the  value  of  any  religion.  [ 
Religion  being  the  bond  which  unites  the  human 
soul  to  God,  it  always  must  be  considered,  in  the  case 
of  a  particular  religion,  (i)  What  does  it  say  about 
God  ?  (2)  What  does  it  say  about  man  ?  (.3)  What 
about  the  person  and  authority  of  its  originator? 


48  Jesus  Christ  and  Buddha. 

(a)  Let  us  begin  with  the  last.  What  does 
Buddhism  say  about  the  person  of  its  founder  ?  The 
hynms  hi  the  Lalita-vistara,  which  probably  belongs 
to  the  period  of  the  second  Buddhist  Council — hi  its 
Sanskrit  form — give  some  answer  to  this.  One  hymn 
celebrates  his  praises  as  the  embodiment  of  purity 
and  of  science.  Another  reminds  him  of  his  pro 
mises  of  protection  towards  his  servants.  A  third 
asks  him  to  free  his  servants  from  the  empire  of 
passion  and  the  empire  of  pain.  A  fourth  describes 
him,  in  his  earlier  transformations,  as  a  king,  a 
Brahmin,  an  antelope,  a  parrot:  the  Buddha  had 
sought  the  good  of  all.  Many  of  the  hymns  in  this 
Sutra  are  connected  with  particular  events  in  Sakya- 
Mouni's  life;  they  celebrate  the  despair  of  his  wife 
at  his  leaving  Kapilavatthu ;  his  answer  to  the  king 
of  Magadha,  and  the  like.  But  they  chiefly  express 
the  overflowing  gratitude  and  reverence  of  his  followers 
for  himself.  There  is  a  hymn  which  sings  of  him  as 
the  guide  of  men  and  the  joy  of  the  world.  There  is 
one  which  addresses  him  as  the  learned  physician  of 
men,  as  more  helpful  to  man  than  either  Indra  or 
Brahma.  Another  hymn  describes  the  melody  of  his 
voice,  the  glory  of  his  footsteps  which  made  the  very 
dust  radiant.  Another  celebrates  his  victory  over 
evil  spirits;  another  his  triumph  over  the  tempta 
tion  to  ambition ;  another  his  resistance  to  the  temp 
tation  of  earthly  beauty.  In  another,  he  is  entreated 


Jesus  Christ  and  Buddha.  49 

to  arise  from  his  indifference  ;  to  instruct  men  and 
make  them  share  his  glory.  In  another  he  is  saluted, 
all  but  adored,  by  the  purest  of  the  pure,  by  the 
spirits  of  the  dead,  by  the  devas  or  gods,  and  by 
men,  as  the  teacher  of  the  Law. 

No  doubt,  when  St.  Clement  of  Alexandria  spoke 
of  Buddha  as  being  treated  as  a  god,  he  must  have 
formed  his  opinion  from  the  report  of  such  hymns  as 
these,  which  were  then  four  or  five  centuries  old. 
Nothing  less  than  Buddha's  divinity  would  have 
been  implied,  if  the  writers  of  these  hymns  had  ever 
known  what  God  is  from  such  a  revelation  as  that 
of  Sinai. 

When  St.  Paul  speaks  of  Jesus  Christ  as  of  Pro 
vidence,  Who  guides  his  steps  and  controls  his  actions, 
we  know  what  he  must  mean,  even  if  he  did  not,  as 
he  does,  go  so  far  as  to  say  that  our  holy  Redeemer 
is  "over  all,  God  blessed  for  ever."1  When  St.  John 
pictures  the  adoration  of  the  Lamb  slain  and  imma 
culate  in  the  midst  of  the  Throne  of  Heaven,2  no 
words  would  be  too  severe  for  the  implied  blasphemy 
in  the  eyes  of  believers  in  the  Unity  of  God,  unless 
the  doctrine  that  the  Son  is  of  One  Substance  with 
the  Father  was  literally  true.  But  the  yerj^Jdea  of 
God  was  unknown  t.n  t.l^e  Tm%n  hymn-writers. 
The  Buddhist  hymn- writers  had  the  later  Brali  in  in 
hymns  running  in  their  heads,  ^vhich  ascribed  the 

»  Rom.  ix.  5.  •  Rev.  v.  6-13. 

D 


50  Jesus  Christ  and  Buddha. 

\  highest  Divine  attributes  -with  equal  readiness  and 
profusion  to  all  the  inferior  spirits  and  deities  of  the 
Indian  Pantheon;  so  that  when  Buddha  is  said  to 
have  been  adored  by  those  who  are  themselves  adored, 
nothing  is  intended  beyond  an  exuberant  compliment, 
such  as  might  be  lavished  with  entire  Brahminical 
propriety  on  a  very  exalted  teacher. 

Saint-Hilaire  appears  to  be  strictly  accurate  in  say 
ing  that  Sakya-Mouni  has  never  been  deified  by  his 
followers.  His  relics  have  been  worshipped;  his 
image  (the  hand  raised  as  if  in  teaching,  the  legs 
crossed)  is  everywhere  in  his  temples ;  but  he  him 
self  is  gone  the  way  of  ecstatic  annihilation :  he  has 
achieved  the  triumph  of  escaping  from  existence. 
He  is  invoked  in  passionate  apostrophes,  which,  upon 
serious  thought,  cannot  be  supposed  to  reach  his  ear. 
Certainly,  his  entry  upon  life  is  described  in  terms 
by  the  Lalita-vistara  which  might  befit  the  conception 
of  a  Divine  Incarnation.  But  the  idea  of  his  pre- 
existence  was  not  peculiar  to  himself  or  to  Buddhist 
theology;  the  notion  of  transmigration  belonged  to 
the  common  stock  of  Indian  ideas ;  and  the  enrich 
ment  of  this  fundamental  conception  by  the  presumed 
debate  in  the  Indian  Olympus  as  to  the  time,  the 
continent,  the  country,  and  the  family  in  which  the 
Buddha  should  be  born  twelve  years  before  his  birth 
in  no  way  implies  belief  in  his  being  more  than  an 
exalted  man.  He  is  a  social  reformer  with  philoso- 


Jesus  Christ  and  Buddlia.  5 1 

phical  tendencies,  who  has  taught  some  beautiful 
things  about  morality,  and  a  great  deal  of  nonsense 
on  other  subjects ;  he  never  says  anything  to  imply 
that  he  is  himself  more  than  a  religious  discoverer, 
who  has,  in  his  own  opinion,  succeeded,  and  who  is 
entitled  to  the  veneration  of  his  followers.  He  dies 
like  every  one  else ;  and  it  is  difficult  to  say  whether 
his  presumed  blessedness  is  not  the  exact  measure  of 
his  felt  impotence  to  aid  his  worshippers. 

Contrast  this  with  the  claims  of  Jesus  Christ.  He 
does  not,  like  Buddha,  arrive  at  His  Gospel  after  long 
struggles:  He  brings  it  from  heaven.  He  does  not 
tell  men  to  deliver  themselves  from  pain  and  death. 
He  says,  "  I  am  the  Resurrection  and  the  Life ;  who 
soever  believeth  in  Me,  though  he  were  dead,  yet 
shall  he  live."1  He  does  not  leave  them  to  guess, 
in  after  ages,  what  is  His  own  eternal  relation  to 
the  Uncreated  Being.  He  says,  "  He  that  hath  seen 
Me  hath  seen  the  Father."2  "  I  and  the  Father  are 
One/'1 

(ft)  What  does  Buddhism  say  of  man  ?  what  does 
it  offer  to  do  for  man  ?  It  echoes  much  which  belongs 
to  the  common  stock  of  Indian  thought,  which  it 
accepted  from  Brahminism  without  revision.  "The 
idea  of  transmigration,"  says  Professor  Max  Muller, 
"  the  belief  in  the  continuing  effects  of  our  good  and 
bad  actions,  extending  from  our  former  to  our  present 

i  St.  John  XL  25.  *  lb.  xiv.  9.  •  Ib.  x.  30. 


5  2  Jesus  Christ  and  Buddha. 

and  from  our  present  to  our  future  lives,  the  sense 
that  life  is  a  dream  or  a  burden,  the  admission  of 
the  uselessness  of  religious  observances  after  the  at 
tainment  of  the  highest  knowledge,  all  these  belong, 
so  to  say,  to  the  national  philosophy  of  India.  We 
meet  with  these  ideas  everywhere,  in  the  poetry,  the 
philosophy,  the  religion  of  the  Hindus." 1 

Buddhism,  then,  in  common  with  Brahminism, 
regards  existence  as  miserable;  and  here,  up  to  a 
certain  point,  these  Indian  religions  are  in  accord 
with  Christianity.  "The  whole  creation,"  says  St. 
Paul,  "  groaneth  and  travaileth  in  pain  together  until 
now ;  and  not  only  they,  but  ourselves  also,  which 
have  the  first-fruits  of  the  Spirit,  even  we  ourselves 
groan  within  ourselves,  waiting  for  the  adoption,  to 
wit,  the  redemption  of  our  bodies."2  The  Apostle  is 
in  agreement  with  Buddha  as  to  the  fact,  but  not 
as  to  either  its  importance  or  its  remedy.  _In  the 
Buddhist  Sutras,  physical  pain  is  the  leading  feature 
of  human  misery;  in  the  New  Testament,  moral  error 
is  its  leading  feature.  Man's  first  business  here  is  to 
escape  from  physical  misery.  Buddhism  makes  no 
sharp  distinction  between  physical  and  moral  evil — 
the  disease  of  the  body  and  the  disease  of  the  soul ; 
for  in  truth  the  deeper  distinction  of  soul  and  body, 
with  which  we  Christians  are  so  familiar,  is,  says  a 
great  scholar,  really  unknown  to  the  Sutras.  Cer- 

1  Chips  from  a  German  Workshop,  i.  p.  227.  2  Rom.  viii.  22,  23. 


Jesus  Christ  and  Buddlia.  53 

tainly,  Buddhism  affirms  the  great  law  everywhere 
traceable  in  man's  natural  conscience,  and  so  nobly 
recognised  in  the  earliest  poetry  and  thought  of 
Greece,  that  man's  physical  misery  is  a  consequence 
of  moral  wrong.  \\\\\  of  the  sense  of  sin  as  the  con 
tradiction  of  God,  and  the  disfigurement  and  ruin  of 
the  personal  spirit  in  man,  of  the  sense  of  sin  as 
Christians  understand  it; — of  the  chasm  which  it  opens 
between  the  sinner  and  the  Perfect  Being,  of  the 
resulting  need  of  a  propitiation  for  the  past,  and 
of  reconciliation  and  supernatural  strength  for  the 
future — Buddhism  knows  nothing.  Man  may  work 
out  his  own  deliverance  from  pain  by  a  prescribed 
discipline;  his  moral  faults  have  not  destroyed  his 
moral  power.  The  public  confessions  of  faults  which 
Sakya-Mouni  encouraged,  and  which  became  at  one 
time  a  regular  institution  in  parts  of  India,  do  not 
imply  a  sense  of  guilt,  or  more  than  an  effort  to  arrive 
ut  virtue  through  the  acknowledgmenl_o^_failura 
And  thus  while  Christians  look  forward  to  relief  from 
pain  in  heaven  only  as  an  incidental  result  of  a  far 
greater  blessing — enfranchisement  from  sin  through 
union  with  God  in  and  through  His  Blessed  Son, — 
Buddhism  would  escape  from  sin  and  pain  by  a 
single  effort, — from  pain  anyhow, — by  the  self- 
achieved  annihilation  of  the  Nirvana. 

What  is  the  Nirvana?     Buddha   himself  would 
seem  to  have  left  the  exact  meaning  of  this — the 


54  Jesus  Christ  and  Buddha. 

goal  of  all  his  efforts — in  obscurity ;  and  it  has  had 
to  be  interpreted  by  his  followers.  But  there  is  no 
doubt  about  the  meaning  of  the  word:  it  means 
blowing  out.  extinction.  Certainly,  many  of  the 
modern  Buddhists,  especially  in  the  south  of  Asia, 
limit  this  extinction  to  old  age,  disease,  and  death. 
Nirvana  for  them  is  only  the  eternal  youth  and 
health  and  life  of  heaven.  But  Saint-Hilaire  appears 
to  have  shown  that,  at  any  rate  originally,  and  gene 
rally  now,  M^yana^means  the  extinction  of  being,, 
Unless  this  be  granted,  it  is  impossible  to  explain 
the  contrast  which  was  felt  to  exist  between  Buddhism 
and  Brahminism,  which  last  proposed  an  escape  from 
pain  through  absorption  into  the  Primal  Being.  It 
is,  indeed,  a  thought  of  unspeakable  misery  that 
millions  of  human  beings  should  have  lived  and  died 
in  the  hope,  not  of  immortality,  but  of  annihilation. 
Yet  the  fact  is  beyond  question :  the  Buddhist's 
doctrine  of  human  nature  amounts  to  saying  that 
the  best  thing  it  can  do  is  to  cease  to  be. 

Need  I  contrast  this  with  the  teaching  of  our  own 
Apostle  hi  the  Epistle  to  the  Komans?  He  fixes 
his  eye,  not  on  the  universality  of  pain  but  on  the 
universality  of  sin,  which  has  fatally  disturbed  man's 
right  relationship  to  God;1 — man  is  not  flattered  by 
Christianity;  but,  when  humbled,  he  is  not  left  to 
his  own  resources.  By  a  true  union  with  Christ,  re- 

1  Rom.  iii.  21. 


Jesus  Christ  and  Buddha.  55 

ceived  by  the  hand  of  faith,  the  lost  relationship  is 
restored;  and  "there  is  no  condemnation  for  them 
which  are  in  Christ  Jesus,  who  walk  not  after  the 
flesh,  but  after  the  Spirit."1  The  mighty  invigorating 
force  of  hope  is  thus  given  to  fallen  humanity ;  none 
need  perish,  says  the  Gospel,  though  all  have  fallen ; 
and  he  may  rise  who  will 

(7)  What  does  Buddhism  say  about  God  ?  In  the 
sense  in  which  we  use  that  word — nothing,  absolutely 
nothing.  Of  the  One  Self-Existent  Being,  Whose  power, 
wisdom,  and  goodness  know  no  bounds,  Whose  sanc 
tity,  providence,  mercy,  and  justice  are  the  constant 
objects  of  a  Christian's  thought,  Buddhism  is  utterly 
ignorant.  It  does  not  recognise  Him  so  far  as  to  deny 
His  existence :  it  ignores  Him.  This  unreal  world,  in 
which  Buddha  sees  nothing  which  is  not  perishable 
and  deceptive,  does  not  imply  to  his  apprehension  any 
counter  -reality,  any  Absolute  Being  as  its  Creator. 
Certainly  the  existing  Indian  divinities  are  not  re 
pudiated  by  Buddha.  But  he  owes  nothing  to  them  ; 
he  owes  everything  to  his  own  efforts  and  virtue ;  and 
they  are  merely  so  much  old  ornamental  furniture 
which  he  does  not  care  to  get  rid  of,  and  handles 
respectfully.  In  the  Buddhist  temples  the  only 
objects  of  veneration  are  the  imago  of  Buddha 
himself,  and  the  relics  of  Buddha  and  others.  The 
stoupas  or  tumuli  which  are  found  about  India,  such 

i  Rom.  viii.  x. 


56  Jesus  Christ  and  Buddha. 

as  the  Manikyala  stoupa  in  the  Punjaub,  do  but 
recall  the  memory  and  preserve  the  remains  of  a 
great  teacher.  Humanity  is  confronted  with  the 
placid  image,  the  tranquil  self-confidence,  the  un 
deniable  virtue  of  Sakya-Mouni ;  but  if  man  looks 
higher — above  the  chair  of  the  human  teacher — all 
is  dark  and  void. 

A  religion  without  God !  It  is  a  contradiction  in 
terms ;  and  yet  the  absence  of  God  from  Buddhist 
thought  is  concealed  by  the  immense  mass  of  religious 
observances  and  activities  which  fill  up  the  foreground. 
And  thus  Buddhism  is  not  a  religion,  properly  speak 
ing  ;  it  is  a  philosophy  of  life,  trying  to  do  the  work  of 
a  religion.  Of  that  virtue  which  includes  and  invigor 
ates  all  other  virtues,  and  whose  object  is  God, — of  that 
tender  and  sublime  passion  which  sways  the  soul  with 
imperious  control,  while  it  leads  it  ever  onwards  and 
upwards,  Buddhism  is  really  ignorant.  And  this  being 
so,  can  we  wonder  at  the  results  of  the  system  upon 
the  vast  populations  which  are  brought  within  its 
influence,  and  which  attest  the  splendour  of  its  his 
torical  triumph  ?  What  are  the  moral  characteristics 
of  China  ?  That  easy  indifference  to  life ;  that  light- 
hearted  carelessness  as  to  duty;  that  timid  pusillan 
imity  in  presence  of  threatened  pain;  that  general 
depression — which  is  not  really  relieved  by  outbursts 
of  levity — depression  at  having  to  live  in  a  world 
where  nothing  is  real — depression  at  having  to  pre- 


Jesus  Christ  and  Buddha.  57 

pare  for  annihilation  within  the  four  walls  of  a 
sepulchre ;  that  selfishness  which  is  alternately  violent 
and  petty;  that  all-embracing  scepticism  which  leaves 
nothing  really  worth  thought  or  effort :  much  of  this 
is  the  work  of  Buddhism.  True,  Sakya-Mouni  did  not 
intend  it  all,  and  would  have  condemned  much  of  it; 
just  as  Hegel  in  modern  Germany,  whose  fundamental 
thought  is  probably  interpreted  most  accurately  by 
Strauss,  most  certainly  did  not  mean  to  abjure  the 
name  of  Christian,  and  to  deny  the  existence  of  a 
God,  and  would  have  been  shocked  at  the  disciple 
whose  dreary  scepticism  has  at  last  reached  these 
conclusions.  But  the  truth  is,  teachers  pass  away, 
while  principles  remain.  Whatever  Sakya-Mouni  was 
and  meant,  his  system  contained  within  itself  the 
forces  which  would  necessarily  in  the  long-run  ener- 
vate  and  degrade  its  adherents.  Beautiful  as  was 
much  of  his  morality,  it  was  impotent,  because,  besides 
being  incomplete,  it  had  no  base  on  which  to  rest.  If 
the  living  and  personal  Author,  Measure,  End  of  moral 
truth  is  ignored,  morals  cease  to  be  anything  but  the 
poetry  of  a  man  or  of  a  nation:  they  soon  have  nothing 
to  do  with  practice. 

Among  the  many  lessons  to  bo  learnt,  even  from 
that  fragment  of  this  great  subject  which  it  has  been 
possible  to  consider,  this  only  will  I  venture  to  re 
commend  to  you.  The  experiences  of  Eastern  Asia  in 


58  Jesus  Christ  and  Buddha. 

bygone  centuries  may  not  be  without  their  use  at  the 
present  day  to  England, — to  Europe. 

For  what  do  we  see  around  us  at  the  present  hour  ? 
Two  distinct  and  powerful  tendencies.  On  the  one 
hand  an  impatience  of  ancient  and  primitive  Chris 
tian  doctrines,  however  attested, — an  impatience  which 
readily  welcomes  any  supposed  lessening  of  the 
authority  of  Scripture,  any  chance  of  mutilating  or 
disusing  an  ancient  Creed.  On  the  other  hand, 
we  see  an  increasing  conviction,  in  all  the  more 
thoughtful  minds,  that  without  clear  moral  con 
victions  society  must  go  to  pieces;  and  a  conse 
quent  anxiety  on  the  part  of  unbelievers  to  rest 
moral  truths  upon  some  basis,  intuitional  or  experi 
mental,  physical  or  social,  independent  of  a  belief  in 
a  Personal  God.  Depend  upon  it,  gentlemen,  that 
Buddhism  here  supplies  us  with  a  lesson  which  may 
save  us  from  many  a  rude  experience.  It  may  be 
true  enough  that  God  reflects  His  Will  sometimes  in 
the  deepest  instincts  of  our  nature,  sometimes  in  the 
organic  requirements  of  human  society,  which,  indeed, 
is  not  less  His  work  than  are  the  body  and  soul  of 
man;  but  unless  moral  precepts  be  rested  on  belief 
in  Him,  ay,  and  let  me  add,  on  what  He  has  told  us 
about  Himself  and  His  Will,  they  will  not  really  con 
trol  conduct  and  life  in  the  long-run.  A  society  which 
is  losing  or  which  has  lost  those  masculine  beliefs, 
those  energetic  soul-controlling  convictions,  which 


Jesus  Christ  and  Buddha.  59 

purify  and  invigorate  the  heart  and  will,  cannot  re 
cover  its  vital  forces  by  a  talismanic  repetition  of 
beautiful  moral  sentiments  or  by  a  picturesque  de 
lineation  of  their  practical  effect. 

To  have  a  faith  in  the  Unseen,  clear,  definite, 
strong,  is  to  have  the  nerve  of  moral  life ;  to  be  with 
out  such  a  faith,  or  to  mistake  for  it  some  procession 
of  shifting  mists,  or  the  ever-changing  views  of  a 
kaleidoscope,  is  in  the  end  to  forfeit  moral  life.  The 
energy  of  a  founder  of  a  new  system ;  the  enthusiasm 
of  a  literary  or  philosophical  school  which  is  feeling 
its  way  towards  influence  and  empire,  may  for  a  while 
keep  these  extreme  consequences  at  bay ;  but  in  the 
long-run  the  law  will  operate — ay,  irresistibly — in  the 
case  whether  of  a  man  or  of  a  society.  To  believe 
this  thoroughly  is,  in  the  highest  sense  of  the  word, 
worth  a  great  deal ;  and  if  no  other  conviction  should 
have  been  left  upon  your  minds  by  this  effort  to  trace 
some  sides  of  a  vast  and  deeply  interesting  subject, 
the  effort  will  not  have  been  made  in  vain. 


THE  LIFE  OF  ST.  PAUL. 

I.   THE   PREPARATION.1 

nnHERE  is  little  reason,  you  will  feel,  for  anything 
•*-  in  the  way  of  explanation  or  apology  for  choos 
ing  the  Life  of  St.  Paul  as  the  subject  for  this  and 
the  next  Lecture.  At  this  season  of  the  year  this 
Apostle  might  almost  seem  to  preside  over  the 
services  of  the  Christian  Church,  the  Epiphany  or 
Manifestation  of  Christ  to  the  Gentiles  being  more 
directly  identified  in  history  with  his  enterprise  and 
devotion  than  with  that  of  any  other  human  being. 
And  in  this  great  building,  which  stands  on  a  site  that 
has  been  for  some  fourteen  centuries  identified  with 
the  love  and  honour  that  the  Church  of  Christ  has 
ever  felt  for  one  of  the  first  and  greatest  of  her  Master's 
servants,  it  is  impossible  not  to  recognise,  if  we  can 
recognise  them  anywhere,  the  great  claims  of  his  life 
and  character  upon  every  student,  not  merely  of  the 
history  of  Christendom,  but  of  the  life  and  progress  of 
the  human  race.  St.  Paul's  is  a  name  which  occupies 

i  Lecture  delivered  in  St.  Paul's  Cathedral  on  Tuesday  evening,  January 
13.  l874- 


7' he  Life  of  St.  Paul :  the  Preparation.     61 

so  commanding  a  place  in  the  New  Testament,  and 
therefore  in  the  teaching  of  the  Church,  that  it  is  diffi 
cult  to  dissociate  him  from  the  method  and  tone  of  an 
ordinary  sermon.  Nor  would  I  on  any  account  what 
ever  be  supposed  to  imply  either  that  the  real  historical 
Paul  of  Tarsus  is  a  different  being  from  the  Apostle 
who  has  so  high  a  place  in  the  heart  of  the  Church 
of  Christ,  or  that  a  more  intimate  acquaintance  with 
the  reality  must  in  this,  as  in  some  cases  it  must, 
strip  his  aureole  from  the  head  of  the  object  of  our 
early  reverence.  It  is  because  with  St.  Paul  the  very 
reverse  is  so  eminently  the  case  that  we  do  well  to  look 
at  the  Apostle's  life  from  a  slightly  different  point  of 
view  from  that  in  which  it  is  commonly  presented  to  us, 
and  to  attempt  to  weigh,  within  very  restricted  limits, 
some  parts  of  its  moral  and  historical  significance. 

Every  noble  life,  every  conspicuous  career,  implies 
a  period  of  preparation  and  development,  more  or 
less  traceable.  This  is  one  of  the  reasons  which 
make  biographies  always  so  popular  a  branch  of 
literature:  they  enable  us  not  merely  to  recognise 
excellence,  but  to  trace  it,  or  attempt  to  trace 
it,  to  its  source.  Few  men  have  their  lives  written 
who  have  not  done  something  noteworthy:  and 
the  interesting  question  for  all  of  us  is  how  they 
came  to  do  it ;  what  were  the  circumstances  without, 
what  the  impulses  and  lines  of  thought  within,  that 
led  them  on  step  by  step  until  they  reached  the  point 


62  The  Life  of  St.  Paul: 

of  triumph  or  of  excellence.  Some  of  us  perhaps  have 
been  reading  lately  a  book  which  in  more  ways  than 
one  will  have  recalled,  across  however  great  an  interval, 
the  memory  of  St.  Paul, — I  mean  Miss  Yonge's  life  of 
the  devoted  missionary  Bishop  Patteson.  A  great 
deal  of  that  book  relates  only  what  might  be  found  in 
very  ordinary  lives,  in  the  lives  of  some  among  our 
selves.  But  everything,  even  the  most  trivial  details 
of  home,  and  school,  and  college,  and  friendships,  and 
correspondence,  is  more  or  less  interesting,  because 
everything  is  from  the  first  regarded  as  leading  up  to 
a  life-work  of  singular  devotion,  crowned  by  a  singu 
larly  noble  death.  In  all  such  cases  the  catastrophe  or 
the  victory  reflects  a  splendour  not  its  own  upon  each 
trivial  detail  that  may  have  preceded  it. 

Here  it  would  be  logically  natural  to  say  what  the 
Apostle  of  the  Gentiles  was  in  himself,  to  Christendom, 
and  to  humanity.  But  there  are  obvious  reasons  for 
addressing  ourselves  to  our  work  historically,  and  I 
must  therefore  assume  you  to  be  more  or  less  familiar 
with  much  on  which  I  shall  hereafter  insist  somewhat 
at  length,  while  I  ask,  How  did  St.  Paul  come  to  be 
what  he  was  at  the  beginning  of  his  apostolical  or 
missionary  life  ? 

There  are,  as  a  rule,  three  elements,  I  might 
almost  say  three  periods,  to  be  distinguished  in  the 
preparatory  life  of  every  man  who  achieves  much 
or  anything  considerable  in  life.  There  is  the  raw 


the  Preparation.  63 

material  of  personal  character,  developed,  moulded,  ' 
invigorated  by  education — in  short,  the  man's  original 
outfit  for  life.  There  is,  secondly,  some  new  influence 
or  influences,  which  give,  or  may  give,  a  decisive  turn  to 
hopes  and  aims, — which  raise,  or  may  raise,  the  whole 
level  of  life  to  a  higher  atmosphere.  Lastly,  there  is, 
as  a  rule,  a  period  in  which  these  two  earlier  elements 
are  fused  and  consolidated;  a  period  of  reflection, 
when  the  true  work  of  life  is  already  more  or  less 
clearly  in  view,  and  when  the  intellect  is  being  cleared 
and  the  will  braced  until  the  decisive  moment  arrives 
for  undertaking  it.  I  do  not  say  that  these  periods 
can  always  be  made  out  with  chronological  precision, 
or  that  they  always  preserve,  so  to  speak,  their  due 
perspectives ;  but  in  their  elements  they  will  always 
be  found  to  exist  wherever  a  man's  life  embodies  any 
thing  morally  remarkable.  Let  us  see  how  they  apply 
to  the  case  before  us,  the  case  of  Saul  of  Tarsus. 

I. 

Education  is  the  work  partly  of  teachers,  partly,  in 
some  cases  mainly,  of  circumstances.  We  shall  best 
appreciate  what  it  must  have  done  for  St.  Paul  if  wo 
briefly  remind  ourselves  of  the  history  of  his  early 
years,— of  his  life  up  to  the  date  of  the  death  of  St 
Stephen. 

It  is  difficult  to  fix  the  year  of  St  Paul's  birth; 
he  was  a  young  man  when  St  Stephen  was  martyred. 


64  The  Life  of  St.  Paul : 

He  would  probably  have  been  born  in  the  later  years 
of  Herod,  or  early  in  the  short  reign  of  Archelaus, 
when,  under  the  sway  of  the  Emperor  Augustus,  the 
Roman  world  was  at  peace,  and  when  the  wickedness 
of  the  imperial  despotism  had  not  yet  fully  developed 
itself.  The  pirates  who  had  infested  the  eastern  Medi 
terranean  had  been  sternly  suppressed;  the  Jewish 
people  was  still  enjoying  everywhere  ample  toleration 
under  the  Roman  laws ;  and  a  Jewish  family  like  St. 
Paul's,  settled  at  Tarsus  in  Cilicia,  would  have  been 
in  sufficiently  comfortable  circumstances.  Tarsus  was 
a  "  free  city  "  of  the  Empire, — that  is  to  say,  it  was 
governed  by  its  own  magistrates,  and  was  exempted 
from  the  annoyance  of  a  Roman  garrison ;  but  it  was 
not  a  "colony"  like  Philippi  in  Macedonia,  and  the 
freedom  of  Rome,  which  St.  Paul  says  he  had  at  his 
birth,  would  probably  have  been  earned  by  some 
services  rendered  by  his  father  during  the  civil  wars 
to  some  one  of  the  contending  parties.  It  is  at  least 
probable,  from  the  expression,  "an  Hebrew  of  the 
Hebrews,"  which  St.  Paul  applied  to  himself,  that 
his  parents  were  originally  emigrants  from  Palestine. 
We  know  that  they  were  of  the  tribe  of  Benjamin, 
and  strict  members  of  the  Pharisee  sect.  Probably 
his  father  was  engaged  in  the  Mediterranean  trade. 
To  his  mother — it  is  a  remarkable  circumstance— 
there  is  not  one  reference  in  his  writings ;  he  had  a 
sister,  whose  son  lived  in  later  years  at  Jerusalem,  and 


the  Preparation.  65 


who  would  have  been  his  playmate  at  Tarsus.  The 
Talmud  says  that  a  father's  duty  towards  his  boy  is 
"  to  circumcise  him,  to  teach  him  the  law,  and  to  teach 
him  a  trade."  We  know  from  the  Epistle  to  the 
Philippians  that  the  first  of  these  precepts  was  ac 
curately  complied  with  on  the  eighth  day  after  the 
child's  birth.  The  second  would  probably  have  been 
obeyed  by  sending  the  boy,  not  to  one  of  the  Greek 
schools  in  which  Tarsus  abounded,  but  to  a  Jewish 
school  attached  to  the  synagogue,  where  after  the 
age  of  five  he  would  have  learnt  the  Hebrew  Scrip 
tures,  at  ten  years  those  floating  maxims  of  the  great 
Jewish  doctors  which  were  afterwards  collected  in 
the  Mishnah,  so  as  at  thirteen  to  become  what  was 
called  a  "subject  of  the  Precept,"  after  a  ceremony 
which  was  a  kind  of  shadow  of  Christian  Confirmation. 
The  third  requirement  was  complied  with  by  setting 
him  to  make  tents  out  of  the  hair-cloth  which  was  sup 
plied  by  the  goats  which  abounded  on  the  slopes  of  the 
neighbouring  mountains  of  the  Taurus,  and  which  was 
a  chief  article  in  the  trade  of  the  port — tents  which  to 
this  day  are,  it  is  said,  used  largely  by  the  peasantry  of 
south-eastern  Asia  Minor  during  the  harvest-time. 

At  or  soon  after  thirteen  Saul  would  have  been 
sent  from  home,  probably  in  a  trading  vessel  bound 
from  the  port  of  Tarsus  for  Qesarea,  on  his  way  to 
Jerusalem.  Already  as  a  boy  the  Holy  City  must 
have  poliOMod  for  him  an  interest  surpassing  that 

! 


66  The  Life  of  St.  Paul: 

which  could  be  raised  by  any  other  place  on  earth. 
Every  great  festival  would  have  been  followed  by  the 
return  of  one  or  more  of  his  countrymen  to  Tarsus, 
full  of  the  inspiration  of  the  sacred  sites,  of  the 
splendour  of  the  new  Temple,  of  the  fame  and  learn 
ing  of  the  great  doctors  of  the  law.  Especially  he 
would  have  heard  much  of  the  two  rival  schools  of 
Hillel  and  Shammai;  of  which  the  former  exalted 
tradition  above  the  letter  of  the  law,  while  the  latter 
preferred  the  law  to  tradition  when  they  clashed. 
Of  these,  the  school  of  Hillel  was  the  more  in 
fluential:  and  when  St.  Paul  was  a  boy  and  a  young 
man  its  greatest  ornament  was  Gamaliel.  Gamaliel, 
we  are  told  in  the  Acts,  was  "had  in  reputation  of 
all  the  people, "  he  was  evidently  one  of  those  men 
whose  candour,  wisdom,  and  consistent  elevation  of 
character  would  have  secured  him  influence  in  any 
society  or  age  of  the  world.  He  was  named  by  his 
countrymen  the  "Beauty  of  the  Law;"  and  the 
Talmud  declares  that  since  his  death  the  "glory 
of  the  law "  has  ceased.  It  was  at  the  feet  of 
Gamaliel,  St.  Paul  tells  us,  that  he  was  brought  up. 
This  expression  exactly  recalls  to  us  the  manner  in 
which  the  Rabbinical  "assemblies  of  the  wise,"  as 
they  were  termed,  were  held.  The  teacher  sat  on  a 
raised  platform ;  the  pupils  on  low  seats,  or  on  the 
floor  beneath.  At  these  meetings  some  passage  of 
the  Hebrew  Law  was  taken  as  a  thesis ;  it  was  then 


the  Preparation.  67 

paraphrased  in  the  current  Syro-Chaldee  dialect; 
various  explanations  and  aphorisms  and  opinions 
were  quoted;  the  teacher  said  what  he  had  to  say, 
and  then  he  was  cross-questioned  by  his  hearers. 
And  although,  especially  in  the  school  of  Hillel,  there 
must  have  been  a  large  mass  of  legendary  and  even 
absurd  matter  in  these  lectures  and  conferences,  such 
as  we  may  still  read  in  the  Talmud,  there  must  also 
have  been  much  of  the  highest  doctrinal  and  moral 
value, — integral  elements  of  Divine  Revelation, — read, 
marked,  learnt,  and  inwardly  digested  during  those 
long  and  earnest  discussions.  This,  at  any  rate,  was 
the  educational  process  by  which  Paul  of  Tarsus  was 
"  taught  according  to  the  perfect  manner  of  the  law 
of  the  fathers."  There  side  by  side  with  Onkelos,  also 
a  pupil  of  Gamaliel  and  subsequently  the  famous 
author  of  the  Targum,  which  bears  his  name,  he  would 
have  learnt  all  that  the  highest  minds  of  his  day  had 
to  say  about  the  creed  of  his  fathers ;  and  if,  looking 
back  from  the  riper  experience  of  later  life,  he  would 
himself  have  said  that  in  those  years  a  veil  was  upon 
his  heart,  this  profound  spiritual  blindness  would  not 
at  all  have  interfered  with  the  intellectual  value  of 
this  part  of  his  education.  The  culture  of  the  mind, 
we  all  know,  is  one  thing,  the  growth  of  the  soul  is 
another.  A  modern  University  abounds  in  men  of 
the  highest  mental  culture  who  make,  and  would  wish 
to  make,  no  sort  of  claim  to  being  religious  men :  but 


68  The  Life  of  St.  Paul: 

their  intellectual  vigour  is  not  therefore  stunted  or 
impaired  Paul,  indeed,  was  religious,  although  in  a 
mistaken  way ;  and  his  first  creed,  with  all  its  short 
comings,  was  the  mam  instrument  of  his  mental 
education. 

At  this  period  of  St.  Paul's  life  we  are  to  a  certain 
extent  in  the  region  of  conjecture ;  but  it  is  scarcely 
doubtful  that  he  would  have  returned  to  Tarsus  in  the 
prime  of  manhood  before  he  reappeared  in  Jerusalem 
as  a  member  of  the  synagogue  which  was  connected 
with  or  maintained  by  the  Jews  of  Cilicia.  This  visit 
would  have  completed  his  acquaintance  with  the 
language,  and  to  a  certain  limited  extent  with  the 
literature  of  Greece.  The  commercial  and  educated 
classes  in  Tarsus,  like  similar  classes  everywhere  on 
the  seaboard  of  the  Levant,  would  then  certainly  have 
spoken  Greek ;  and  as  a  little  boy,  Paul,  whenever  he 
got  out  of  the  narrow  circle  of  his  family  and  of  the 
persons  whom  he  met  on  Sabbaths  at  the  synagogue, 
— whenever  he  played  or  entered  into  conversation  on 
the  wharves  which  lined  the  banks  of  the  Cydnus, 
would  have  had  to  speak  it  too.  His  later  use  of  the 
language,  although  never  quite  detached  from  Jewish 
idioms  and  forms  of  thought,  is,  upon  the  whole,  that 
of  a  man  who  had  used  it  from  childhood ;  and  his 
use  of  the  Greek  poets,  of  metaphors  which  a  Greek 
would  understand,  and  in  some  places  of  distinctly 
Greek  modes  of  argument,  in  not  a  few  places,  of 


the  Preparation.  69 

abstract  terms  on  which  Greek  thought  had  conferred 
their  meaning  and  their  power,  shows  that  his  early 
education,  if  mainly  rabbinical,  was  by  no  means 
exclusively  so.  It  would  seem  to  be  at  least  pro 
bable,  that,  to  omit  any  other  conjectures,  he  had 
read  portions  of  the  Republic  of  Plato.  Of  the  three 
classes  of  metaphors  which  are  commonly  used  by  him 
in  his  later  writings, — the  architectural,  the  agricul- 
tural,  an«l  tin:  theatrical,  -  tin:  lavish  inniiorirs  <>| 
Tarsus  probably  supplied  the  material.  He  had  there 
gated,  with  a  curiosity  which  docs  not  repeat  itself  in 
later  life,  upon  temples,  some  of  them  in  the  process 
of  construction,  which  ho  never  entered ;  they  supplied 
his  language  about  the  "  edification  "  of  the  Christian 
Church.  He  had  watched  the  cultivation  of  the  rich 
meadow-land  at  the  base  of  the  Taurus.  Was  he  not 
thinking  of  this  when  he  wrote,  "  I  have  planted, 
A  polios  watered ;  but  God  gave  the  increase"  ?  Above 
all,  he  had  heard  much  of  the  Greek  games— he  may 
have  witnessed  some  local  sports  which  imitated  the 
world-famed  originals — games  which  he  describes  with 
such  vivid  appreciation  when  writing  to  the  Corin 
thians.  If  we  except  one  expression  in  the  £pistlo  to 
the  Colossians,  which  seems  to  refer  to  the  destruction 
of  the  piratical  strongholds  in  Cilicia  by  the  Itomaii 
forces  some  years  before,  his  military  metaphors,  liko 
the  famous  passage  in  the  Epistle  to  the  Ephcsians, 
are  due  to  his  contact  with  Roman  rather  than  with 


70  The  Life  of  St.  Paul: 

Greek  life — to  the  rude  experiences  of  Philippi,  of 
Jerusalem,  of  Csesarea,  of  the  first  imprisonment  at 
Rome.  But  at  Tarsus  the  Greek  literature  and  society 
did,  if  not  its  best,  yet  certainly  much  for  him.  That 
gifted  and  extraordinary  race,  which  was  to  the  ancient 
world  even  more  than  France  has  hitherto  been  to 
Europe — the  type  and  mistress  of  its  outward  civi 
lisation — must  be  understood  in  that  age  by  any  man 
who  had  great  duties  in  the  future  towards  the  world, 
towards  humanity.  At  this  time  in  his  life,  too,  St. 
Paul  would  probably  have  become  familiar  with  that 
large  section  of  the  Jews  of  the  Dispersion  whose 
centre  was  Alexandria,  who  in  everything  but  religion 
were  nearly  Greeks,  and  whose  religion  was  taking 
more  and  more  of  the  Greek  dress  every  day.  The 
great  Alexandrian  version  of  the  Old  Testament,  the 
Septuagint,  as  it  is  called, — which  the  Apostle  so  often 
quotes,  while  yet  he  treats  it  so  freely, — would  have 
been  already  familiar  to  him ;  and  the  philosophical 
writer  Philo-Judaeus,  whose  efforts  to  establish  har 
monious  relations  between  the  Old  Testament  revela 
tion  and  the  Platonic  philosophy  have  had  such  large 
results  for  the  highest  good  and,  it  must  be  added, 
for  considerable  evil  upon  the  history  of  religious 
belief,  would  have  been  often  in  his  hands,  although 
as  yet  he  little  knew  that  such  vast  consequences 
were  to  result  from  the  study. 

This  education  was  moulding  and  developing  a 


the  Preparation.  7 1 

character  which,  not  to  dwell  here  on  its  subordinate 
features,  may  be  described  by  one  single  word — inten 
sity.  There  was  much  besides, — sensitiveness,  impetu 
osity,  courage,  independence.  But  in  all  that  he  did, 
Paul  of  Tarsus,  before  his  conversion,  as  well  as  after 
it,  threw  his  whole i  energy^_whe_ther  of  thought  or 
resolution,  into  his  work.  And,  as  might  be  expected 
in  a  character  of  this  mould,  objects  of  thought  and 
aims  of  action  took  their  place  in  his  soul  according 
to  the  real,  and  not  according  to  any  fictitious,  order 
of  precedence.  The  central  problems  of  thought  and 
faith,  the  ultimate  and  supreme  aims  of  life,  disengaged 
themselves  from  all  that  was  merely  accessory  and 
subordinate,  and  were  pursued  with  a  concentration 
of  purpose  which  carried  all  before  it.  We  may  be 
sure  that  this  was  the  case,  so  far  as  was  possible  in 
such  a  subject-matter,  when  the,  young  student  was 
still  grappling  with  the  accumulated  traditions  of 
Rabbinism :  we  know  that  it  was  so  when,  in  the  ripe 
ness  of  his  early  manhood,  the  young  rabbi  returned 
to  the  chief  scene  of  his  education  to  take  part  in  a 
struggle  whose  issue  would  form  the  turning-point  of 
his  career. 

How  mysterious  is  the  thought  that  there  are  now 
living  in  places,  and  with  names  unknown  to  us,  some 
who  will  hereafter  profoundly  influence  at  least  some 
of  our  lives.  True  this  is  of  all  human  beings:  of 
Paul  of  Tarsus  it  was  true  in  a  sense  which  perhaps 


72  The  Life  of  St.  Paul: 

never  has  been  repeated.  Did  he  ever,  we  ask 
naturally,  during  his  student  life,  come  into  contact 
with  One  Who  was  to  exert  so  great  an  influence  on 
his  later  career  ?  They  must  have  been  at  the  same 
festivals;  they  must  often  have  gazed  on  the  same 
buildings,  the  same  faces ;  the  opportunity  of  seeing 
the  Prophet  of  Nazareth,  as  He  was  called,  must  have 
often  presented  itself.  Yet  there  is  no  proof,  no 
intimation,  that  they  ever  met,  as  man  meets  man, 
on  the  surface  of  this  planet.  "The  knowledge  of 
Christ  after  the  flesh,"1  of  which  mention  is  made 
in  an  Epistle,  refers  to  no  personal  experience  of  St. 
Paul's,  but  to  a  mistaken  mood  of  feeling  in  his 
Corinthian  readers.  The  question,  "  Have  I  not  seen 
Jesus  Christ  our  Lord  ? " 2  refers  to  that  sight  which 
made  St.  Paul  the  peer  of  Peter  and  of  John,  but 
which  occurred  after  the  Ascension.  His  first  known 
contact  with  Christianity  and  with  Christ  was  that  of 
a  determined  foe. 

When  Paul  of  Tarsus  reappeared  at  Jerusalem,  not 
long  before  St.  Stephen's  martyrdom,  he  was  standing, 
as  it  were,  on  the  frontier  of  two  worlds,  the  Jewish 
or  Semitic  on  the  one  side,  and  the  Greek  on  the 
other.  He  was  probably  among  the  opponents  of  St. 
Stephen  hi  the  Cilician  synagogue ;  and,  notwith 
standing  his  earnestness  and  accomplishments,  he  was 
"not  able  to  resist  the  wisdom  and  the  spirit  with 

1  2  Cor.  v.  16.  a  i  Cor.  ix.  i. 


the  Preparation.  73 

which  Stephen  spake."  He  was  checked  by  the  sense 
of  a  stronger  power  than  any  ho  could  wield :  there 
was  something  that  could  do  more  in  and  for  the 
human  soul  than  even  the  learned  dialectics  of 
Gamaliel.  He  must  have  witnessed  the  arrest  before 
the  Sanhedrim,  and  have  listened  to,  probably  he 
reported  from  memory,  the  great  apology  in  which 
the  martyr  justifies  the  spiritual  worship  of  the 
Church  by  a  review  of  the  whole  past  of  Jewish 
history ;  and  for  the  rest,  we  have  his  own  bitter  self- 
accusing  words  of  a  later  date,  "  When  the  blood  of 
Thy  martyr  Stephen  was  shed,  I  also  was  standing  by 
and  consenting  unto  his  death,  and  kept  the  raiment 
of  them  that  slew  him." l 

The  fact  was  that  the  death  of  Stephen  was,  in 
Paul's  eyes,  a  logical  consequence  of  his  Jewish  creed, 
and  he  was  not  the  man  to  shrink  from  it.  He  too, 
as  he  witnessed  the  violence  of  the  brutal  mob,  the 
upturned  face  of  the  martyr  (it  was  an  angel  gaze  into 
the  depths  of  heaven),  and  then  stood  by  outside  the 
eastern  gate,  at  a  spot  certainly  not  far  from  the 
scene  of  the  Great  Agony,  and  heard  the  thuds  of  the 
falling  stones  which  one  after  another  were  crushing 
out  the  life  of  the  man  who  had  beaten  him  in  argu 
ment,  he  must  have  had,  wo  think,  some  human 
sympathy  with  the  object  of  the  Sanhedrim's  venge 
ance.  We  know  that  there  was  an  undercurrent  of 

1  Act*  xxii.  20. 


i 


74  The  Life  of  St.  Paul : 

sucli  sympathy,  but  it  might  have  been  silenced  or 
crushed  out  for  ever,  as  completely  as  was  the  passing 
remorse  with  which  the  eye  of  his  murdered  master 
is  said  for  a  moment  to  have  filled  even  such  a 
soul  as  Cromwell's  when  it  followed  him  from  the 
canvas  of  Vandyck.  For  the  present  a  tempest  of 
logically  directed  passion  swept  over  the  mind  of  Paul, 
and  silenced  or  buried  all  else.  The  death  of  St. 
Stephen  was  ibllowed  by  a  general  and  sharp  persecu 
tion  of  the  Christians.  The  Koman  procurator  was 
probably  absent, — if  he  was  not  glad  of  the  opportunity 
of  showing  his  profound  contempt  for  the  theological 
disputes  of  an  Eastern  province ;  so  the  Sanhedrim  and 
the  people  had  their  way.  The  Sanhedrim  was  mainly 
composed  of  leading  Sadducees,  a  sect  which,  believing 
little  about  the  next  world,  naturally  made  the  most_ 
of  this,  and  whose  leading  members,  generally  persons 
of  considerable  eminence  as  rulers,  were  among  the 
foremost  personages  of  the  hierarchy.  These  men 
knew  well  how  to  encourage,  for  political  and  worldly 
ends,  the  sectarian  passions  whose  motives  they 
regarded  with  entire  contempt ;  but  for  the  moment 
the  passions  of  the  ignorant  people  and  the  policy  of 
these  highly-placed  sceptics  practically  coincided. 
It  is  at  least  doubtful  whether  Paul  was  actually  a 
member  of  the  Sanhedrim  (a  single  expression  has 
perhaps  been  overstrained  to  support  the  inference) : 
yet  he  was  certainly  acting  under  its  sanction  and 


the  Preparation.  75 

authority.  Although  this  dread  tribunal  had  been 
deprived  of  its  old  power  of  life  and  death,  it  seems 
at  this  period  to  have  exercised  it  anarchically,  and 
other  martyrdoms  followed  that  of  Stephen.  Paul 
can  have  had  little  enough  in  common  with  the  high 
priest  under  whose  commission  he  was  acting ;  for  the 
moment,  as  may  often  be  witnessed,  sceptical  poli 
ticians  and  sincere  fanatics  were  making  common 
cause  against  what  they  agreed  to  consider  the  new 
superstition.  In  many  a  synagogue  Christians  were 
arrested,  scourged,  compelled  publicly  to  curse  the 
Name  of  Jesus :  women  especially,  it  is  noted  more 
than  once,  were  the  objects  of  the  violence  of  the 
persecution.  At  length  the  work  was  done,  as  it 
seemed,  effectually.  The  little  community  was  broken 
up  and  dispersed,  and  the  Sanhedrim,  which  claimed 
to  exercise  jurisdiction  over  a  large  part  of  the  Jews 
of  the  Dispersion,  turned  its  eyes  upon  the  Church 
which  had  grown  up  in  the  important  city  ot 
Damascus.  That  had  better  be  crushed  out  too; 
and  if  the  work  was  to  be  done,  who  would  do  it 
better  than  the  young  Pharisee,  whoso  accomplish 
ments  were  notorious,  and  whose  unflinching  devotion 
to  the  synagogue  had  been  proved  by  his  activity  as 
a  persecutor  ?  Paul  was  appointed  a  special  commis 
sioner  to  destroy  the  Church  of  Christ  in  Damascus, 
and  he  left  Jerusalem  on  this  errand  accordingly. 


76  The  Life  of  St.  Paul  : 


II. 

It  was  while  he  was  on  this  journey  that  the  new 
influence  which  was  to  make  him  what  he  is  to 
Christendom  was  brought  to  bear  upon  his  life. 

There  are  many  men  for  whom  the  phenomena  of 
the  spiritual  world  simply  do  not  exist.  It  is  im 
possible  within  the  compass  of  this  lecture  to  make 
any  attempt  to  demonstrate  their  reality ;  it  is  neces 
sary  to  content  ourselves  with  observing  that  they 
can  be  shown  to  be  just  as  real  as  the  facts  and  laws 
of  what  we  call  nature.  In  both  spheres  we  are  in 
the  region  of  mystery;  we  know  just  as  little  of  the 
nature  of  matter  as  we  know  of  the  nature  of  spirit; 
we  only  touch  what  we  call  matter  from  without,  we 
know  not  what  it  is  in  itself.  If  we  cannot  deny,  with 
some  philosophers,  any  reality  at  all  to  matter,  we  are 
at  least  safe  in  saying  that  spirit  is  at  least  as  real, 
and  that  the  world  of  spiritual  experiences  is  as  true 
objectively — that  is,  whether  we  recognise  its  exist 
ence  or  not — as  is  the  world  of  matter.  Grace  with 
its  operations  is  as  much  a  substantial  certainty  as 
the  law  of  gravitation ;  and  the  facts  which  burst  on 
the  consciousness  of  Paul  during  that  eventful  journey 
are  philosophically  just  as  much  entitled  to  respectful 
consideration  as  the  last  eclipse  which  was  observed 
and  registered  at  Greenwich. 


the  Preparation.  77 

Paul  had  nearly  completed  his  journey, — some  six 
weary  days  it  was  at  the  least  from  Jerusalem  to 
Damascus.  He  had  traversed  the  burning  plains 
and  uplands  of  Gaulonitis  and  Itursea,  and  was  now 
in  the  beautiful  valley  watered  by  the  streams  of  the 
Abana  and  the  Pharpar,  about  a  mile  and  a  half,  it 
seems  probable,  from  Damascus.  Behind  him  was 
the  great  dome  of  Mount  Hermon,  capped  with  snow ; 
on  his  right  the  Hauran;  on  his  left  the  spurs  of  Anti- 
Libanus;  before  him  the  city  which  contained  his 
destined  victims,  its  white  buildings  just  rising  above 
the  trees  and  gardens  which  lined  his  road.  It  is 
one  of  the  choicest  spots  on  the  surface  of  our  globe, 
that  approach  to  Damascus,  beautiful  in  itself,  more 
beautiful  from  its  sharp  contrast  to  the  arid  desert 
which  encircles  it.  It  is,  as  has  been  said,  a  very 
wilderness  of  gardens,  in  which  flowers  and  fruit  are 
interwined  in  careless  profusion,  in  which  the  prune, 
the  apricot,  the  olive,  festooned  by  the  vine,  grow  on 
this  side  and  on  that  in  rich  luxuriance,  while  every 
where  the  channels  that  are  distributed  for  the  pur 
poses  of  irrigation  over  the  plain  cool  the  air  with 
the  clear  fresh  streams  that  run  from  the  base  of 
Anti-Libanus,  and  maintain  this  wealth  of  vegeta 
tion  under  that  burning  sun.  Its  situation  alone 
explains  the  fact  that  Damascus  is  the  oldest  of 
known  cities ;  and  that  while  Tyre,  Babylon,  Palmyra, 
each  of  these  more  modern  than  itself,  have  long  since 


7  8  The  Life  of  St.  Paul: 

perished  utterly,  Damascus  is  still  a  place  of  beauty, 
and  even  of  importance. 

It  was  at  noon,  when  all  is  hushed  in  those  southern 
climes,  even  to  the  very  birds  upon  the  trees,  that 
the  event  occurred  which  turned  the  whole  current 
of  the  life  of  Saul  of  Tarsus.  Suddenly  there  was  a 
light  from  heaven  above  the  brightness  of  the  sun, 
shining  round  about  Paul  and  them  that  journeyed 
with  him.  The  stupefied  companions  of  the  perse 
cutor  fell  to  the  ground ;  they  only  rose  to  hear  that 
a  voice  was  being  uttered  which  they  could  not 
understand.  The  vision  was  not  meant  for  them, 
and  although  the  narrative  makes  it  certain  that  it 
was  not  merely  something  internal  to  the  soul  or 
mind  of  St.  Paul,  but,  on  the  contrary,  a  strictly 
independent  or,  as  we  should  say,  objective  pheno 
menon,  it  was  not  intended  for  them,  and  they  saw 
and  heard  only  enough  to  know  that  it  was  in  pro 
gress.  Paul  heard  what  they  did  not  hear,  he  saw 
what  they  did  not  see.  He  heard  in  the  tones  of 
that  voice,  in  the  words  of  that  language,  which  had 
fallen  on  the  ears  of  Peter  and  John,  "Saul,  Saul, 
why  persecutest  thou  Me  ?  it  is  hard  for  thee  to  kick 
against  the  goads."  He  had,  it  is  plain,  felt  the  plead 
ing  of  St.  Stephen  before  the  Sanhedrim,  the  death  of 
St.  Stephen  outside  the  city  walls,  the  constant,  ener 
getic,  though  sternly  repressed,  working  of  his  own 
conscience  reviewing  the  facts  of  his  own  career ;  they 


the  Preparation.  79 

were  a  cause  of  much  secret  distress  to  him,  and  here 
there  was  an  evidence  from  without,  confirming  what 
had  been  already  whispered  within.  The  religion 
which  he  had  argued  against,  fought  against,  perse 
cuted,  was  true.  It  made  people  in  every  way  inferior 
to  himself  somehow,  yet  unmistakably,  his  moral 
superiors — that  he  had  already  felt;  and  now  here 
was  the  countersign  of  that  feeling  revealed  from  the 
very  clouds  of  heaven.  He  asked  submissively  what 
he  was  to  do,  and  he  was  told  to  arise  and  go  into 
the  city,  and  there  it  would  be  told  him  what  he  was 
ordained  to  do.  The  burning  light  of  the  vision  had 
blinded  him ;  and  he  entered  Damascus,  not  at  the 
head  of  his  cavalcade,  bent  on  schemes  of  violence 
and  persecution,  but  led  by  the  hand,  as  if  ho  were 
himself  a  prisoner,  to  the  house  of  Judas.  There  for 
three  days  he  fasted  and  prayed — he  passed  seventy- 
two  hours  in  silence — in  darkness  alone  with  God. 

The  shock  of  the  occurrence  passed ;  its  meaning, 
its  consequences,  its  ineffaceable  consequences,  re 
mained  and  unfolded  themselves  before  his  mind's 
eye.  The  world  was  another  world  to  him,  life 
was  for  him  another  order  of  existence.  He  had 
given  his  will,  his  inmost  self,  to  the  Being  Who 
spoke  to  him  from  heaven.  The  strength  and  secret 
of  his  new  life  was  this :  that  ho  henceforth  belonged 
not  to  himself;  he  had  abandoned  himself  without 
reserve  to  a  perfectly  Holy  Will.  That  was  tha 


8o  The  Life  of  St.  Paul : 

determining  fact  of  his  new  life.  In  the  train  of  that 
act  of  self-surrender  all  else  followed.  The  old  had 
passed  away,  all  things  had  become  new.  He  was 
restored  to  sight  at  the  entrance  of  Ananias — a 
humble  minister  of  Christ  in  Damascus — and  was  re 
ceived  into  the  Church  by  the  sacrament  of  Baptism. 

The  conversion  of  St.  Paul  was  the  subject  of  one 
of  the  most  celebrated  pieces  of  apologetic  literature 
which  appeared  in  England  during  the  last  century. 
The  Lord  Lyttelton  of  that  day  had  felt  the  force  of 
the  Deistic  objections  to  Christianity  which  were 
so  eagerly  urged  by  a  large  and  cultivated  school  of 
writers,  and  he  would  seem  to  have  recovered  his 
faith  mainly  by  concentrating  his  attention  upon  the 
significance  of  St.  Paul's  conversion.  We  are  now 
concerned  certainly  less  with  the  evidential  force  of 
this  event  than  with  its  real  character;  but  its  real 
character  does  undoubtedly  invest  it  with  a  high 
evidential  value. 

It  cannot  be  explained  by  the  temperament  or 
character  of  the  Apostle.  He  was  not  a  visionary  or 
a  person  of  weak  intellect;  his  whole  conduct  and 
the  arguments  which  he  employs  prove  that  he  was 
by  nature  a  critic  and  dialectician,  quick  at  detecting 
objections,  not  merely  in  the  case  of  an  opponent,  but 
in  his  own,  and  inclined  by  mental  temperament  to 
see  to  the  bottom  of  such  objections  before  laying 
them  aside.  Had  he  been  of  the  facile  and  impres- 


the  Preparation.  81 

siblo  temper  which  is  assumed  by  the  older  Deists, 
and  in  a  slight  reconstruction  of  their  arguments  by 
M.  Kenan,  he  might  have  been  expected  to  have  given 
at  least  one  further  proof  of  it,  in  an  opposite  or  re 
actionary  direction,  at  one  of  the  many  opportunities 
which  presented  themselves  in  his  later  life.  But 
there  is  nothing  afterwards  in  the  way  of  change; 
the  converted  Paul  ceased  once  for  all  to  be  a  Jew,  in  his 
conduct,  his  feelings,  his  inclinations,  his  prejudices. 
If  his  conversion  was  not  what  it  is  represented  in 
the  Scripture  narrative,  the  natural  explanation  of 
it  is  at  least  as  difficult  as  the  supernatural.  The 
mental  conditions  which  will  explain  the  vision  in 
the  heavens  above  the  brightness  of  the  sun,  the  con 
versation  with  a  heavenly  Being,  the  guidance  by  the 
hand  into  Damascus,  the  blindness,  the  instruction, 
the  recovery  of  sight,  the  total  change  of  thought, 
feeling,  conviction,  purpose  which  followed,  would 
amount  to  a  psychological  miracle  at  least  as  striking 
as  that  which  really  took  place. 

Nor  can  the  conversion  bo  explained  by  the  sup 
position  that  the  account  was  forged  What  motive 
had  St.  Paul  for  inventing  it  ?  Was  it  some  private 
pique  or  annoyance  with  the  Jews  that  led  him  to 
change  his  religious  profession,  and  to  account  for  the 
change  in  this  kind  of  way  ?  But  there  is  no  trace  of 
any  personal  feeling  of  this  kind ;  it  would  have  been 
a  sin  against  natural  feeling,  since  the  Jewish  people 

r 


8  2  The  Life  of  St.  Paul : 

had  singled  Paul  out  for  a  place  of  confidence  and 
honour ;  and  as  a  matter  of  fact,  when  the  Jews  were 
persecuting  him  to  death,  he  expresses,  in  more  ways 
than  one,  his  love  for  his  countrymen.  He  deplores 
their  blindness;  he  excuses  their  conduct  so  far  as 
he  can ;  and  even  if  in  one  place  he  paints  it  in  dark 
colours,  he  would,  he  says,  gladly  be  accursed,  were  it 
possible,  in  their  place.  Was  it  the  spirit  of  sensitive 
independence,  which  will  sometimes  lead  men  to  assert 
their  own  importance  at  the  cost  of  their  party  or 
their  principles?  That,  again,  is  inconsistent  with 
his  earnest  and  consistent  advocacy  of  the  duty  of 
subjection  to  existing  authorities,  in  terms  and  to  a 
degree  which  has  exposed  him  to  fierce  criticism  from 
the  advocates  of  social  and  political  change.  Was  it, 
then,  a  refined  self-interest  ?  Did  the  young  Jew  see 
in  the  rising  sect  a  prospect  of  bettering  himself? 
But  Christianity  was  being  persecuted,  as  it  seemed, 
to  the  very  verge  of  actual  extermination :  it  had  been 
crushed  out  by  the  established  hierarchy  in  Jerusalem 
itself;  it  was  doomed  to  destruction,  every  intelligent 
Jew  would  have  thought,  as  well  by  the  might  of  the 
forces  brought  against  it  as  by  its  intrinsic  absurdity. 
It  had  nothing  to  offer  in  the  way  of  social  eminence 
or  literary  attraction ;  it  was,  as  yet,  in  the  main,  the 
religion  of  the  very  poor  and  of  the  very  illiterate. 
On  the  contrary,  the  young  Pharisee  had,  if  any 
man,  brilliant  prospects  before  him  if  he  remained 


the  Preparation.  83 


loyal  to  the  Synagogue:  the  reputation  of  his  great 
master,  his  own  learning  and  acuteness,  his  great 
practical  ability,  would  have  commanded  success.  If 
his  object  was  really  a  selfish  one,  no  man  ever  made 
a  greater  or  a  more  stupid  mistake  to  all  appearance ; 
for  no  Jew  could  have  anticipated  for  a  convert  to 
Christianity,  within  a  few  years  of  the  Crucifixion, 
such  a  reputation  as  that  which  surrounds  the  name  of 
St .  Paul.  Yet,  at  the  same  time,  there  is  no  reason  to 
suppose  that  the  power  which  effected  this  immense 
change  in  the  purpose  and  life  of  Saul  of  Tarsus 
operated  irresistibly  upon  his  intellect  and  his  will. 
When  ho  tells  Agrippa,  "  I  was  not  disobedient  to  the 
heavenly  vision,"  he  implies  that  ho  was  perfectly  free 
to  disobey.  There  is  no  such  thing  as  irresistible 
grace  in  the  moral  world:  If^tFer^were,  man  in 

it    would   exchange   his   t'nr<l«>m   as  ji  moral 


agent  for  the  passive  obedience  of  a  vegetable  to  the 


law  of  its  kind.    Paul  might  have  persuaded  himself 

th. if    tin;   vision   was  an   hallucination;    that    his  own 

brain  had  formulated  the  words  of  Jesus;  that  the 
blindness  was  solely  due  to  physical  causes ;  that  the 
scruples  about  the  blood  of  Stephen  and  the  martyrs 
were  of  the  nature  of  a  foolish  superstition;  and  when 
the  shock  was  over  he  would  have  carried  out  the 
purpose  which  brought  him  to  Damascus,  and  have 
entered  the  synagogues  to  arrest  a  fresh  batch  of 
victims  for  the  Sanhedrim  in  Jerusalem.  If  he  did 


84  The  Life  of  St.  Paul: 

not  do  this,  it  was  because  lie  was  looking  out  for  truth, 
and  disposed  to  make  the  most  of  it  when  it  came. 
Many  a  man  in  his  circumstances  would  have  acted 
otherwise.  St.  Paul  could  say,  "  By  the  grace  of  God 
I  am  what  I  am,  and  His  grace  which  was  showered 
upon  me  was  not  in  vain." 

In  this  case  of  St.  Paul's,  the  new  influence  which 
remoulded  his  life  belonged  to  a  sphere  which  is  above 
nature.  But  a  kindred  influence,  scarcely,  if  at  all, 
less  powerful  in  its  results,  may  be  exerted  by  persons 
or  causes  which  are  strictly  within  our  range  of  obser 
vation.  The  character  of  a  friend,  a  startling  occur 
rence,  a  new  book,  may  form  the  frontier  line  between 
the  past  and  a  future  which  has  little  in  common  with 
it ;  and,  it  must  be  remembered,  susceptibility  to  such 
influences  is  not  a  mark  of  feminine  weakness.  On  the 
contrary,  the  most  masculine  natures,  if  true  to  the 
higher  promptings  of  conscience  and  the  higher  sides 
of  existence,  are  peculiarly  open  to  them ;  and,  even 
when  they  fall  far  short  of  involving  a  "translation  from 
darkness  unto  light,  and  from  the  power  of  Satan  unto 
God,"  the}7-  still  form  that  decisive  turn  in  the  affairs  of 
men,  which  taken  at  the  tide  leads  on  to  excellence. 

III. 

It  was  natural  that  in  the  first  fervour  of  conver 
sion  St.  Paul  should  wish  to  make  others  sharers  in 
his  illumination  and  his  joy.  He  appeared  without 


the  Preparation.  85 

delay  in  the  synagogues  of  Damascus.  His  appear 
ance  had  been  expected  as  that  of  the  accomplished 
Pharisee  who  was  commissioned  by  the  high  priest 
Theophilus  to  exterminate  the  Christian  heresy  in 
the  ancient  Syrian  capital  He  would  bring  the  most 
recent  and  ripest  learning  of  Jerusalem  to  confute  the 
nascent  error ;  he  would  use  force  if  necessary — with 
prudence,  but  with  unflinching  determination.  What 
must  have  been  the  blank  astonishment  of  his  old 
co-religionists  when  he  "  straightway  preached,  in  the 
synagogues,  that  Jesus  was  the  Son  of  God  " !  What 
must  have  been  their  indignation  when  the  first 
stupor  of  surprise  had  passed !  And  how  great  must 
have  been — we  know  that  it  was  great — the  thankful 
wonder  of  the  trembling  Christians  when  their  declared 
enemy  thus  publicly,  and  at  the  imminent  peril  of 
his  life,  owned  himself  a  disciple  and  preacher  of  the 
Faith  which  he  had  so  recently  persecuted  to  the 
death !  The  higher  interests  of  human  life  are  liable 
to  surprises,  but  few  that  ever  happened  can  have 
rivalled  this ! 

It  would  seem  that  this  first  effort  at  missionary 
work  was  of  brief  duration.  It  was  an  anachronism, 
dictated  by  profound  spiritual  impulse,  but  at  variance 
with  the  orderly  development  of  his  life.  After  a 
great  change  of  conviction,  nature,  as  well  as  some 
thing  higher  than  nature,  tells  us  that  a  long  period 
of  retirement  and  silence  is  fitting,  if  not  necessary. 


86  The  Life  of  St.  Paul: 

The  three  days  in  the  house  of  Judas  were  not  enough 
in  which  to  sound  the  heights  and  depths  of  newly 
recognised  truth,  or  the  strength  and  weakness  of  the 
soul  which  was  to  own  and  to  proclaim  it.  They 
were  to  be  followed  by  three  years — I  must  not  enter 
upon  the  chronological  reasons  for  insisting  on  the 
literal  value  of  the  expression — three  years  passed  in 
the  deserts  of  Arabia.  It  has  indeed  been  thought 
that  this  retirement  was  dictated  by  a  wish  to  preach 
the  Gospel  to  the  wandering  Bedouin  tribes  or  to  the 
settled  Arabs  at  Petra.  And  there  is  no  doubt  that 
Arabia  was  among  the  Ancients  a  very  wide  and  in 
clusive  geographical  term.  It  might  have  included 
Damascus  itself.  It  might  have  even  taken  in  regions 
far  to  the  north,  extending  to  the  very  borders  of 
Cilicia.  But  these  are  less  usual  uses  of  the  word: 
nor  can  it  be  supposed  that  emphasis  would  have  been 
laid  on  this  retirement  if  all  that  had  been  meant  had 
been  a  journey  of  a  few  miles  into  the  desert  beyond 
the  walls  of  Damascus.  Something  may  be  said  for 
the  supposition  of  a  retreat  to  Petra,  the  ancient 
capital  of  Edom,  which  had  its  synagogue  in  Jeru- 
f  salem ;  but  the  probabilities  are  that  under  the  pro- 
|  found  and  awful  inspiration  of  the  hour,  Paul  sought 
!  to  tread  in  the  footsteps  of  Moses  and  of  Elijah  at  the 
|  base  of  Sinai.  There  is  a  reference  to  the  dialect  of 
the  district  in  the  Epistle  to  the  Galatians1  which 

*  Gal.  iv.  25. 


the  Preparation.  87 

makes  this  at  least  probable  for  other  than  spiritual 
reasons;  the  spiritual  attractions  of  such  a  course 
must  have  been  to  a  man  with  his  character  and  ante 
cedents  not  less  than  overwhelming.  There,  where 
the  Jewish  Law  had  been  given,  he  was  led  to  ask 
what  it  really  meant ;  what  were  its  sanctions ;  what 
its  obligations;  what  were  the  limits  of  its  moral 
capacity ;  what  the  criterion  of  its  weakness.  There 
he  must  have  felt  the  inspiration  of  a  life  like 
Elijah's,  the  great  representative  of  a  persecuted 
religious  minority,  the  preacher  of  unpopular  truth 
against  vulgar  but  intolerant  error.  Would  not  the 
still  small  voice  which  had  spoken  to  the  Prophet, — 
or  rather,  did  it  not,— speak  again  and  again,  whis 
pering  those  deep  truths  which  are  missed  or  for 
gotten  or  lost  amid  the  bustle  of  active  life,  to  the 
new  convert  ?  They  were  precious  years,  depend  upon 
it,  for  a  man  whose  whole  later  life  was  to  be  passed 
in  action. 

The  value  of  such  retirement,  if  circumstances 
admit  of  it  or  suggest  it,  before  entering  on  the  de 
cisive  work  of  life,  can  hardly  be  exaggerated.  Many 
a  young  man  whose  education  is  complete,  as  the 
phrase  goes,  and  who  knows,  or  thinks  that  he  knows, 
what  to  do  for  himself  or  for  his  fellow-creatures,  is 
often  painfully  disappointed  when  his  plans  for  imme 
diate  exertion  suddenly  break  down,  and  ho  has  to 
remain  for  a  while  in  comparative  obscurity  and  inac- 


88  The  Life  of  St.  Paul  : 

tion.  It  seems  to  him  to  be  a  loss  of  time,  with  little 
or  nothing  to  redeem  the  disadvantage ;  he  is  wasting, 
he  says,  his  best  years  hi  idleness.  He  may,  of 
course,  so  act  as  to  make  that  phrase  justifiable; 
but  it  need  be  nothing  of  the  kind.  A  prudent 
no  less  than  a  religious  man  will  thankfully  avail 
himself  of  such  an  opportunity  for  consolidating  his 
acquirements,  for  reviewing  the  bearings  of  his  govern 
ing  convictions,  for  estimating  more  accurately  the 
resources  at  his  disposal,  for  extending  or  contracting 
his  plans — at  least  for  reconsidering  them :  a  religious 
man  will,  above  all  else,  seize  such  an  opportunity  for 
testing  and  strengthening  his  motives,  and  cultivating 
an  increased  intimacy  with  those  means  and  sources 
of  effective  strength  which  he  will  need  so  much  here 
after.  St.  Paul,  we  may  be  sure,  used  the  opportunity. 
It  is  not  improbable  that  the  argument  of  his  Epistles 
to  the  Romans  and  the  Galatians,  although  provoked 
by  later  circumstances  arising  in  the  bosom  of  the 
Christian  Church,  was  the  fruit  of  his  meditation  in 
the  silence  of  the  desert.  In  any  case,  in  those  dreary 
wastes  his  spirit  would  have  been  free  from  the  pre 
occupations  of  sense ;  free  to  measure  the  import  and 
exigency  of  his  recent  vision  and  change;  free  to 
review  the  past  years  which  had  been  a  gain  to  him, 
but  which  henceforth,  so  far  as  their  proper  aim  was 
concerned,  he  accounted  loss ;  free  to  prepare  for  the 
life  of  work  and  suffering  whose  dim  outlines  may 


the  Preparation.  89 

already  have  sketched  themselves  before  his  eyes,  in 
a  strength  which  would  alone  sustain  him. 

There  we  must  leave  him  this  evening.  The  pre 
paration  for  that  life  is  complete :  we  have  to  consider 
in  another  lecture  what  were  its  results  to  the  Church 
and  to  humanity. 


THE  LIFE  OF  ST.  PAUL. 

II.  THE  MISSIONARY — THE  CHURCH  RULER — 
THE  MARTYR.1 

A  LIFE  like  that  of  St.  Paul  yields  sufficient  material 
-£*-  for  at  least  ten  lectures  such  as  those  which  we 
can  give  in  this  Cathedral ;  and  I  therefore  can 
make  no  pretension  whatever  to  deal  with  its  main 
features  exhaustively  in  one.  It  suggests  too,  as 
some  at  least  of  my  hearers  will  know,  questions 
of  great  extent  and  intricacy,  which  have  created 
little  less  than  entire  literatures  hi  the  course  of  their 
discussion,  and  upon  some  of  which  no  very  positive 
opinion  can  be  arrived  at.  If  these  are  passed  by,  or 
only  glanced  at  incidentally,  or  referred  to  as  settled 
in  this  way  or  in  that,  without  giving  further  reasons, 
it  cannot  be  helped.  All  that  can  be  done  within 
such  limits  as  ours  is  to  suggest  a  few  salient  points 
of  the  general  subject;  to  furnish  the  outlines,  which 
may  be  filled  up  by  further  and  private  study ;  above 
all,  to  stimulate  interest,  if  it  might  be,  in  a  great 
character — a  great  Saint  and  Doctor — who  on  so 
many  grounds  is  so  entitled  to  command  it. 

1  Lecture    delivered   in   St.    Paul's    Cathedral  on    Tuesday  evening, 
January  20,1874. 
00 


The  Life  of  St.  Paul :  the  Missionary.     91 

The  life  of  man  is  made  up  of  action  and  of  endur 
ance, — of  the  efforts  which  he  puts  forth,  of  the  pain, 
discomfort,  inconvenience  which  he  undergoes.  And 
human  life  is  noble  and  fruitful  in  the  ratio  in  which 
it  is  laid  out  in  vigorous  action,  consecrated  by  a  noble 
aim;  and  in  suffering,  deliberately  submitted  to  or  em 
braced  from  a  generous  motive.  Nor  do  lives  passed 
in  speculative  thought  or  hi  religious  contemplation 
really  lie  outside  this  division.  Such  thought  is,  or 
ought  to  be,  an  energetic,  although  undemonstrative, 
variety  of  action ;  the  thinker  who  is  not  dreaming, 
the  contemplative  whose  soul  is  really  engaged  upon 
the  unseen  realities  which  interest  him,  is  hard  at 
work  with  the  organ  which  beyond  all  others  is 
capable  of  immense  exertion  and  of  distressing 
fatigue. 

To  pass  life  in  an  aimless  indolence,  to  shrink  from 
endurance  as  well  as  from  exertion,  to  exist  but  in  a 
state  of  moral  coma, — this  is  really  degrading.  Life 
is  always  and  only  ennobled  by  effort  and  by  suffer 
ing.  It  is  necessary  to  admit  this — as  an  axiom,  as  a 
truth  fairly  beyond  discussion — if  we  are  to  under 
stand  St.  Paul  at  all. 


St  Paul's  life  became  what  it  was  under  the  influ 
ence  of  an  overpowering  conviction.    He  was  certain 


92  The  Life  of  St.  Paul : 

that  he  was  in  possession  of  truth,  of  which  mankind 
were  almost  universally  ignorant,  and  which  it  was  of 
the  utmost  practical  importance  for  them  to  know. 
This  certainty  rested  upon  two  or  three  converging 
lines  of  evidence :  the  report  of  his  moral  sense  or  con 
science  as  to  the  Christian  character,  the  evidence  of 
his  bodily  as  well  as  of  his  spiritual  senses  on  the 
road  to  Damascus,  and  the  remarkable  correspond 
ence  between  the  conclusion  thus  reached  and  the 
fair  meaning  of  the  sacred  documents  which  he  had 
from  his  earliest  years  regarded  as  of  Divine  authority. 
This  certainty  came  to  him  at  that  decisive  moment 
of  his  life  which  we  partly  discussed  last  Tuesday ; 
but  the  practical  conclusion,  from  the  nature  of  the 
case,  only  gradually  shaped  itself.  To  use  his  own 
words,  he  was  a  debtor  to  the  human  race,  "  to  the 
Greeks  -and  to  the  barbarians ; "  he  owed  it  a  share  in 
that  truth  which  he  had,  he  felt,  no  right  to  mono 
polise.  How  should  he,  how  did  he,  discharge  the 
obligation  ? 

St.  Paul's  missionary  life  extended  altogether  over 
a  period  of  nearly  thirty  years.  For  hi  one  sense  he 
was  a  missionary  from  his  conversion.  His  early 
efforts  in  Damascus  provoked  the  hostility  of  the 
Jews ;  and  not  long  after  his  return  from  Arabia  he 
was  obliged  to  escape  for  his  life  from  an  officer  of 
king  Aretas,  who  in  these  unsettled  times  was  com 
manding  in  Damascus,  and  acting  apparently  under 


the  Missionary.  93 

Jewish  influence.  He  fled  to  Jerusalem.  To  visit 
Peter  was,  he  says,  a  leading  motive  for  going  there. 
The  Christians  in  Jerusalem  were  naturally  afraid  of 
a  person  who  had  been  so  conspicuous  a  persecutor, 
and  their  confidence  was  only  won  by  the  good  offices 
of  Barnabas,  who  assured  them  of  the  facts  and 
reality  of  St.  Paul's  conversion  and  of  his  work  for 
the  true  Faith  in  Damascus.  He  lived  for  a  fort 
night  on  terms  of  intimacy  with  St.  Peter  and  St. 
James, — our  Lord's  first  cousin,  and  the  first  Bishop 
of  Jerusalem ;  and  some  part  of  this  time  he  spent  in 
arguments  with  the  Hellenistic  or  Alexandrian  Jews, 
for  which  his  education  peculiarly  fitted  him.  He 
thus  excited  the  greatest  hostility,  and  was  obliged  to 
take  flight  by  way  of  Caesarea  to  his  birthplace  Tarsus. 
Of  his  life  at  Tarsus  during  the  next  four  years  we 
know  nothing,  except  that  it  must  have  been  by  no 
means  a  period  of  inactivity.  Making  his  father's  home 
his  headquarters,  he  seems  to  have  preached  in  the 
city  and  its  neighbourhood,  as  well  as  on  the  Syrian 
coast  on  the  opposite  side  of  the  bay ;  and  several  of 
the  dangers  and  trials  to  which  he  refers  in  his  second 
letter  to  the  Corinthians  probably  belong  to  this 
period,  especially  his  three  shipwrecks  and  his  being 
publicly  scourged  by  the  Jewish  and  Roman  autho 
rities.  In  the  year  44,  Barnabas,  who  was  working  at 
Antioch,  came  to  Tarsus  to  secure  the  co-operation  of 
St.  Paul.  The  Church  at  Antioch  had  been  founded 


94  The  Life  of  St.  Paul: 

eight  years  before  by  refugees  from  Jerusalem,  who 
were  flying  from  the  persecution  which  Paul  himself 
had  directed;  it  had  contained  from  the  first  a  number 
of  Gentile  converts,  and  it  was  to  superintend  this  new 
state  of  things  that  Barnabas  had  been  sent,  with 
apostolic  authority,  from  Jerusalem.  Barnabas  and 
Paul  worked  together  for  a  year,  in  teaching  the 
heathen  and  organising  the  Church,  and  at  the  end  of 
this  period  they  took  a  considerable  sum  of  money  to 
Jerusalem  to  meet  the  wants  of  the  poor  Christians  in 
that  city  during  the  famine  which  occurred  at  the  time 
of  Herod  Agrippa's  death.  They  returned  to  Antioch 
with  St.  Mark,  a  nephew  of  St.  Barnabas,  and  the 
Church  of  Antioch  rapidly  became,  for  the  time,  the 
most  central  spot  hi  Christendom.  The  political  and 
commercial  importance  of  this  city,  as  well  as  its 
position,  made  it  the  natural  starting-point  for  a  great 
scheme  of  Church  extension,  while  the  presence  of  a 
great  many  Gentile  converts  irresistibly  suggested  it. 
If  the  Gospel  had  come  to  Antioch — to  men  of  heathen 
birth  in  Antioch — could  it  be  meant  to  stop  there  ? 
Was  it  not,  by  its  very  terms,  a  message  of  health 
and  deliverance  to  the  whole  human  race,  and  was 
not  Antioch,  with  its  half-Jewish  half-Gentile  Church, 
the  natural  scene  for  originating  such  an  enterprise  ? 
So  it  was  that  the  Church  of  Antioch  was  taught,  by 
the  silent  movement  of  the  Holy  Spirit  within  men's 
minds,  to  make  a  great  effort  for  the  faith  in  the  Gentile 


the  Missionary.  95 


world,  and  to  give  her  greatest  teachers  to  the  work. 
The  decisive  conviction  came  while  the  Liturgy  or 
Holy  Communion — such  is  the  apparent  force  of  the 
original  word1 — was  being  celebrated,  and  the  two 
friends  with  the  nephew  of  Barnabas  set  forth  on 
their  mission. 

Up  to  this  time  St.  Paul  had  worked  as  a  subordi 
nate—a  kind  of  curate — to  Barnabas.  Like  all  really 
great  men,  he  was  profoundly  indifferent  to  any  mere 
questions  of  personal  or  professional  precedence,  pro 
vided  that  sacred  principles  were  safe  and  that  true 
work  was  done.  He  left  Antioch,  still  the  second  to 
Barnabas ;  but  after  the  conversion  of  Sergius  Paulus, 
the  proconsul  at  Cyprus,  the  author  of  the  Acts  of 
the  Apostles  no  longer  writes  Barnabas  and  Saul, 
but  Paul  and  Barnabas.  Not  only  is  the  order  of 
the  names  inverted,  but  the  Jewish  name,  Saul,  is 
dropped,  and  the  Roman  name,  Paulus,  which  the 
apostle  had  probably  possessed  from  his  birth,  was 
exclusively  adopted,  with  a  view,  no  doubt,  to  con 
ciliating  Gentile  prejudices. 

It  is  at  this  point  that  St.  Paul's  missionary  life,  in  its 
complete  form,  begins.  Between  his  leaving  Antioch 
hi  the  year  48,  and  his  arrest  at  Jerusalem  in  the 
summer  of  the  year  58,  he  achieved  what  are  popularly 
known  as  his  three  missionary  journeys.  They  do 
not  bear  traces  of  any  fixed  plan.  What  plan  there 

»  Ar.U  xiii.  a. 


96  The  Life  of  St.  Paul : 

was  was  disturbed  sometimes  by  circumstances ;  some 
times  it  was  set  aside  by  a  higher  Guidance  under 
which  the  Apostle  acted.  They  rather  remind  us — 
to  draw  an  illustration  from  a  very  different  field  of 
exertion — of  those  efforts  which  the  discovery  of  the 
New  World,  and  the  hope  of  finding  the  imagined 
El  Dorado,  provoked  at  the  hands  of  English  and 
Spanish  adventurers  alike  in  the  days  of  Philip  and 
Elizabeth.  It  was  the  spirit  of  enterprise,  only  in 
St.  Paul's  case  it  was  consecrated  by  a  purely  unself 
ish  and  noble  motive;  and  enterprise  is  necessarily 
governed  by  circumstances,  and  can  never  be  mapped 
out  very  systematically.  St.  Paul's  journeys  were  in 
their  way  like  the  expeditions  of  Sir  Walter  Raleigh  in 
theirs ; — the  creations  of  a  noble  impulse  which  must 
be  doing  something — raids,  conducted  on  no  very 
obvious  plan,  upon  the  dark  domains  of  heathendom. 
And  yet,  looking  back  upon  these  journeys,  we  may 
see  that  they  do  bear  a  certain  relation  to  each  other. 
The  first  was  tentative;  it  was  what  military  men 
would  call  a  reconnaissance  of  the  forces  of  the 
heathen  enemy.  It  extended  no  further  than  to  the 
northern  side  of  that  line  of  mountains  upon  which 
Paul  had  gazed  in  his  childish  days:  it  began  with 
a  great  success ;  it  well-nigh  closed  in  the  Apostle's 
martyrdom.  In  Cyprus  he  converts  the  Roman  pro 
consul,  and  punishes  the  magician  Elymas.  Crossing 
to  the  mainland,  he  makes  a  great  impression  at 


the  Missionary.  97 

Antioch  in  Pisidia,  which  provokes  an  outbreak  of 
Jewish  hostility;  at  Iconium  the  scenes  of  Antioch 
am  repeated ;  at  Lystra  and  Derbe  he  is  among  un 
civilised  Pagans,  who  are  ready  to  pay  him  Divine 
honours  in  one  mood  of  feeling  and  to  stone  him  to 
death  in  another.  Jewish  hostility  was  at  the  bottom  of 
the  incident  at  Lystra ;  the  Apostle  turned  homeward 
by  the  way  he  came,  making  as  sure  of  his  work  as 
he  could  by  leaving  presbyters  in  every  town,  and  at 
last  embarked  at  Attalia  direct  for  the  Syrian  Antioch. 
This  was  in  49,  and  the  next  year,  50,  was  marked 
by  the  visit  to  the  Apostolic  Council  at  Jerusalem. 
In  51  St.  Paul  set  out  on  his  second  missionary 
circuit  He  would  not  take  St.  Barnabas'  nephew,  who 
had  shown  a  want  of  apostolic  resolution,  and  this  led 
to  a  separation  from  Barnabas  himself.  Silas,  or 
Silvanus,  took  the  vacant  place.  This  second  journey 
is  on  the  whole  the  most  important;  it  is  certainly 
the  richest  in  incident  and  the  boldest  in  its  range. 
Again  the  missionaries  started  from  Antioch.  They 
passed  through  Syria  and  Cilicia.  They  revisited  the 
old  scenes  of  Derbe  and  Lystra,  where  Timothy  was 
circumcised  and  taken  into  the  Apostle's  company. 
The  Galatian  mission  followed,  of  which  we  know 
little  from  the  Acts,  but  much  from  the  Letter  to 
the  Galatian  churches.  St.  Paul  was  detained  in  the 
«li-trict  by  some  bodily  ailment,  whether  weakness  of 
the  eyes,  or,  as  is  on  the  whole  more  probable,  epilepsy; 


98  The  Life  of  St.  Paul: 

but  this  did  not  prevent  his  working  as  an  Evangelist, 
and  he  probably  founded  at  least  three  churches  in 
the  three  chief  towns  of  this  central  district  of  Asia 
Minor,  amid  an  amount  of  exuberant  enthusiasm 
characteristic  of  a  people  of  Celtic  origin,  and  soon  to 
be  followed  by  a  serious  reaction.  He  then  intended 
to  work  on  the  western  coast  of  Asia  Minor,  and  sub 
sequently  on  the  north-east  coast  in  Bithynia.  He 
was  prevented  by  Divine  intimations,  and  finally  was 
guided  by  a  vision  to  cross  from  Troas  into  Macedonia. 
This  decisive  moment  marked  the  entrance  of  the 
Gospel  into  Europe.  Accompanied  by  St.  Luke,  who 
joined  him  at  Troas, he  crossed,  touching  at  Sainothrace, 
to  Neapolis.  Then  follow  a  series  of  incidents  to  which 
the  greatest  prominence  is  assigned  in  the  narrative 
of  the  Acts,  and  with  which  we  are  all  familiar.  The 
Koman  colony  Philippi  is  the  scene  of  the  conver 
sion  of  Lydia,  the  exorcism  of  the  slave-girl,  the 
scourging  and  imprisonment  of  the  Apostles,  the 
conversion  of  the  jailer.  At  the  purely  Greek  city  of 
Thessalonica,  the  successful  preaching  on  three  Sab 
baths  is  followed  by  an  attack  on  the  house  of  Jason, 
and  his  arrest,  the  Apostles  escaping  by  night.  At 
Berea  the  resident  Jews  are  capable  of  a  more 
generous  bearing,  and  there  are  many  converts,  and 
yet  the  Apostle  had  to  be  privately  removed  to  secure 
his  safety.  At  Athens  he  is  face  to  face  with  the 
great  traditions  of  the  past  of  Greece,  with  the  scorn 


the  Missionary.  99 


and  yet  the  curiosity  of  Epicureans  and  Stoics,  with  an 
anxious  idolatry  that  would  leave  no  possible  object 
of  superstition  unvenerated.  Corinth,  famous  even  in 
Pagan  days  for  its  gross  impurity,  is  his  residence 
rbr  a  year  and  a  half;  it  witnesses  the  conversion  of 
Crispus  the  ruler  of  the  synagogue,  the  formal  seces 
sion  from  the  synagogue  to  the  house  of  Justus,  the 
failure  of  the  Jewish  appeal  to  Galiio ;  and  then  follows, 
in  the  spring  of  54,  his  return,  by  way  of  Cenchrea 
and  Ephesus,  to  Jerusalem  for  the  feast  of  Pentecost. 
St.  Paul's  third  journey  is  clearly  intended  to  sup 
plement  and  to  confirm  the  work  of  his  second.  He 
had  not  yet  laboured  at  Ephesus,  the  capital  of  Asia 
Minor,  and  one  of  the  great  centres  of  the  ancient 
world.  Ephesus,  JLo  which  a  famous  temple  and 
commercial  interests  drew  together  men  of  many 
races  and  tongues,  had  a  natural  charm  for  the  heart 
of  an  Apostle.  He  spent  three  years  in  Ephesus,  so 
great  was  his  sense  of  its  importance  to  the  future  of 
the  Faith.  The  progress  of  his  work  was  marked  by 
his  secession  from  the  synagogue  to  the  lecture-room 
of  Tyrannus,  then  by  his  triumph  over  the  professors 
of  magic,  lastly  by  the  groat  riot  organised  by  the 
discontented  silversmiths,  who  made  shrines  for  the 
great  temple  of  Artemis  or  Diana,  and  were  afraid 
of  losing  their  business.  The  other  noteworthy  point 
in  this  circuit  is  his  visit  to  Corinth,  which,  as  wo 
know  from  his  two  Epistles  to  that  Church  (one  of 


ioo  The  Life  of  St.  Paul: 

them  written  from  Ephesus,  the  other  while  he  was 
travelling  through  Macedonia),  urgently  required  his 
presence.  On  his  way  he  passed  the  frontiers  of 
Illyricum.  He  remained  in  Corinth  three  months, 
wrote  his  Epistles  to  the  Romans  and  to  the 
Galatians,  and  in  the  spring  of  58  returned,  by  way  of 
Philippi  and  Miletus.  At  Miletus  he  took  leave  of 
the  presbyters  of  Ephesus,  and  with  presentiments  of 
coming  trouble  strongly  upon  him,  he  reached  Jeru 
salem  for  the  feast  of  Pentecost. 

The  remaining  ten  years  of  his  life,  from  58  to  68, 
were  still,  although  in  a  less  active  sense,  missionary. 
True,  he  still  works  on,  but  more  hi  chains.  He  is 
less  in  synagogues,  more  in  law-courts,  in  guard 
houses,  in  dungeons.  His  arrest  at  Jerusalem  in  the 
summer  of  58  was  followed  by  his  long  imprisonment 
at  Caesarea ;  he  was  only  sent  to  Rome  by  Festus  in 
the  late  autumn  of  60,  and  reached  it  in  the  spring  of 
61.  But  he  misses  no  opportunity  of  doing  what  can 
yet  be  done.  Speaking  before  Felix  or  Agrippa,  he 
turns  a  legal  argument  into  a  religious  apology. 
Whether  on  board  the  vessel  which  is  carrying  him 
to  Rome,  or  when  shipwrecked  at  Malta,  or  when 
chained  to  a  soldier  near  the  Praetorian  camp  in  Rome, 
he  is  still  a  missionary.  His  two  years'  imprisonment 
at  Rome  is  devoted  to  work — first  among  his  own 
countrymen,  then  among  the  Gentiles;  and  on  his 
acquittal  he  seems  to  have  spent  four  years,  first  in 


the  Missionary.  101 

Macedonia  and  Asia  Minor ;  then  probably  a  year  or  a 
year  and  a  half  in  Spain ;  then  again  he  is  in  the  East, 
— at  Ephesus  and  at  Nicopolis.  Even  in  his  second 
imprisonment,  when  his  work  was  all  but  done,  he 
could  influence  such  persons  as  Linus,  who  was  to  be 
Bishop  of  Rome;  or  Pudens,  the  son  of  a  senator; 
or  Claudia,  a  British  princess.  But,  speaking  broadly, 
the  last  ten  years  of  his  life  were  spent  more  in  ad 
ministering  and  governing  the  Church  than  in  enlarg 
ing  her  frontiers.  Before,  however,  we  pass  to  this 
side  of  his  work,  it  is  natural  to  ask  the  question, 
What  were  the  qualities  which  made  St.  Paul  the 
first  of  missionaries  ? 

In  answering  this  question,  I  do  not  forget  his 
apostolic  prerogatives.  Ho  could  work  miracles,  and 
command  an  inspiration,  which  might  well  seem  to 
place  him  outside  and  above  the  category  of  all 
ordinary  Christian  missionaries.  And  yet  his  success, 
we  may  be  bold  to  say,  was  largely  duo  to  qualities 
which  any  who  tread  in  his  steps,  at  however  great 
a  distance,  may  share. 

There  are,  among  others,  four  points  to  be  re 
marked  here. 

( i )  St,  Paul  never  for  one  moment  forgets  that  he 
is  uttering  a  Divine  Message,— that  he  is  preaching  a 
Creed,  not  commenting  on  a  philosophy.  His  Creed 
was,  indeed,  as  he  told  the  Corinthians,  the  truest 
philosophy ;  but  then  it  came,  ho  believed,  out  of  no 


IO2  The  Life  of  St.  Paul: 

human  brain,  but  from  the  Mind  and  Heart  of  God. 
Accordingly,  he  proclaims  it,  simply,  unhesitatingly, 
uncompromisingly,  as  a  man  would  do  who  had  no 
doubt  about  its  inherent  power  and  its  ultimate 
success.  St.  Paul,  in  fact,  was  what  would  now  be 
called  a  dogmatist.  Dogmatism  is  very  unbecoming 
in  those  who  can  appeal  only  to  human  authority 
for  what  they  say,  and  who  ought  to  know  that 
they  may  very  possibly  be  mistaken.  But  a  man 
who  believes  himself  to  be  charged  with  a  message 
from  God  to  his  fellow-men  must  be  clear,  positive, 
straightforward  in  his  assertions ;  a  dogmatic  dress  is 
simply  due  to  the  character  of  what  such  a  man 
professes  to  have  to  say.  Men  who  object  to  dog 
matism  in  Christian  teachers  on  account  of  the  claim 
which  it  implies  would  smile  at  the  claim  to  bring 
a  message  from  heaven  in  the  mouth  of  a  declaimer 
against  dogma.  If  St.  Paul  had  preached  Christianity 
as  if  he  was  half  ashamed  of  its  mysteries,  and 
thoroughly  afraid  of  offending  Jewish  or  heathen 
opinion,  he  might  have  got  through  life  more  easily, 
but  he  would  not  have  made  half-a-dozen  converts 
or  roused  the  jealousies  of  a  single  synagogue. 

(2)  St.  Paul  is  disinterested.  He  sought  not  what 
his  converts  could  give  him;  he  sought  themselves. 
And  disinterestedness  is  power,  hi  whatever  cause  it 
may  be  enlisted.  The  Corinthians  and  the  Galatians 
knew  perfectly  well  that  their  great  teacher  had 


the  Missionary.  103 


nothing  to  get  by  them;  they  knew  in  their  better 
moments  that  he  had  given  them  all  that  was  worth 
having  in  life  and  in  death. 

(3)  But  side  by  side  with  this  sincere  and  un 
affected  accent  of  certainty,  and  this  lofty  independ 
ence  of  motive,  St.  Paul  is  capable  of  the  greatest 
consideration  for  the  difficulties  and  prejudices  of 
those  whom  he  is  anxious  to  win.  Strong  men,  like 
strong  systems,  can  afford  to  be  generous;  while 
the  uncertain  or  the  timid  are  almost  necessarily 
suspicious  and  unsympathetic.  Their  own  hold  on 
truth  they  instinctively  feel  is  so  precarious  that 
they  cannot  venture  to  take  liberties;  they  will  be 
suspected  of  vacillation  or  disloyalty  if  they  appear 
to  enter  into  the  difficulties  of  others.  St  Paul  knew 
that  no  weight  of  human  authority,  and  no  ingenuity 
or  strength  of  human  argument,  could  touch  a  truth 
which  ho  had  received,  neither  of  man  nor  by  man, 
but  from  God  and  His  Divine  Son.  But  for  this  very 
reason  he  could  become  all  things  to  all  men,  that  he 
might  by  all  means  win  some.  To  the  Jews  he  became 
as  ft  Jew,  that  he  might  save  the  Jews.  Nothing  in 
his  whole  life  illustrates  this  quality  of  the  tenderness 
of  strength  which  St  Paul  so  remarkably  possessed 
more  strikingly  than  his  circumcision  of  Timothy. 
It  was  in  his  second  missionary  journey,  when  he 
was  carrying  with  him,  and  distributing  to  the  Gentile 
converts  that  decree  of  the  Council  at  Jerusalem 


1 04  The  L  ife  of  St.  Paul : 

which  proclaimed  their  freedom  from  the  Mosaic 
law.  Timothy's  father  was  a  Greek,  his  mother  a 
Jewish  woman;  and  St.  Paul  felt  that  to  be  accom 
panied  by  one  who  was  half  a  Jew,  and  who  professed 
the  Jewish  faith,  yet  was  uncircumcised,  would  be  a 
cause  of  great  offence  in  every  synagogue  he  entered. 
He  therefore  took  and  circumcised  Timothy.  How 
inconsistent,  men  might  exclaim,  how  illogical,  how 
wanting  in  adherence  to  principle !  The  real  question 
always  is,  when  principle  is  and  when  it  is  not  at  stake. 
Paul  could  resist  the  pressure  of  opinion  at  Jerusalem 
when  the  circumcision  of  the  Gentile  Titus  was  said 
to  be  necessary.  He  could  withstand  even  St.  Peter 
to  the  face,  when  deference  to  narrow  Jewish  pre 
judices  was  compromising  the  Faith.  A  man  of  real 
principle  is  not  afraid  that  his  generosity  will  be 
mistaken,  or  that,  if  it  is  mistaken  for  the  moment, 
he  will  in  the  end  be  misunderstood. 

(4)  Once  more,  St.  Paul  is  eager  to  recognise  the 
truth  which  is  already  admitted  by  those  whom  -he 
wishes  to  convince  or  convert.  When  he  makes  war 
upon  the  strongholds  of  religious  error  he  is  not  an 
indiscriminate  destroyer.  Truth — the  truth  which  is 
mingled  with  it — being  the  strength  of  all  error,  the 
Apostle  recognises  such  truth  as  truth ;  he  makes  the 
most  of  it ;  he  shows  how,  rightly  understood,  it  leads 
on  to  the  full,  uncorrupted,  unmutilated  truth  which 
he  is  himself  recommending.  Thus  his  method  on 


the  Missionary.  105 

reaching  a  town  is  always  to  begin  work  at  the 
synagogue,  because  the  synagogue  furnished  him 
with  the  premises  of  his  argument, — with  people  who 
already  believed  what  ought  to  lead  them  on  to 
agreement  with  himself.  He  had  rights  in  the 
synagogue,  too,  which  were  not  yet  formally  can 
celled,  and  he  made  the  most  of  them.  In  the 
synagogue  he  and  his  hearers  were  united  in  a 
common  reverence  for  the  Old  Testament  Scriptures. 
Read  his  sermon  in  the  synagogue  at  Antioch  in 
Pisidia  as  a  sample  of  his  method.  During  the  whole 
of  the  earlier  part  of  the  sermon  every  Jew  present 
must  have  followed  him  entirely.  He  solemnly 
acknowledges  the  God  of  this  people  Israel.  Ho 
traces  God's  Hand  in  Israel's  history  down  to  the 
days  of  David — the  great  days  upon  which  every 
Jew  looked  back  with  enthusiastic  interest.  Then 
he  enlarges  on  David — a  name  so  close  to  the 
sympathies  of  his  audience, — and  then,  at  last,  he 
names  Jesus,  as  David's  promised  Son.  Ho  justifies 
this  by  referring  to  the  ministry  of  the  Baptist  and 
to  the  facts  of  our  Lord's  life.  The  rulers  who 
crucified  Jesus,  he  says,  did  not  really  know  the 
Jewish  prophets,  or  they  would  have  acted  other 
wise.  The  Resurrection  of  Jesus  was  the  fulfilment 
of  God's  promises  to  the  fathers  of  Israel.  It  was  the 
God  of  Israel,  then,  Who  proclaimed  true  righteous 
ness  and  forgiveness  of  sins  through  Jesus ;  and  the 


io6  The  Life  of  St.  Paul: 

sermon  closes  with  a  warning  against  unbelief  which 
is  carefully  conveyed  in  the  familiar  language  of  the 
Jewish  prophets.  The  effect  of  such  a  sermon  was 
to  say,  "You  suppose  Christianity  to  be  altogether 
hostile  to  the  old  faith  of  Israel:  on  the  contrary, 
Christianity  is  its  legitimate  and  necessary  develop 
ment;  it  completes  that  unveiling  of  the  Divine 
Mind  which  the  Jewish  Law  began." 

Or  take  the  most  modern,  as  it  has  been  called,  of 
St.  Paul's  sermons,  that  which  he  pronounced  from 
the  Areopagus  in  Athens.  Here  he  does  not  quote 
Jewish  Scriptures,  of  which  his  hearers  knew  nothing. 
He  had  observed,  he  says,  that  the  Athenians  were 
particularly  religious,  and  that,  in  order  to  be  quite 
safe,  they  even  erected  an  altar  to  some  "  Unknown 
God."  He  is  able,  he  says,  to  tell  them  something 
about  that  God.  They  had  heard  of  One  Being  Who 
was  the  Source  and  Sustainer  of  Universal  Life.  They 
had  been  taught  to  look  at  human  history  as  an 
education  and  discipline  for  some  higher  truth  not 
yet  mastered.  So  far,  they  have  gone  with  the 
preacher;  now  he  passes  the  frontier  of  their  sym 
pathies.  That  all  men  of  all  nations  were  of  one 
blood,  or  that  there  was  One  Who  stood  in  a  uni 
versal  relation  to  all,  Who  would  judge  all,  Who  had 
risen  from  death  to  attest  this  His  mission — this 
was  beyond  them.  Still,  how  skilfully  is  this  further 
step  introduced,  how  tenderly  does  the  Apostle  feel  his 


the  Missionary.  107 


way  from  the  admitted  to  the  unknown ;  and  it  was, 
we  may  be  sure,  but  a  sample  of  his  usual  method 

Yes!  beyond  all  controversy,  Paul  the  Apostle  is 
the  first  of  Christian  missionaries.  All  the  great 
labourers  for  the  extension  of  Christ's  kingdom  in 
later  ages — Boniface  and  Augustine,  Patrick  and 
Columba,  Xavier  and  Martyn — have  breathed  his 
enthusiasm,  have  lived  his  life,  have  accepted  in 
varying  degrees  his  methods,  have  trodden  his  steps. 
Peter,  indeed,  was  first  at  work;  Peter,  in  his  own 
single  person,  was  the  rock  on  whose  personal  exertions 
the  Church  was  to  be  built;  Peter  laid  its  founda 
tions.  And,  as  we  gather  from  somewhat  dim 
traditions,  the  other  Apostles  of  Christ  had  each 
their  appropriate  fields  of  work ;  they  can  have  been 
no  common  efforts  by  which  the  earliest  Syrian 
Churches  were  founded  on  or  beyond  the  frontier 
of  the  Empire.  But  as  compared  with  St.  Paul's 
"more  abundant  labours,"  everything  else  in  the 
apostolic  age  pales  and  fades  away.  He  it  is  who 
is  the  typical  missionary, — the  man  who,  still  almost 
before  our  very  eyes,  with  truth  on  his  lips,  and  a 
burning  love  of  his  fellow-men  and  of  his  God  in 
his  heart,  goes  forth  to  win  a  reluctant  world  to  a 
mysterious  and  exacting  Creed — to  the  only  Creed 
which  could  bring  with  it  the  great  gifts  of  peace 
and  righteousness.  His  example  is  as  energetic  as 
over,  and  he  has  yet  work  to  do  before  the  end. 


io8  The  Life  of  St.  Paul: 


II. 

St.  Paul  was  not  only  a  missionary,  who  laboured 
for  the  extension  of  Christianity ;  he  was  also  a  great 
ruler  and  administrator  of  the  Christian  Church.  He 
had  to  tend,  support,  guide,  govern  the  churches 
which  sprang  into  being  as  he  passed  on  his  way. 
"  The  care  of  all  the  churches  " — "  that  which  cometh 
upon  me  daily"1 — he  represents  as  the  climax  of  his 
trials.  As  an  Apostle,  he  had  responsibilities  towards 
the  whole  Church ;  there  was  no  restriction  of  such 
responsibility  to  particular  cities  or  districts  as  was 
afterwards,  e.g.,  the  case  with  bishops  at  the  close  of 
the  Apostolic  age.  Certainly  there  was  a  general 
arrangement  between  himself  and  the  three  Apostles 
who  were  called  the  "  pillars  of  the  Church,"  that  they 
should  work  among  the  Jews  and  he  among  the 
heathen  nations;  but  his  own  activity  on  his  visits 
to  Jerusalem,  and  the  later  labours  of  St.  Peter  and 
St.  John  in  heathen  lands,  show  that  this  was  not 
understood  to  interfere  with  the  inherent  rights  of 
each  member  of  the  Apostolic  College. 

As  a  great  ruler  in  the  Church,  St.  Paul  had  to 
pronounce  decisions  on  very  various  questions  affect 
ing  Christian  duty;  and  as  he  deals  with  them  we 
must  be  struck  by  the  strength  and  tenderness  of 
that  sympathy  which  was  his  characteristic  gift.  The 

i  2  Cor.  xi.  28. 


the  Church  Ruler.  109 

Church  of  Corinth  was  divided  into  parties,  one  of 
which  made  free  use  of  his  own  name:  he  remonstrates 
tenderly  but  firmly.1  The  Corinthian  women  were 
agitated  by  a  discussion  as  to  what  sort  of  head-dress 
they  should  wear  at  public  worship :  he  goes  into  this 
seemingly  trivial  question  with  the  greatest  patience, 
and  decides,  for  very  weighty  reasons,  which  he  gives, 
that  their  heads  are  to  be  properly  covered.2  A 
Christian  is  guilty  of  an  odious  incest :  St.  Paul  cuts 
him  off  from  the  communion  of  the  Church.8  The 
man  repents:  St.  Paul  orders  his  restoration  to  Church- 
communion.4  Might  people,  it  was  asked,  eat  meat 
which  had  been  offered  for  the  purpose  of  sacrifice  in 
heathen  temples  ?  It  entirely  depends,  St.  Paul  says, 
upon  whether  offence  is  thereby  given  to  weak  Chris 
tians  or  not6  Is  it  well  for  Christians  to  marry  again, 
or  to  marry  at  all  ?  St.  Paul  enters  into  these  questions 
with  the  utmost  minuteness.6  Two  Philippian  ladies, 
Euodias  and  Synt}Tche,  have  a  private  quarrel,  while 
St  Paul  is  in  prison  at  Rome:  he  hears  of  it  and 
sends  them  a  special  message,  desiring  them  to  make 
it  up.7  Onesimus,  a  converted  slave,  wishes  to  return 
to  his  master  Philemon,  whom  ho  had  injured  and 
deserted :  St.  Paul  gives  him  a  letter  of  recommen 
dation,  full  of  the  most  delicate  consideration  for 
Philemon's  own  feelings  and  position,  as  well  as  for 

1 1  Cor.  L  10-17.         *  /*•  *'•  5  i>          *  /*'  *•  i-S-          *  »  Cor.  ii.  10. 
•  i  Cor.  Ttii.  1-13.  •  lb.  ril.  1-40.  '  Phil.  I?.  2. 


1 1  o  The  Life  of  St.  Paul : 

that  of  his  own  later  convert.1  The  Holy  Communion 
was  profaned  at  Corinth  through  the  proceedings  at 
a  love-feast  which  preceded  it :  St.  Paul  uses  language 
of  stern  severity,  and  adjourns  the  discussion  of  details 
until  his  arrival.2  The  last  chapter  of  the  Epistle  to 
the  Romans  has  sometimes  been  described  as  a  "  mere 
list  of  names."  Its  value  and  interest  are  of  the 
highest  order ;  it  shows  how  true  and  discriminating 
was  the  Apostle's  care  even  of  the  individual  members 
of  the  several  flocks  that  were  under  his  jurisdiction. 

Besides  these  questions  of  conduct,  St.  Paul  had  a 
great  deal  of  purely  ecclesiastical  business  on  his 
hands.  In  the  Epistles  to  Timothy  and  Titus  we  see 
him  organising  the  Christian  clergy,  making  rules  for 
then:  lives  and  provision  for  their  sustenance,  insist 
ing  too  that  their  wives  are  to  be  persons  of  ascer 
tained  Christian  character.  He  gives  Timothy  full 
instructions  for  creating  an  order  of  widows,  devoted 
to  charitable  works.  Indeed,  nothing  was  nearer  his 
heart  than  making  Christian  faith  useful  and  fruitful 
for  the  purpose  of  relieving  human  want  and  suffer 
ing.  If  the  Body  was  one,  he  argued,  its  members 
had  duties  towards  each  other.  One  of  the  persistent 
efforts  of  his  life,  again  and  again  referred  to,  was  to 
raise  money  among  the  wealthier  Christians  of  Gentile 
or  Hellenistic  origin,  in  order  to  support  the  poverty- 
stricken  populations  in  and  about  Jerusalem. 

J  Philera.  10-21.  2  i  Cor.  xi.  20-34. 


the  Church  Ruler.  1 1 1 

But  the  duties  of  the  Apostle  towards  the  faith  and 
knowledge  of  the  infant  Church  were  even  more 
exacting  than  his  duties  towards  its  organisation  and 
conduct.  Everywhere  there  were  sides  of  truth  to  be 
elucidated  or  insisted  on;  misapprehensions  to  be 
removed;  errors  to  be  rebuked.  Each  church,  it 
might  almost  be  said,  had  its  particular  misapprehen 
sion  of  the  Apostle's  teaching.  At  Thessalonica  what 
St.  Paul  had  said  about  Christ's  second  coming  was 
exaggerated  into  a  reason  for  neglecting  all  ordinary 
duties.  In  the  Galatian  churches  some  false  teachers 
were  persuading  the  majority  that  it  was  necessary  to 
observe  the  Jewish  festivals  and  fasts,  to  be  circum 
cised,  and  in  fact  to  be  good  Jews  as  well  as  or  before 
being  good  Christians.  At  Corinth  the  cardinal  doc 
trine  of  the  Resurrection  was  denied  because  of  the 
difficulty  of  giving  an  adequate  physical  explanation 
of  it  At  Colossse  a  strange  mixture  of  Jewish 
cabbalistic  rules  and  of  Greek  modes  of  thinking 
had  produced  a  theosophy  which,  while  retaining 
Christian  phraseology,  dethroned  Christ  in  the  Chris 
tian  heart  At  Ephesus,  hi  the  later  apostolic  age, 
there  must  have  been  some  of  those  attempts  to 
make  capital  out  of  Christianity  with  a  view  to 
framing  theories  about  the  universe  and  human  life 
which,  under  the  name  of  Gnosticism,  abounded  so 
largely  in  the  following  century,  and  the  germs  of 
which  are  so  plainly  discoverable  in  this.  At  Alex- 


H2  The  Life  of  St.  Paul  : 

andria — if,  as  is  probable,  the  Epistle  to  the  Hebrews 
was  addressed,  at  St.  Paul's  instance  or  dictation,  to 
Christians  in  that  city — there  was  a  disposition  to  fall 
back  altogether  to  Judaism. 

It  is  in  St.  Paul's  Epistles  that  we  see  him  at  work  in 
this  vast  field  of  labour;  and  if  they  had  not  a  far 
higher  claim  upon  our  attention,  the  purely  literary 
interest  of  these  Epistles  would  be  simply  exhaustless. 
They  are  probably  only  a  portion  of  the  Letters  which 
he  actually  wrote, — preserved,  because  instinctively 
received  by  the  Apostolical  Church  into  the  Sacred 
Canon,  while  the  others  have  perished.  They  were 
written  amid  the  distractions  of  a  life  of  ceaseless 
effort  and  ceaseless  struggle.  It  was  in  the  midst  of 
the  mission  at  Corinth  in  52  and  53,  where  Jewish 
passion  and  heathen  impurity  gave  him  so  much  to 
think  about,  that  he  wrote  the  two  Letters  to  the 
Thessalonians.  It  was  at  the  close  of  his  three  years' 
sojourn  in  Ephesus — so  rich  in  its  results,  so  serious  in 
the  proof  it  had  given  of  the  vehemence  of  popular  pas 
sions — that  he  wrote  his  first  Letter  to  the  Corinthians. 
It  was  while  travelling  through  Macedonia  that  he 
wrote  the  second  Letter  to  Corinth ;  at  Corinth,  hi  the 
midst  of  absorbing  preoccupations,  he  found  time  to 
write  the  great  Epistle  to  the  Romans — in  itself  a 
great  doctrinal  treatise — and  the  brief,  vivid  remon 
strance  to  the  Galatians.  A  prisoner  at  Rome,  he 
seized  the  opportunity  of  writing  not  merely  the 


the  Church  Ruler.  1  1  3 

circular  Epistle  to  the  Church  of  Ephesus  and  some 
other  churches,  but  also  those  to  the  Colossians  and 
Philemon,  and  later  —  the  tenderest  of  all  his  Epistles 
—that  to  the  Philippians.  He  was  again  engaged  in 
missions  when  he  wrote  to  Titus  and  the  first  time  to 
Timothy  ;  when  he  wrote  his  last  Letter  to  Timothy 
he  was  in  prison,  and  in  full  view  of  the  now  inevit 
able  end. 

While  the  division  of  our  Bibles  into  chapters  and 
verses  has  great  practical  recommendations,  it  has  also 
some  drawbacks,  and  they  are  nowhere  more  obvious 
than  in  reading  the  Epistles  of  St.  Paul.  Unlike  St. 
John,  his  style  does  not  always  lend  itself  readily  to 
this  minute  subdivision,  and  each  of  his  Epistles  is,  as 
a  rule,  like  its  several  paragraphs,  an  organically  con 
nected  whole.  In  order  to  enjoy,  if  not  to  understand 
him,  it  is  well  occasionally,  after  reminding  ourselves 
of  the  CMf""™^-*^^  under  which  an 


written,  to  read  it  through  at  a  sitting.  In  this  way 
the  force  and  relative  subordinationof  the  arguments, 
the  drift  of  the  incidental  observations,  the  varied 
play  of  exhortation,  remonstrance,  irony,  aftectionate- 
ness,  become  obvious  ;  we  are  no  longer  dealing  with 
disconnected  fragments,  but  with  a  complete  composi 
tion  which  speaks  for  itself. 

Amid  all  the  distractions  of  our  own  day,  it  is 
almost  consolatory  to  reflect  that  the  Apostolic 
Church  itself  was  disturbed  by  serious  controversies, 

ii 


1 14  The  Life  of  St.  Paul : 

controversies  which  ran  up  into  offensive  personalities, 
and  which  were  at  times,  as  at  Corinth  and  in  Galatia, 
conducted  with  much  bitterness. 

The  greatest  controversy  in  which  St.  Paul  was 
engaged  within  the  Church  turned  upon  the  question 
whether  the  Jewish  observances,  circumcision  in  par 
ticular,  were  necessary.  A  large  party  of  Christians, 
whose  centre  was  Jerusalem,  who  were  probably  in 
fluenced  by  the  current  opinions  in  the  school  of 
Shammai,  and  who  made  free  use  of  the  names  of 
the  Apostles  Peter,  James,  and  John,  maintained  that 
they  were.  To  these  men  St.  Paul's  work  appeared 
radically  revolutionary:  and  when  they  could,  they 
went  over,  as  in  Galatia,  the  ground  he  had  evangelised, 
insisting  that  if  the  Gentile  converts  would  be  really 
good  Christians  they  must  be  circumcised.  St.  Paul 
maintained  that  while,  if  a  man  happened  to  be  circum 
cised,  it  did  him  no  harm,  to  insist  upon  circumcision 
as  necessary  was  to  deny  fundamental  Christian  truth. 
For  there  were  two  questions  of  the  gravest  import 
ance  which  really  were  involved  in  this  apparent  trifle, 
(i)  Was  the  Work  of  Christ,  as  the  Restorer  of  man 
to  a  state  of  righteousness  before  God,  complete  in  itself, 
or  was  it  merely  a  supplement  to  the  Jewish  Creed  ? 
Was  the  system  of  the  Jewish  law  really  able  to  make 
men  righteous ;  and  if  it  was,  where  was  the  need  of 
the  Work  of  Christ  ?  If  this  were  the  case,  moreover, 
was  it  conceivable  that  Christ  was  greater  than  Moses 


the  Church  Ruler.  1 1 5 

and  the  Prophets,  in  His  Essential  Nature?  The 
Judaising  theory  that  the  law  was  still  obligatory 
meant  at  bottom  that  Christ's  Work  was  not  really 
complete,  and  so  that  His  Person  was  in  reality  only 
human.  (2)  And  a  second  question  was,  Was  Chris 
tianity  meant  to  be  the  religion  of  mankind,  or  only 
of  a  small  subdivision  of  the  Jewish  world  ?  Was  it, 
in  later  language,  to  be  merely  national,  or  was  it  to 
be  catholic  ?  If  Christianity  was  serious  in  claiming 
to  be  the  true,  the  absolute  religion,  it  could  not  but 
also  claim  to  be  universal ;  the  two  claims,  men 
instinctively  felt,  went  together.  In  resisting  cir 
cumcision,  then,  St.  Paul  was  contending  not  merely 
for  the  Divine  dignity  of  his  Master,  but  for  the 
world-embracing  character  of  the  new  kingdom,  in 
which  there  was  to  be  "  neither  Jew  nor  Gentile,  bar 
barian  nor  Scythian,  bond  nor  free,"  but  all  were  to 
be  one. 

St.  Paul  has  indeed  been  said  by  a  distinguished 
writer  against  Christianity  to  have  been  its  real  author ; 
to  have  changed  it  from  a  moral  sentiment  to  a  dog 
matic  creed;  to  have  invested  the  Person  of  its 
Founder  with  a  rank  which  He  never  would  have 
claimed :  and  to  have  given  the  new  religion  a  world 
wide  extension  which  was  not  at  all  contemplated  by 
the  Prophet  of  Nazareth.  It  is  instructive  to  compare 
this  idea  of  St  Paul's  work  with  that  which,  proceed 
ing  from  the  same  school,  represents  it  as  practically 


1 1 6  The  Life  of  St.  Paul : 

a  failure;  the  Judaising  tendency  having,  it  is  con 
tended,  successfully  asserted  itself  in  the  second 
century,  in  the  ordinances  of  the  Christian  Church,  and 
the  prevalent  conception  of  the  Christian  life.  The 
two  ideas  might  be  well  left  to  neutralise  each  other. 
In  fact,  St.  Paul  taught  what  Christ  had  taught,  only  in 
different  terms,  and  with  application  to  new  circum 
stances.  Our  Lord  had  said  that  in  the  coming  time 
the  Father  would  be  worshipped  neither  on  the 
Samaritan  mountain  nor  in  Jerusalem.  He  had 
ruled  that  man  is  not  denied  by  what  he  eats ;  He  had 
called  Himself  Master  of  the  Sabbath, — an  unpardon 
able  assumption  in  Jewish  eyes.  The  Lord  made  claims 
upon  the  love,  trust,  obedience,  reverence  of  men, 
which  could  only  be  justified  if  He  was  what  St.  Paul 
taught.  He  had  told  his  followers  to  preach  among 
and  baptize,  not  Jews  only,  but  all  the  nations.  St. 
Paul  insisted  on  these  features  of  our  Lord's  teaching 
at  a  critical  point  in  the  history  of  the  Apostolic 
Church, — that  was  all  Nor  was  his  work  in  vain.  The 
greatest  minds  hi  Christendom  are  his  direct  creations. 
It  is  from  Paul  that  Augustine  learns  the  doctrines  of 
grace  of  which  he  was  so  great  a  master.  It  is  from 
Paul  that  Chrysostom  imbibes  his  vivid  sense  of  the 
range  and  applicability  of  Christian  morals.  It  is  at 
the  feet  of  St.  Paul,  not  less  than  at  those  of  St.  John, 
that  Athanasius  discerns  what  was  really  meant  by 
the  Incarnation  of  the  Son  of  God. 


the  Martyr.  1 1 7 


He  was  caricatured  by  Marcion ;  he  has  been  abun 
dantly  misrepresented  by  modern  antinomian  systems 
of  divinity ;  but  these  teachers  pass,  and  are  forgotten 
— St.  Paul  remains.  If,  as  at  the  first,  there  are  in 
his  writings  not  a  few  "  things  hard  to  be  understood, 
which  they  that  are  unlearned  and  unstable  wrest  to 
their  destruction,"1  this  does  not  obscure  the  glory  of 
the  Apostle  of  the  Nations,  or  render  him  responsible 
for  inferences  from  or  paraphrases  of  his  words  which 
he  would  have  eagerly  disavowed. 

III. 

In  all  ages  Truth  has  demanded  sacrifices.  And 
no  man  ever  lived  who  understood  better  than  St. 
Paul  the  power  and  fruitfulness  of  sacrifice  as  a  means 
of  advancing  the  cause  whether  of  truth  or  goodness. 
He  must  therefore  have  seen  from  the  first  that  his 
martyrdom  lay  in  the  nature  of  things, — a  sufficient 
presentiment  of  the  end.  In  the  course  of  discharging 
his  duties  he  was  again  and  again  close  to  death.  He 
gives  the  Corinthians  a  list  of  the  dangers  which,  even 
before  the  year  57,  ho  had  had  to  encounter ;  and  he 
explains  to  the  Philippians,  when  imprisoned  for  the  first 
time  in  Rome,  that  he  already  looked  upon  death  as 
gain.  It  would  seem  that  he  must  have  been  arrested 
at  Nicopolis  late  in  the  autumn  of  67,  and  sent,  pro- 

»  a  St.  Peter  iii.  16. 


1 1 8  The  Life  of  St.  Paul : 

bably  by  the  decemvirs,  to  Rome  for  trial  as  soon  as 
it  was  safe  to  cross  the  Adriatic.  For  since  St.  Paul's 
release  in  63,  events  had  occurred  which  made  a  Chris 
tian's  position  much  more  insecure.  After  the  great 
fire  in  Rome  in  the  summer  of  64  the  Emperor  Nero 
endeavoured  to  divert  the  popular  indignation  of 
which  he  was  the  object,  by  turning  it  upon  the  Chris 
tians.  The  Pagan  historian  Tacitus  has  described  the 
atrocities  of  this  first  persecution  of  the  Church, — how 
some  Christians  were  crucified,  some  dressed  in  the 
skins  of  wild  beasts  and  hunted  to  death  with  dogs, 
some  clothed  in  dresses  of  inflammable  materials  and 
set  on  fire  at  night  to  illuminate  the  Imperial  gardens. 
This  was  three  years  before  the  arrest.  St.  Paul  was 
well  out  of  the  way  when  it  happened,  but  the  name 
of  so  noted  a  leader  of  the  Christians  would  now  have 
been  known  to  the  Roman  police,  and  they  would 
have  been  on  the  look-out  for  him.  Probably  he 
reached  Rome  by  way  of  Brundusium  early  in  68,  and 
his  case  would  have  soon  come  on  for  trial  before  the 
city  Prefect,  to  whom  the  Emperor  delegated  causes 
of  this  kind :  he  would  have  been  tried  in  one  of  the 
great  basilicas  or  law-courts  which  abutted  on  the 
Forum.  The  tragic  interest  of  the  Second  Epistle  to 
Timothy  consists  in  its  belonging  to  these  the  closing 
months  of  his  life.  It  was  written  when  his  case  had 
been  brought  into  court  for  the  first  time,  and  he  had 
been  acquitted  on  the  first  charge  against  him, — very 


the  Martyr.  1 1 9 


probably  that  of  being  concerned  in  the  burning  of 
Rome.  He  says  that  on  that  occasion  no  one  stood 
by  him,  whether  as  patron  or  as  advocate :  he  had  to 
plead  his  cause  alone.  And  yet  he  was  not  alone ;  he 
was  more  than  ever  conscious  of  the  strengthening 
presence  of  our  Lord : — but  for  this,  the  isolation  of 
those  last  months  would  have  been  unbearable.  Demas 
had  forsaken  him  for  worldly  motives:  Crescens, 
for  some  unnamed  reason,  had  gone  into  Galatia :  even 
Titus — we  cannot  suppose  through  cowardice — had 
left  for  Dalmatia :  only  Luke  remained.  He  longed 
to  see  Timothy  once  more  before  he  died:  but  ho 
knew  that  the  end  was  near,  and  it  is  impossible  to 
siiy  whether  his  wish  was  granted.  The  second  charge 
against  him,  probably  that  of  introducing  a  religion 
unrecognised  by  the  State,  would  no  doubt  have  gone 
against  him;  but  he  could  die  as  a  Roman  citizen. 
There  is  no  serious  critical  reason  for  rejecting  the 
ordinary  account  of  his  martyrdom :  he  was  beheaded 
outside  the  gate  of  Rome  which  looks  towards  the 
port  at  the  mouth  of  the  Tiber,  and  which  is  now 
called  the  Gate  of  St.  Paul  A  splendid  church,  first 
erected  by  the  Emperor  Constantino,  and  lately  rebuilt 
after  the  great  fire  of  1824,  marks  the  neighbourhood, 
at  any  rate,  of  the  spot  on  which  Paul  of  Tarsus 
pMBed  to  receive,  as  he  believed,  a  crown  of  right 
eousness.  But  his  enduring  monument  at  this 
moment,  and  to  the  end  of  time,  will  be  his  great  un- 


I2O     T/ie  Life  of  St.  Paul:  the  Martyr. 


rivalled  place  in  the  Sacred  Canon,  and  the  gratitude 
of  millions  of  hearts,  to  whom  he  is  the  incessant 
minister  of  a  Truth  whereby  the  two  deepest  longings 
of  the  human  soul  may  be  satisfied, — the  longing  to  be 
inwardly  righteous,  and  the  longing  for  a  true  inward 
peace. 


DANTE  AND   AQUINAS.1 

PART  I. 

more  distinguished  Christian  writers  of  post- 
apostolic  date  who  have  contributed  to  the 
Commedia  of  Dante,  with  very  varying  result,  are 
easily  enumerated.  The  East,  so  rich  in  speculative 
thought,  is  mainly  and  oddly  represented  by  the 
fifth-century  author  who  passes  as  Dionysius  the 
Areopagite;  the  West,  by  St.  Augustine,  by  St. 
Gregory  the  Great,  by  the  accomplished  and  unfor 
tunate  Boethius ;  in  a  less  degree,  and  in  times  nearer 
to  Dante,  by  Isidore  of  Seville,  by  the  Venerable  Bede, 
by  Rabanus  Maurus.  Among  literary  and  moral  in 
fluences  yet  more  recent  and  more  powerful  were 
St.  Anselm,  Peter  Lombard,  the  two  St.  Victors,  and 
eminently  St.  Bernard.  The  opening  fourteenth 
century  contributes  nothing;  we  seek  in  vain  for 
distinct  traces  of  Roger  Bacon,  of  Duns  Scotus,  of 
Occam.  But  in  the  very  foreground  of  Dante's  view 
are  two  figures  of  commanding  prominence,  each  of 
whom  represented  a  philosophical  as  well  as  a  religious 
tendency,  each  of  whom  was  the  typical  man  of  a 
monastic  order  in  the  early  days  of  its  fresh,  creative  and 

1  Thin  Paper  was  read  before  the  Oxford  Dante  Society,  June  7,  1881. 

121 


122  Dante  and  Aquinas. 

reforming  power.  These  are  the  Platonising  Franciscan 
St.  Bonaventure,  and  the  Aristotelian  Dominican  St. 
Thomas  Aquinas.  The  former  might  well  engage  our 
attention,  but  our  present  concern  is  with  the  latter. 

Thomas  Aquinas  was  born  at  the  Castle  of  Rocca 
Secca,  which  belonged  to  his  family,  and  in  the  year 
1226.  His  father  was  Landulph,  Count  of  Aquino, 
and  Lord  of  Loretto  and  Belcastro.  His  grandfather, 
Thomas  of  Aquino,  had  married  Francesca,  sister  of 
the  Emperor  Frederic  Barbarossa ;  his  mother  was  a 
Norman  princess.  Whether  the  alleged  predictions 
of  his  greatness  before  his  birth  were  or  were  not 
an  afterthought  begotten  of  the  enthusiasm  of  his 
biographer,  it  is  certain  that  he  gave  early  proof  of 
high  mental  powers  and  of  commanding  character. 
When  five  years  of  age  he  was  sent  to  the  Benedictine 
School  at  Monte-Cassino,  and  his  master  there  passed 
him  on  in  the  course  of  a  year  or  two  to  the  University 
of  Naples,  which  had  been  founded  by  Frederic  n. 
just  eight  years  before.  At  Naples,  Aquinas  remained 
until  1 243,  when  his  studies  were  approaching  com 
pletion,  and  at  the  age  of  seventeen  he  suddenly 
entered  the  Order  of  St.  Dominic. 

The  Dominican  Order  was  just  twenty-six  years 
old;  its  founder — born  1170,  died  1221 — had  been 
canonised  nine  years  before  by  Gregory  ix.,1  and  its 

1  "  1'  amoroso  drudo 
Delia  fede  cristiana,  il  santo  atleta, 
Benigno  ai  suoi,  ed  ai  nemici  crudo." — Par.  xii.  55-57. 


Dante  and  Aqu  inas.  123 

third  General,  Raimond  de  Pennafort,  had  quite 
recently,  in  1238,  given  it  its  final  form  as  a  monastic 
and  preaching  institute.  Still,  it  was  struggling  for 
a  position  which  its  earlier  success  had  seemed  to 
bring  within  its  reach ;  and,  as  was  perhaps  almost 
inevitable,  its  then  rulers  have  been  accused  of  making 
undue  efforts  to  enlist  in  its  ranks  a  young  student 
of  noble  birth  and  high  intellectual  promise.  Thomas 
was  hardly  the  man  to  do  or  leave  undone  anything 
of  this  kind  under  mere  pressure  from  others.  His 
course  was  probably  determined,  partly  by  a  desire 
to  escape  from  the  ordinary  civil  life  of  Italy,  corrupted 
as  it  had  been  by  the  wars  of  Frederic  n.,  and  partly 
by  the  high  moral  standard  of  the  Order  in  these 
days  of  its  first  enthusiasm. 

"  Io  fui  degli  agni  della  santa  greggia, 
Che  Domenico  mcna  per  cammino, 
U'  ben  s'impingua  so  non  si  vaneggia."1 

But  it  may  also  be  conjectured  that  a  mind  like 
that  of  Thomas  would  have  been  especially  attracted 
by  the  great  German  Dominican,  Albrecht  von 
Lauingen,  the  fame  of  whose  knowledge  had  reached 
every  University  in  Europe  some  years  before.  Albert 
was  now  fifty  years  of  age,  and  at  the  height  of  his 
reputation.  Sixteen  years  hence  he  will  be  forced  by 
Pope  Alexander  iv.  to  accept  the  bishopric  of  Kegens- 

1  Par.  x.  94-96. 


124  Dante  and  Aquinas. 

burg,  only  to  resign  it  after  the  proved  discomforts  of 
a  two  years'  incumbency,  and  then  to  spend  eighteen 
years  more  in  his  beloved  Cologne,  before  his  death 
in  1280.  Dante,  it  will  be  remembered,  places  this 
great  teacher  in  the  fourth  heaven — in  that  wreath 
of  blessed  spirits  to  which  Albert's  pupil  Aquinas 
also  belonged, — a  position  which  would  not  have  been 
refused  him,  at  any  rate  by  Neander,  always  equitable 
in  his  treatment  of  the  scholastics,  if  not  always 
profound.  "  The  great  mind  of  Albert,"  says  Neander, 
"  grasped  the  whole  compass  of  human  knowledge  as 
it  existed  in  his  time.  He  abounded  in  profound, 
suggestive  ideas,  with  which  he  fertilised  the  minds 
of  his  contemporaries,  and  hi  far-reaching  anticipa 
tions  of  truth." l  The  best  modern  authority  on  the 
scholastic  philosophy  goes  still  further,  and  complains 
of  the  injustice  of  posterity  in  having  connected  the 
name  of  Thomas  rather  than  that  of  Albert  with  the 
distinctive  teaching  of  the  Dominican  school.2 

But  whatever  the  governing  attraction,  Thomas  had 
made  up  his  mind.  His  mother  wished  to  see  him 
before  he  left  her  for  life ;  but  the  interview  was  pre 
vented,  probably  from  a  fear  lest  recent  resolutions 
should  yield  to  the  stress  of  natural  feeling.  But 
Thomas's  soldier-brothers,  who  were  highly-placed 
officers  in  Frederic's  army,  made  themselves  masters 

1  Kirchen-Geschichte,  Periode  5,  §  4. 

*  Haur^au,  De  la  Philosophic  Scholastique,  p.  104. 


Dante  and  Aquinas.  1 2  5 

of  his  person,  and,  in  the  hope  of  breaking  his  will, 
they  shut  him  up  in  a  castle  for  two  years.  He  spent 
his  confinement  in  studying  the  Bible  and  the  Master 
of  the  Sentences ;  and  his  mother,  at  last  convinced 
that  he  must  follow  what  he  believed  to  be  the 
Will  of  God,  herself  assisted  him  to  escape.  The 
Dominicans  sent  him  first  to  Paris,  on  his  road  to 
Cologne ;  and  there,  under  the  guidance  of  Albert,  he 
entered  upon  the  full  range  of  those  studies  which 
made  him  what  he  has  been  to  Western  Christendom 
His  silent  habits  gained  him,  from  his  German 
companions,  the  nickname  of  the  "dumb  ox;"  but 
Albert  early  ventured  the  famous  prediction,  "  We  call 
him  a  dumb  ox,  but  he  will  turn  out  a  teacher  whose 
voice  will  be  heard  throughout  the  whole  world." 
His  lectures  on  the  Categories  and  the  Sentences  were 
received  with  the  greatest  enthusiasm.  Albert  him 
self  was  at  times  rhetorical;  he  enjoyed  the  swing 
and  pomp  of  abounding  language:  Thomas  was 
rigidly  severe  and  simple,  never  uttering  a  word 
which  was  not  wanted  to  complete  his  meaning. 
It  was  at  this  early  period  of  his  career — probably 
in  disputes  with  the  more  enterprising  Franciscans — 
that  Thomas  brought  his  logic  to  such  perfection. 
None  of  his  contemporaries  could  propose  a  dilemma 
or  arrange  the  terms  of  a  syllogism  with  such  decisive 
effect  But  at  the  bottom,  both  of  his  language  and 
of  his  logic,  was  an  intellectual  caution,  which  Danto 


126  Dante  and  Aquinas. 

makes  him  enforce,  after  resolving  his  own  doubts, 
in  the  1 3th  Canto  of  the  Paradiso : — 

"  E  questo  ti  sia  sempre  piombo  ai  piedi, 
Per  farti  mover  lento,  com'  uom  lasso  ; 
Ed  al  si  ed  al  no,  che  tu  non  vedi ; 
Che  quegli  e  tra  gli  stolti  bene  abbasso, 
Che  senza  distinzion  afferma  o  nega, 
Nell'  un  cosl  come  nell'  altro  passo." 

And  then  he  gives  the  characteristic  reason  : — 

"  Perch'  egl'  incontra  che  piu  volte  piega 
L'  opinion  corrente  in  falsa  parte, 
E  poi  1'  affetto  lo  intelletto  lega. " l 

Thomas  spent  his  time  between  Cologne  and 
Paris,  lecturing  to  crowded  audiences  of  applauding 
students,  and,  like  some  modern  German  professors, 
being  drawn  by  his  reputation  away  from  his  studies 
into  the  vortex  of  contemporary  politics.  The  well- 
known  story  of  his  behaviour  at  the  table  of  Louis  ix. 
belongs  to  a  later  period  of  his  life,  while  he  was 
engaged  upon  the  Summa.  The  king  set  much 
store  on  his  opinion  respecting  affairs  of  state,  and 
had  asked  him  as  well  as  the  prior  to  dinner.  For 
getting  where  he  was,  and  absorbed  in  his  own  world 
of  thought,  Thomas  suddenly  struck  with  his  fist  on 
the  royal  table,  exclaiming,  "Then  the  Manichoeans 
are  done  for ! "  The  prior,  who  sat  by,  was  shocked, 
and  seized  his  arm,  and  Thomas  at  once  made  a  pro 
fuse  apology  to  the  king  for  his  unintended  rudeness. 

1  Par.  xiii.  113-120. 


Dante  and  Aquinas.  127 

Louis,  however,  was  much  edified,  and  forthwith  sent 
for  a  scribe,  who  took  down  from  Thomas's  mouth 
all  that  had  been  passing  through  his  mind.  But 
Thomas's  aptitude  for  public  affairs  did  not  always 
help  him  in  other  matters.  The  Dominicans  naturally 
enlisted  his  services  to  plead  the  cause  of  the  Order 
at  Rome;  and  as  the  feeling  of  the  University  of 
Paris  against  the  mendicant  friars  was  exceedingly 
strong,  Thomas,  notwithstanding  his  conspicuous  ac 
complishments,  was  for  some  time  refused  his  doctor's 
degree.  It  was  granted  him  in  1256. 

In  the  eighteen  years  which  followed,  and  which 
were  spent  mainly  in  Italy,  Thomas  produced  all  his 
great  works — the  Summa,  the  apologetical  work 
Contra  Gentiles,  the  Commentary  on  the  Sentences, 
the  Commentary  on  St.  Paul's  Epistles,  and  several 
of  the  Opuscwla.  Notwithstanding  his  lectures,  his 
sermons,  his  relations  with  public  men,  his  journeys 
between  Paris  and  the  south  of  Italy,  he  found  time 
to  produce  works  which  are  remarkable  less  for  their 
vast  extent1  than  for  their  compressed  thought; 
and  his  biographer,  William  of  Thoco,  observes  with 
justice,  "Unum  videtur  Deus  in  dicto  doctore  dum 
viveret  manifestum  ostendisso  miraculum,  ut  tarn 
modico  tempore,  forte  in  viginti  annis,  qui  inter 
magisterium  ejus  et  obitum  in  vita  fluxerunt,  bis 

1  In  the  last  edition,  published  at  Parma,  1852-1873,  they  fill  twenty 
five  volumes  quarto. 


128  Dante  and  Aquinas. 

eundo  Parisios  et  in  Italiam  redeundo,  tot  potuerit 
libros  per  suos  scriptores  in  scriptis  redigere."  l  Like 
the  late  Dr.  Neale,  he  could  dictate  on  different 
subjects  to  three  or  four  amanuenses  at  once;  and 
the  terseness  of  his  style  makes  this  feat,  hi  any 
case  remarkable,  simply  astonishing. 

It  was  shortly  after  his  doctorate  that  Thomas  com 
posed  his  Summa  contra  Gentiles,  at  the  desire  of 
the  General  of  his  Order,  Raimond  de  Pennafort, 
who  in  his  old  age  was  almost  exclusively  interested 
in  the  conversion  of  the  Jews  and  Moors  in  Spain. 
While  this  work  is  less  generally  known,  except  to 
divines,  than  his  Summa  Theologice,  it  is  at  once, 
owing  to  its  method,  pleasanter  reading,  and  far 
more  likely  to  interest  a  modern  reader.  The  nature 
of  his  task  obliged  the  writer  to  fall  back  upon 
premises  which  would  be  admitted  by  those  who 
had  least  in  common  with  his  faith ;  and  the  sentence, 
"  Unde  necesse  est  ad  naturalem  rationem  recurrere 
cui  omnes  assentire  coguntur,"  which  might  have 
been  written  by  Toland  or  Chubb,  is  the  key-note 
of  the  most  striking  part  of  this  great  work.  Of 
course,  he  is  careful  to  state  that  there  are  truths 
internal  to  Revelation  which  Reason  could  never  have 
reached  separately,  though  she  can  marshal  and  do 
justice  to  the  presumptions  which  warrant  us  in 
receiving  Revelation  as  a  whole;  and  accordingly 


Dante  and  Aquinas.  1 29 

while  he  undertakes  to  demonstrate,  by  proofs  which 
appeal  to  reason,  the  Being  and  the  Unity  of  God, 
he  contents  himself  with  showing  that  "veritates 
rationem  excedentes,"  such  as  the  doctrine  of  the 
Trinity,  are  not  contrary  to,  though  they  are  above, 
reason.  Dante  seems  to  be  thinking  of  this  part 
of  Aquinas's  work  when,  at  the  foot  of  the  Hill  of 
Purgatory,  Virgil  comments  on  the  fact  that  only 
Dante's  body  casts  a  shadow  :— 

"  Matto  e  chi  spera  che  nostra  ragione 
Possa  trascorrer  la  infinita  via, 
Che  ticne  una  sustanzia  in  trc  persone. 
State  contenti,  umana  gente,  al  quia ; 
Che,  se  potuto  aveste  veder  tutto, 
Meatier  non  era  partorir  Maria." l 

In  1261,  Thomas  was  summoned  to  Rome  by 
Urban  iv.,  who  was  anxious  to  make  him  a  Cardinal. 
Thomas  escaped  from  this  splendid  infliction  by  con 
senting  to  be  Master  of  the  Palace, — a  position  which 
involved  less  ecclesiastical  dignity,  while  it  had  the 
practical  advantage  of  giving  him  access  at  pleasure 
to  the  Pope's  presence.  He  had  now  reached  the 
busiest  period  of  his  life,  since  to  his  literary  labours, 
which  do  not  seem  to  have  been  interrupted  or  even 
lessened,  was  superadded  a  new  mass  of  work  con 
nected  with  his  Order,  with  the  Church  at  large,  and 
with  contemporary  politics.  Thus  we  find  him  assist 
ing  at  the  General  Chapter  of  the  Order  in  1263, 

1  Purg.  iii.  34-39 ;  cf.  Pwrg.  xxxiiL  85. 

I 


130  Dante  and  Aquinas. 

and  engaged  in  a  great  effort  to  re-establish  the 
discipline,  the  loss  of  which  Dante  makes  him 
deplore.  Already  the  flock  of  St.  Dominic  was 
wandering  to  a  great  distance  from  the  spirit  and 
institute  of  its  Shepherd : — 

"  Ma  il  suo  peculio  di  nuova  vivanda 

E  fatto  ghiotto  si,  ch'  esser  non  puote 
Che  per  diversi  salti  non  si  spanda  ; 
E  quanto  le  sue  pecore  remote 
E  vagabonde  piu  da  esso  vanno, 
Piil  tornano  all'  ovil  di  latte  vote." 

In  what  follows  Dante  may  be  thinking  of  the  con 
dition  of  things  half  a  century  later : — 

"  Ben  son  di  quelle  che  temono  il  danno, 
E  stringonsi  al  pastor ;  ma  son  si  poche, 
Che  le  cappe  f ornisce  poco  panno. " l 

Urban  iv.  died  in  1264;  but  Thomas  appears  to  have 
been  on  the  same  terms  of  confidence  and  intimacy 
with  his  successor  Clement  iv.  Clement  named  him 
to  the  Archbishopric  of  Naples;  the  Bull  of  his 
appointment  was  made  out,  but,  at  the  last  moment, 
in  deference  to  the  distress  which  Thomas  experi 
enced,  when  resistance  was  impossible,  it  was  with 
drawn.  Thomas  now  gave  himself  to  his  most 
extensive  work,  the  Summa  Theologian  \  from  1265 
until  his  death  in  1 274,  he  devoted  all  his  spare  time 
to  it.  He  had  already  completed  his  well-known 

1  Par.  xi.  124-132. 


Dante  and  Aquinas.  1 3 1 

Catena  Aurea, — as  to  which  De  Thoco  makes  the 
entirely  incredible  assertion  that  he  dictated  all  the 
passages  from  the  Fathers  from  memory;  the  office 
for  the  new  festival  of  Corpus  Christi  and  the  work 
on  the  Eastern  Church,  Contra  errores  Grcecorum, 
both  undertaken  at  the  desire  of  Urban  iv. ;'  his 
interesting  book  against  the  Averroistic  conception 
of  the  soul,1  and  his  voluminous  commentaries  upon 
Aristotle.  In  1266  we  find  him  in  Northern  Italy; 
in  1267  he  is  at  Bologna,  which,  as  containing  the 
tomb  of  St.  Dominic  (Nicolo  Pisano  had  completed 
his  magnificent  work  some  six  years  before),  was  in 
some  sense  the  centre  of  the  Order.  At  Bologna  he 
appears,  as  at  Paris  and  at  Rome,  as  a  preacher,  and 
as  holding  a  University  Chair ;  he  publishes  the  first 
part  of  the  Summa',  he  composes  his  famous  work 
(if  indeed  it  be  his)  De  regimine  principum,  addressed 
to  Hugh  of  Lusignan,  king  of  Cyprus ;  and  then,  after 
three  years,  his  superior  orders  him  off  again  to  Paris, 
to  assist  at  a  General  Chapter  of  the  Order  in  1 269. 
Once  more  he  is  a  professor  in  the  convent  St.  Jacques; 
once  more  he  is  the  political  confidant  of  St.  Louis. 
Here  he  writes  several  of  his  minor  works,  never  for 
getting  the  Summa,  the  second  part  of  which  is  pub 
lished  on  his  return  to  Bologna  in  1271.  Upon  this 
it  is  not  too  much  to  say  that  he  was  scrambled  for 

1  Declaratio  qaornndam  articulorum  contra  Graecoa,  Arm  en  on,  Sarncenoa 
(ad  Cantorem  Antiochcnum) ;  De  Unitate  Intellect!!*  contra  Averroutaa. 


132  Dante  and  Aqit inas. 

by  at  least  three  Universities  at  once.  The  General 
Chapter  of  the  Order  finally  decided  upon  sending 
him  to  Naples,  probably  in  accordance  with  his  own 
wishes.  After  an  absence  of  twenty-eight  years  he 
returned  to  the  home  of  his  boyhood ;  he  was  received 
with  popular  demonstrations,  in  town  and  country,  as 
a  public  character  whose  transcendent  merits  and 
glory  as  a  teacher  were  now  universally  recognised. 
But  he  hastily  buried  himself  as  before  in  his  cloister, 
to  complete  his  commentary  on  the  Prophets,  his 
explanation  of  the  Epistles  and  Gospels,  several 
smaller  works, — to  say  nothing  of  beginning  a  transla 
tion  of  the  works  of  Aristotle  from  the  Greek  text.  He 
had  always  consulted  it  in  his  earlier  commentaries, 
and  must  often  have  felt  the  need  of  a  new  transla 
tion.  Albert  of  Cologne  only  knew  the  Latin  render 
ing  of  Aristotle  which  had  been  distilled  from  the 
Arabic:  Roger  Bacon  complained  of  the  miserable 
versions  with  which  alone  he  was  acquainted.  Thomas 
determined  to  give  to  Europe,  in  a  new  and  trust 
worthy  dress, 

"  il  Maestro  di  color  che  sanno,"1 

as  the  world,  theological  no  less  than  lay,  then 
accounted  Aristotle;  and  this  without  losing  sight 
of  the  work  which  had  a  high  place  in  his  heart,  the 
Sumvna,  at  which,  in  all  leisure  moments,  he  worked 
unremittingly. 

i  Inf.  iv.  132. 


Dante  and  Aquinas.  133 

But  the  end  was  now  close  at  hand  At  the 
close  of  1273  he  had  frequent  fainting-fits,  which 
his  biographer  probably  mistook,  at  least  in  some 
cases,  for  spiritual  ecstasies.  On  the  6th  of  December 
in  that  year  he  finished  the  9Oth  Question  of  the 
third  part  of  the  Summa,  "de  Partibus  Pcenitentiae 
in  generali."  His  strength  was  gone ;  but  Gregory  x. 
had  convoked  a  Council  to  meet  at  Lyons  on  the  ist 
of  May  in  the  year  following,  and  desired  Thomas  to 
be  present,  since  the  relation  between  the  Eastern  and 
Western  Churches,  on  which  he  had  thought  and 
written,  was  to  be  specially  discussed.  Ill  as  ho  was, 
Thomas  obeyed.  Near  Naples  ho  stopped  with  a 
married  niece,  in  the  castle  of  Magenza,  the  Countess 
Francesca  Cecano,  and  here  his  illness  became  aggra 
vated,  and  his  life  was  even  despaired  of.  But  he 
rallied ;  and,  telling  his  niece  that  a  monk  ought  not 
to  die  in  a  secular  house,  he  pushed  on  northward,  in 
the  rude  winter  weather,  towards  Lyons.  He  reached 
the  Cistercian  convent  of  Fossa  Nuova  in  Campagna, 
and  De  Thoco  describes  the  enthusiasm  with  which 
he  was  received ;  but  he  insisted  on  being  alone,  per 
suaded,  as  he  was,  that  the  end  was  near.  Once  more 
the  expiring  flame  of  life  flickered  upwards;  and,  fancy 
ing  that  there  was  a  rally,  the  monks  pressed  round 
his  dying  bed,  and  begged  him  to  dictate  to  them  n 
commentary  on  the  book  which  from  its  associations 
with  St.  Bernard  was  the  favourite  of  the  Cistercians, 


1 34  Dante  and  Aquinas. 

the  Song  of  Solomon.  Thomas  roused  himself  to 
the  effort ;  but  it  was  too  late.  He  received  the  last 
Sacraments,  and  passed  away  on  March  7,  1 274,  in  the 
forty-ninth  year  of  his  age. 

Among  those  souls  who  are  placed  on  the  fifth 
cornice  in  the  Purgatory,  Dante  meets  with  Hugh 
Capet,  who  describes  his  descendants  on  the  French 
throne,  and  in  particular  says  that  Charles  of  Anjou, 
after  putting  Conradino  to  death  in  1268,  became 
king  of  Naples — 

"epoi 
Ripinse  al  ciel  Tommaso,  per  ammenda. "  1 

Dante  here  seems  to  adopt  an  aggravated  version  of 
the  story  which  is  mentioned  by  Villani,  that  Thomas, 
"  going  to  the  Council  at  Lyons,  was  killed  by  a  phy 
sician  of  Charles  I.,  king  of  Sicily,  who  put  poison  into 
some  sweetmeats,  thinking  to  ingratiate  himself  with 
king  Charles,  because  Thomas  was  of  the  lineage  of 
the  lords  of  Aquino,  who  had  rebelled  against  the 
king,  and  doubting  whether  he  should  be  made 
cardinal."2  Dante  seems  to  have  thought  that  the 
physician  acted,  not  on  his  own  account,  but  by  orders 
from  the  king;  and  commentators  of  a  later  age 
assign  the  various  motives  which,  as  they  think, 
would  have  determined  the  deed,  and  which  are  of 
varying  degrees  of  probability.  Certain  it  is  that  De 
Thoco  and  Ptolemy  of  Lucca, — who  was  Aquinas's  con- 

1  Purg.  xx.  68,  69.  a  Villain,  lib.  ix.  c.  218. 


Dante  and  Aquinas.  135 

fessor,  and  on  terms  of  uninterrupted  intimacy  with 
him,  and  who  describes  his  death, — knew  nothing 
about  it.  The  story  may  well  have  originated  in  the 
Italian  hatred  of  the  French  intruder  whose  misdeeds 
would  appear  to  make  the  author  of  the  De  regimine 
pri'ncipum  a  natural  victim  of  his  jealous  tyranny ; 
and  Dante  would  not  have  examined  too  closely  a  story 
which  his  own  political  feeling  would  have  easily 
welcomed.  Muratori  doubts  what  credence  should  be 
given  to  Dante  in  the  matter ;  and  materials  for  dis 
cussing  the  point  are  found  in  the  elaborate  note  of 
Scartazzini,  and  in  Arrivabene.1 

Dante  was  born  hi  1265,  while  Aquinas  and  Bona- 
venture  both  died  nine  years  afterwards,  in  1274,  the 
former  in  March,  the  latter  in  July.  As  a  boy  Dante 
must  have  been  able  to  understand  something  of  what 
was  felt  by  his  elders  in  that  year,  so  deeply  graven 
in  the  memory  of  mediaeval  Europe.  Scholasticism 
had  then  taken  full  possession  of  the  whole  thinking 
and  devotional  life  of  the  Church,  and  none  could 
escape  a  share  in  the  outburst  of  enthusiasm  and 
pain  which  attended  to  the  grave  all  that  remained 
of  the  men  whom  it  accounted  of  foremost  moral  and 
intellectual  weight  in  Western  Christendom. 

It  was  whispered  that  the  loss  which  the  Church 
had  sustained  by  the  death  of  Aquinas  was  made 
known  supernaturally  and  at  the  moment  to  his  still 

>  Seoolo  di  DanU,  lib.  i.  p.  14. 


136  Dante  and  Aquinas. 

surviving  and  aged  master,  Albert,  at  Cologne :  "  My 
brother  Thomas  of  Aquino,"  he  suddenly  exclaimed, 
"  my  son  hi  Jesus  Christ,  who  has  been  a  light  of  the 
Church,  is  dead ;  God  has  revealed  it  to  me."  Mean 
while  Fossa  Nuova  became  almost  at  once  a  place  of 
pilgrimage,  and  to  the  scandal  of  the  Dominicans, 
the  Cistercian  hosts  of  the  dead  theologian  insisted  on 
retaining  his  body  in  their  conventual  church.  In 
spite  of  protests,  frequent  and  vehement,  they  kept 
their  prize  for  ninety-four  years;  they  only  surrendered 
it  when,  in  1368,  Urban  v.  decided  that  it  was  the 
rightful  possession  of  the  Dominican  Order.  Even 
then  the  controversy  was  not  closed;  it  raged  yet 
a  while  between  the  claims  of  rival  Dominican  con 
vents  ;  in  the  event,  while  an  arm  was  sent  to  Paris, 
the  body  of  St.  Thomas  was  translated  to  the  great 
house  of  the  Order  at  Toulouse,  where  it  remained 
until  it  was,  as  is  said,  scattered  to  the  winds  by  the 
great  storm  of  the  Revolution.  It  was  afterwards 
recovered,  and  is  now  in  St.  Sernin  at  Toulouse. 

Aquinas  was  canonised  by  John  xxn.  at  Avignon, 
July  1 8,  1323,  nearly  two  years  after  Dante's  death  in 
September  1321.  The  process  of  canonisation,  as  it 
is  called,  had  already  begun  in  1319.  John  XXIL, 
whatever  else  is  to  be  said  of  him,  was  theologian 
enough  to  understand  the  true  place  of  Aquinas  in 
the  world  of  Christian  thought,  even  if  he  exaggerates 
in  saying  that  Thomas  "plus  illuminavit  ecclesiam 


Dante  and  Aquinas.  \  37 

quam  omnes  alii  doctores." 1  But  Dante's  genius  had 
more  than  anticipated  the  formal  honours  of  the 
Church ;  and  in  the  tenth  and  three  following  cantos 
of  the  Paradiso  we  see  what  the  highest  minds  of 
his  day  thought  of  the  greatest  of  the  Dominicans. 
Only  two  other  men,  perhaps, — since  the  time  of  the 
Apostles, — Augustine  and  Calvin,  have  left  so  profound 
an  impress  upon  the  after-thought  of  the  Christian 
world.  If  a  great  epic  poet  had  written  at  the  close 
of  the  fifth  century,  a  like  honour  might  have  been 
done  to  St.  Augustine.  If  Milton  had  written  fifty 
years  earlier,  and  had  put  his  strength  into  Paradise 
Regained  instead  of  Paradise  Lost,  a  like  honour 
might  have  been  assigned  to  Calvin.  So  far  as  dis 
tinction  in  the  heaven  of  literature  goes,  Thomas  was 
felix  opportunitate  mortis ;  and  if  he  had  not  secured 
a  foremost  place  among  the  giants  of  theology  of  all 
ages,  he  would  still  have  lived  for  ever  in  the  pages 
of  the  Commedia. 

The  Summa  Theologies  has  many  aspects,  but  it  is, 
before  all  things,  an  attempt  to  present  theology  as 
the  universal,  all-comprehending  science.  And  in  this 
it  is  somewhat  akin  to  the  Commedia,  in  which  all  the 
facts  of  knowledge  and  experience  are  ranged,  as  a 
layman  would  range  them,  under  or  as  part  of  the 
science  of  God,  That  such  a  marshalling  of  universal 
truth  is  abstractedly  possible  no  serious  believer  in 

»  De  Thoco,  xiii.  81. 


138  Dante  and  Aquinas. 

God  can  doubt;  but  the  modern  world  knows  too 
much  to  allow  itself  to  hope  that,  with  our  present 
faculties,  we  can  succeed  in  effecting  it.  Within  the 
precincts  of  theology  itself  are  large  detached  frag 
ments,  so  to  call  them,  of  truth  which,  as  we  now 
know,  cannot  be  brought,  without  intellectual  violence, 
under  the  unifying  empire  of  theological  system ;  and 
when  we  pass  beyond  these  precincts  the  world  of 
human  knowledge  presents  a  spectacle  which  even 
Aquinas  would  have  felt  to  make  his  task  impossible. 
But  the  thirteenth  century  was  not  embarrassed  by  our 
larger  outlook,  and  the  forms  which  were  taken  by 
intellectual  rebellion  against  the  creed  of  the  Church 
made  good  men  anxious  to  present  the  whole  field  of 
knowledge  after  a  fashion  of  which  the  work  of 
Aquinas  is  the  most  complete  and  splendid  type.  As 
Dante  ascends  to  the  first  heaven  with  Beatrice,  his 
difficulties  may  represent  the  mental  unrest  of  his  age, 
upon  which  the  Church's  theology 

"  appresso  d'  un  pio  sospiro, 
Gli  occhi  drizzo  ver  me  con  quel  sembiante, 
Che  madre  fa  sopra  figliuol  deliro. " l 

And  then  she  explains  how 

"  Le  cose  tutte  e  quante 
Harm'  ordine  tra  loro  :  e  questo  e  forma 
Che  1'  universe  a  Dio  fa  simigliante. 

1  Par.  i.  100-102. 


Dante  and  Aquinas.  139 

Nell*  online  ch'  io  dico  sono  accline 
Tutte  nature,  per  diverse  sorti, 
Pih  al  principio  loro,  e  men  vicine. " l 

But  did  Dante  get  this  from  Aquinas  ? 

It  is  perhaps  more  natural  to  think  of  Brunetto 
Latini,  who,  though  fifty-three  years  Dante's  senior, 
lived  until  Dante  was  twenty-nine — lived  to  the  end 
of  Dante's  life  in  his  grateful  memory : 

"  La  cara  e  buona  imagine  paterna. " 

For  Brunetto  too  aimed  at  an  encyclopaedic  grasp  of 
the  knowledge  of  the  time.  His  Trdsor  discusses 
everything  from  the  Divine  Essence  down  to  the 
details  of  natural  history  and  rhetoric ;  and  if  Dante 
was  indebted  to  Aquinas  for  the  completeness  of  some 
of  his  conceptions,  he  may  well  have  owed  the  first 
impulse  to  Brunetto.  For  in  this  matter  Brunetto 
himself  was  a  pupil  of  the  Dominicans.  During  his 
exile  in  France  Brunetto  would  have  met  with  the 
Spemdum  Majus  of  Vincent  of  Beauvais,  who  died  in 
1264,  just  a  year  before  the  birth  of  Dante,  and  whoso 
work  may  not  have  been  without  its  influence  on  the 
project,  if  not  on  the  execution,  of  the  Summa.  The 
two  works,  hi  fact,  represent  a  ruling  tradition  of  the 
Dominican  Order,  which  probably  dates  from  its  very 
foundation, — the  effort  to  subdue  the  intellectual  revolt 
of  the  twelfth  and  thirteenth  centuries  against  the 
Church,  by  exhibiting  the  whole  world  of  thought  and 

1  Par.  L  103-105;  109-111. 


140  Dante  and  Aquinas. 

knowledge,  as  religious  men  then  conceived  of  it,  in 
an  unity  so  imposing  as  to  overawe  resistance.  "  Aqui 
nas,"  says  Ozanam,  "  rappelait  Aristote,  par  1'univer- 
salite"  de  son  savoir,  par  la  gravite"  pesante  mais  solide 
de  son  caractere,  par  son  talent  d'analyse,  et  de  clas 
sification,  par  1'extreme  sobrie"t6  de  son  langage."1 
This  will  hardly  be  thought  exaggerated.  It  was,  in 
fact,  Aquinas  who  really  baptized  Aristotelian  thought, 
and  put  an  end  to  the  suspicion  with  which  the 
Church  had  for  ages  regarded  it.  In  his  hands  scho 
lasticism  struck  its  roots  most  deeply  into  the  logic 
and  metaphysic  of  Aristotle,  but  then  it  moulded  this 
rich  material  by  the  double  and  simultaneous  action 
of  a  faith  which  certainly  freed  it  from  its  one-sided 
sensuousness,  and  of  a  lucid  common-sense  which,  in 
all  questions  that  were  conceived  to  be  open,  often 
reviewed  received  conclusions  with  unrivalled  and 
fearless  judgment.  In  discussing  the  nature  of  Being 
Thomas  preserves  a  wary  mean,  which  has  been  repro 
duced  again  and  again  in  very  unecclesiastical  quarters, 
between  the  nominalism  of  Abelard  and  the  exagger 
ated  realism  which  had  got  into  no  less  trouble  with 
the  Church.  He  was,  I  suppose,  what  we  should  call 
a  very  modified  nominalist :  he  certainly  did  not  be 
lieve  in  the  hypothesis  of  an  universal  substance.  In 
psychology  he  is  thoroughly  Aristotelian :  the  soul,  so 
far  from  being  merely  conscience,  or  merely  thought, 

1  Dante  et  la,  Philosophic  Catholique,  p.  3,  c.  3,  p.  338. 


Dante  and  A  quinas.  1  4  1 


is  to  the  full  ^vxn  as  well  as  Tn/eO/Lia:  it  comprises 
the  whole  higher  side  of  the  animated  body  ;  "  princi- 
pium  vitae  dicimus  esse  animam."  In  logic  he  keeps 
close  to  Aristotle  ;  to  the  scepticism  which  would  sug 
gest  that  the  forms  of  thought  with  which  reason  does 
her  work  themselves  are  illusory,  he  replies  that  they 
may  be  tested  by  experiment  and  evidence,  and  that 
in  taking  this  evidence  reason  satisfies  herself  of  their 
trustworthiness.  In  physics  he  is  of  very  inferior 
authority  to  Albert,  his  master:  he  is,  of  course, 
governed  by  the  crude  suppositions  and  imperfect 
knowledge  of  his  day:  he  quotes  Aristotle  as  an 
ultimate  authority,  but  when  dealing  with  abstract 
problems,  such  as  the  contributions  of  form  and 
matter  respectively  to  the  production  of  the  individual, 
he  touches  regions  of  thought  with  which  recent  dis 
cussions  have  made  us  familiar,  but  in  which  it  is 
not  easy  even  now  to  go  beyond  him.  His  ethics  arc 
perhaps  the  field  in  which  we  see  him  at  his  best  ;  his 
resolute  belief,  on  the  one  hand,  that  all  true  virtue 
can  be  justified  as  virtue  at  the  bar  of  reason,  and,  on 
the  other,  that  God,  conceived  of  as  the  Absolute  Good, 
is  the  only  adequate  Goal  of  moral  desire,  invest  this 
district  of  his  work  with  a  form  and  an  unity  which 
make  it  particularly  attractive.  In  pure  theology  wo 
see  his  temper  in  his  rejection  of  the  a  priori  argu 
ment  for  God's  existence  which  found  favour  with 
St.  Ambrose  and  St.  Augustine,  to  the  effect  that  to 


142  Dante  and  Aquinas. 

conceive  of  God  is  to  conceive  of  Absolute  Perfection, 
but  that  God  would  be  imperfect  if  He  did  not  exist. 
And  he  is  at  home  in  the  old  Peripatetic  argument 
which  would  demonstrate  God's  existence  from  the 
necessity  of  a  First  Cause  or  Mover. 

In  all  of  these  regions  of  mental  work  the  influence 
of  Aquinas  may,  with  more  or  less  distinctness,  be 
traced  in  the  Commedia,  but  to  attempt  this  in 
detail  on  the  present  occasion  would  be  to  trespass 
on  an  indulgence  which  has  been  already  too  heavily 
taxed.  It  must  suffice  to  conclude  by  a  single 
example. 

In  the  first  circle  of  the  Inferno,  among  those 
who  have  lived  virtuously,  and  have  not  to  suffer  for 
great  sins,  but  who,  not  being  baptized,  are  shut  out 
from  Paradise,  are  Avicenna,  and 

"  Averrois,  che  il  gran  comento  feo." l 

Of  these,  Avicenna,  Ibn-Sina,  the  greatest  of  Arabic 
physicians,  had  been  the  real  teacher  of  Albert,  Thomas's 
master,  while  Thomas  himself  had  learned  to  com 
ment  upon  Aristotle  from  the  method  of  Averroes, 
Ibn-Roschid.  It  is  not  impossible  that  Dante's  judg 
ment  of  these  eminent  men  was  associated  with  the 
consciousness  of  intellectual  indebtedness  to  them 
which  must  have  been  felt  by  the  leading  Dominicans  : 
certainly  it  was  much  more  lenient  than  that  which 

i  Inf.  iv.  144. 


Dante  and  Aquinas.  1 43 

was  common  in  Christendom  of  that  day.  M.  Renan 
indeed  seems  to  complain  of  Aquinas  for  regarding 
Averroes  with  literary  admiration,  yet  also  with  ortho 
dox  distrust.1  But  the  two  views  were  equally  natural, 
perhaps  equally  inevitable.  Christendom  regarded 
with  dread  the  mass  of  negative  and  pantheistic  spe 
culation  which  had  accumulated  round  the  works  of 
Aristotle  as  they  passed  through  the  schools  of 
Morocco  and  Southern  Spain ;  and  Aquinas  selected, 
as  peculiarly  dangerous,  the  theory  of  Averroes,  of  a 
universal  intellect,  which  was  probably  (though  of  this 
I  cannot  speak)  not  peculiar  to  him  among  the  Arab 
teachers,  and  which  seems  to  have  had  great  attrac 
tions  for  certain  minds  in  Christendom.  Thomas  felt 
that  man's  personality,  and  with  it  his  moral  respon 
sibility,  was  at  stake,  and  he  recurs  to  the  subject 
again  and  again,  not  merely  in  his  book  De  Unitate 
InteUectus  adversus  Averroistas,  but  in  his  commen 
taries  on  Aristotle  and  in  his  two  Summas.  Thomas 
too  was  jealous  for  the  honour  of  Aristotle.  According 
to  Thomas,  Averroes  was  "  non  tarn  peripateticus  quain 
peripatetic®  philosophise  depravator."  Of  this  convic 
tion  of  Aquinas,  and  of  the  controversy  it  occasioned, 
a  controversy  which  was  only  closed  centuries  later 
by  a  Bull  of  Leo  x.,  there  are  not  wanting  traces 
in  the  Commedia. 
In  the  seventh  cornice  of  Purgatory  Statius  is 

1  Avcrrots  et  Faverrolsmc,  p.  236. 


144  Dante  and  Aquinas. 

thought  to  refer  to  Averroes,  when  he  tells  Dante  that, 
in  the  development  of  unborn  life, 

"etalpunto 

Che  piu  savio  di  te  fe  gia  errante ; 
SI  che,  per  sua  dottrina,  fe  disgiunto 
Dall'  anima  il  possibile  intelletto 
Perch&  da  lui  non  vide  organo  assunto." l 

Averroes  held  that  this  universal  intellect  was  within 
the  reach  of  all  men ;  that  it  was  to  be  attained  by 
study,  speculation,  renunciation  of  the  lower  desires  of 
the  soul ;  that,  in  this  sense,  it  was  "  possibile,"  that 
it  alone  was  imperishable,  and  that  the  ideas  which 
emanated  from  it  only  did  not  die.  Here  Dante  seems 
to  be  reflecting  the  feeling  of  Aquinas  about  Averroes, 
as  again  he  represents  the  faith  of  Aquinas  in  man's 
indestructible  personality  when  describing  the  soul's 
departure  from  the  body : 

"  E  quando  Lachesis  non  ha  piu  lino, 
Solvesi  dalla  carne,  ed  in  virtute 
Ne  porta  seco  e  1'  umano  e  il  diviuo. 
L'  altre  potenze  tutte  quante  mute, 
Memoria,  intelligenza,  e  volontade, 
In  atto  molto  piu  che  prima  acute."  * 

The  articles  in  the  Summa,  Part  i.  Questions  75-90, 
form,  in  their  way,  a  complete  treatise  on  psychology, 
and  any  one  who  would  compare  with  them  the  well- 
known  passages  in  the  Purgatory,  ii.  85,  describing 
the  meeting  with  Casella;  xvi.  85  sqq. ;  xxv.  josqq.; 

1  Purg.  xxv.  62-66.  2  Purg.  xxv.  79-84. 


Dante  and  A  qu inas.  \  4 5 

Par.  vil  140  sqq.,  will  see  how  varied  is  the  corre 
spondence,  with  here  and  there  a  significant  difference. 
It  is  scarcely  possible  to  pass  into  pure  theology 
without  feeling  Aquinas  in  almost  every  line.  But,  if 
this  is  to  be  traced  at  all,  it  must  be  on  a  distinct 
occasion:  and  to-day  we  take  leave  of  him  on  the 
threshold,  if  indeed  it  may  be  called  the  threshold,  of 
his  work. 


DANTE   AND   AQUINAS.1 

PART   II. 

IN  a  former  section  of  this  paper  it  was  pointed  out 
that  Dante  was,  broadly  speaking,  a  reflection,  at 
once  literary  and  popular,  of  much  of  the  mind  of 
St.  Thomas  Aquinas,  as  in  turn  Aquinas  was  a  typical 
embodiment  of  the  theological  and  speculative  activity 
of  the  young  Order  of  St.  Dominic.  This  relation 
between  Dante  and  St.  Thomas  was  a  natural  product 
of  the  circumstances  of  his  day.  Dante's  intellectual 
manhood  coincided  with  the  period  during  which  the 
authority  and  methods  of  Aquinas  were  making  then- 
way  to  supremacy  in  the  mind  of  the  Western  Church 
at  each  of  its  chief  centres  of  influence,  and  particularly 
at  Paris ;  but  Dante  was  beforehand  with  the  Church 
at  large  in  the  position  which  he  assigns  to  Aquinas 
in  the  Paradiso.  Some  years  were  yet  to  elapse  before 
the  formal  honours  of  canonisation  were  to  be  bestowed 
on  the  great  teacher;  but  Dante,  with  an  original 
audacity,  to  which  it  is  difficult  for  us  to-day  to  do  en 
tire  justice,  virtually  anticipates  the  judgment  of  the 
Papal  Chan*,  when  he  places  Aquinas  hi  the  wreath  of 

i  This  Paper  was  read  before  the  Oxford  Dante  Society,  November  19, 
1883. 

146 


Dante  and  Aquinas.  \  47 

twelve  blessed  spirits,  in  the  fourth  circle  of  his 
Paradiso,  making  him  the  foremost,  if  not  the  highest, 
interpreter  of  its  glories. 


Indeed,  how  high  Dante  places  the  authority  of 
Aquinas  appears  incidentally  from  the  explanations 
furnished  by  Beatrice  in  the  ninth  heaven,  where  the 
poet  beholds  the  nine  choirs  of  angels. 

On  the  question  whether  the  angels  were  created 
simultaneously  with  the  rest  of  the  universe,  or  at  a 
much  earlier  epoch,  there  were  two  opinions  current 
in  the  ancient  Church. 

The  belief  in  their  earlier  creation  was  prominently 
upheld  by  the  authority  of  St.  Gregory  Nazianzen  and 
of  St.  Jerome.  In  his  commentary  on  Titus,  Jerome 
observes  that  as  yet  our  world  has  not  lasted  for  six 
thousand  years;  "but,"  he  exclaims,  "how  many 
previous  eternities,  spaces  of  time,  beginnings  of  ages, 
must  we  not  think  of,  during  which  Angels,  Thrones, 
Powers,  and  Virtues  have  been  serving  God,  and,  with 
out  vicissitude  or  measure  of  time,  have,  by  God's 
bidding,  stood  steadfast." 

On  such  a  subject  the  most  learned  Biblical  scholar 
among  the  Latin  Fathers  would,  until  then,  have  been 
generally  considered  a  sufficient  authority  as  to  the 
mind  of  Scripture ;  but  Dante  makes  Beatrice  reject 
the  opinion,  on  the  ground  that  it  is  at  variance  with 


148  Dante  and  Aquinas. 

the  import  of  such  passages  as  Genesis  i.  i  and  Ecclus. 
xviii.  i : 

"  Jeronimo  vi  scrisse  lungo  tratto 
Di  secoli,  degli  Angeli,  creati 
Anzi  che  1*  altro  mondo  fosse  fatto  ; 
Ma  questo  vero  e  scritto  in  molti  lati 
Dagli  scrittor  dello  Spirito  Santo  ; 
E  tu  ten'  avvedrai,  se  bene  agguati."  l 

Nay,  reason,  Beatrice  argues,  supports  the  inference 
which  she  draws  from  Scripture : 

"  Ed  anche  la  ragione  il  vede  alquanto, 
Chfc  non  concederebbe  che  i  motori 
Senza  sua  perfezion  fosser  cotanto."2 

The  angels  were  created  in  order  to  administer  the 
material  universe;  and  it  was  antecedently  unlikely 
that  they  would  be  brought  into  existence  many  ages 
before  that  universe  was  made. 

Here  Dante  is  thinking  of  the  discussion  hi  the 
Summa,  Pars  prima,  Qusest.  Ixi.  art.  iii.  Aquinas 
recognises  the  double  opinion  in  antiquity;  he  will 
not  allow  that  a  doctrine  supported  by  the  high 
authority  of  Gregory  Nazianzen  can  be  safely  con 
sidered  erroneous ;  the  caution  of  the  theologian  is  in 
contrast  with  the  brisk  impetuosity  of  the  poet.  But 
of  the  two  opinions,  he  says,  "  ilia  probabilior  videtur, 
quod  angeli  siinul  cum  creatura  corporea  sunt  creati." 
He  argues  that  the  angels  are  part  of  the  universe ; 
that  they  do  not  constitute  an  universe  by  themselves; 

1  Par.  xxix.  37-43.  a  Ib.  43-45. 


Dante  and  Aquinas.  149 

that  apart  from  the  rest  of  the  universe,  they  could 
not  attain  perfection.  "  Quod  apparet  ex  ordine  unius 
creaturae  ad  aliam.  Ordo  enim  rerum  ad  invicern  est 
bonum  universi.  Nulla  autem  pars  perfecta  est  a  suo 
toto  separata,"  Here  we  have  the  very  expression  of 
Dante,  who  thus  relies,  in  fact,  not  only  on  texts  of 
Scripture,  but  also,  and  mainly,  on  the  reasoning  of 
Aquinas,  as  warranting  a  conclusion  against  the  au 
thority  of  the  most  learned  of  the  four  Latin  Fathers. 
It  would  be  difficult  to  suggest  a  more  telling  illus 
tration  of  the  place  which  Aquinas  held  in  the  theo 
logical  thoughts  of  Dante. 

This  deference  for  St.  Thomas  may  be  traced  hi 
another  department — Dante's  reverence  for  Aristotle. 
With  Dante,  Aristotle  is  the  master  of  those  who 
know:  and,  like  St.  Thomas,  the  poet  constantly 
adopts  his  opinions  with  entire  deference.  Thus  in 
Virgil's  discourse  respecting  love  as  the  motive  prin 
ciple  of  action,  free-will,  and  the  source  of  morality,1 
we  feel  Aristotle's  treatise  De  Animd;  and  again, 
Aristotle  himself,  and  not  even  Aristotle  as  presented 
by  Aquinas.  But  it  was  mainly  Aquinas's  doing  that 
Dante  deferred  to  Aristotle  at  all  So  late  as  1209 
the  students  of  Paris  were  forbidden  to  read  Aristotle. 
The  rapid  and  entire  change  in  the  position  assigned 
to  Aristotle  in  the  schools  of  Christendom  before  the 
end  of  the  thirteenth  century  was  largely  due  to  the 

»  Pury.  xviii.  1-76. 


1 50  Dante  and  Aquinas. 

influence  of  three  Popes — Gregory  ix.,  Innocent  iv., 
and  Urban  iv.  Of  these,  Gregory  enlisted  the  services 
of  Albert  of  Cologne;  Urban  those  of  St.  Thomas. 
The  question  was,  how  to  distinguish  the  true  Aris 
totle  from  the  counterfeit,  real  or  presumed,  which 
had  been  presented  by  the  Arabian  commentators. 
To  do  this,  Albert  and  Thomas  devoted  the  best  years 
of  their  lives.  In  the  Summa,  Aristotle  is  an 
authority  only  inferior  to  the  Bible.  Not  only  his 
Ethics,  with  their  great  generalisations  respecting 
human  nature,  which  will  always  be  true,  but  his 
Physics,  embodying  the  crudest  guesses  of  an  un 
scientific  age,  are  quoted  as  final  authorities.  When 
Aristotle  thus  reigned  in  the  Summa,  it  was  natural 
that  he  should  reign  in  the  Commedia.  If  the  poet 
could  make  any  use  of  him — and  there  were  plenty 
of  opportunities  for  doing  so — he  was  now  shielded 
against  suspicions  which  a  century  earlier  would 
assuredly  have  beset  him,  by  the  example  of  the 
authoritative  and  cautious  theologian. 

Aquinas  makes  himself  felt — probably,  and  as 
would  be  natural — more  in  the  Convito  of  Dante  than 
in  the  Commedia.  But  confining  ourselves,  as  narrow 
limits  require,  to  the  Commedia,  let  us  observe  that 
its  plan  or  structure  is  apparently  less  affected  by 
Aquinas  than  by  St.  Bonaventure.  Practical  life 
shapes  the  plan  of  the  poem  in  detail  more  than 
theological  form, — as,  notoriously,  in  the  arrangement 


Dante  and  Aquinas.  1 5 1 

of  sins  in  the  Inferno ;  and  St.  Bonaventure,  mystic 
as  he  was,  was  before  all  things  practical 

Dante's  love  of  Plato,  and  of  the  idealist  and 
mystical  elements  of  his  thought,  would  have  power 
fully  drawn  him  to  St.  Bonaventure — the  Plato  of  the 
thirteenth  century,  as  was  St.  Thomas  its  Aristotle. 
Thus  the  order  of  the  deadly  sins  followed  in  the 
Pwrgatory  1  is  that  given  by  Aquinas,2  with  the  excep 
tion  that  hi  Aquinas  avarice  precedes  sloth,  accidia, 
or,  as  he  calls  it,  tristitia ;  while  in  Dante  sloth  precedes 
avarice.  But  Dante's  order  is  exactly  that  of  St. 
Bonaventure,3  who  explains  the  growth  and  develop 
ment  of  deadly  sin  somewhat  differently  from  St 
Thomas,  while  both  of  them  differ  from  the  order  of 
St.  Gregory  the  Great  in  the  well-known  passage  of  the 
Magna  Moralia*  which  is  quoted  by  St.  Thomas,6 
and  which  has  shaped  the  discussion  of  this  district 
of  moral  theology  in  the  Western  Church, — except 
that  the  place  of  gluttony  has  generally  been  shifted 
from  fifth  to  third,  as  more  nearly  corresponding  to 
the  average  development  of  sin  in  human  lives. 

M.  Ozanam  observes  that  the  idea  of  the  Paradiso, 
in  which  the  poet  journeys  through  the  spheres  of 
heaven,  each  of  which  may  bo  more  or  less  distinctly 
associated  with  some  form  of  excellence,  until  ho 
reaches  the  Feet  of  the  Most  High,  is  probably  sug- 

1  Cunt,  xiii.-xxvl  *  ia.  ase,  qu.  84,  art.  4. 

»  Bremloquium,  Pt  ill  c.  9,  ed.  Freiburg,  1881,  p.  335. 
17.  •  Ut  fup. 


152  Da nte  and  A  qit inas. 

gested  by  St.  Bonaventure's  beautiful  Itinerarium 
Mentis  in  Deum.  Indeed,  the  influence  of  Bonaven- 
ture  is  largely  traceable  in  many  ethical  and  practical 
elements  of  the  poem.  Dante's  characters  are  often  a 
dramatic  exhibition  of  the  popular  instructions  in 
Christian  life  and  morals  to  which  the  first  Fran 
ciscans  devoted  themselves.  Such  a  pathetic  account 
of  the  occasion  of  her  sin  as  that  of  Francesca  da 
Rimini — 

"  Noi  leggevamo  un  giorno  per  diletto 

Di  Lancilotto,  come  amor  lo  strinse  " — x 

is  probably  the  dramatisation  of  a  practical  warning 
which  Dante  associated  with  the  memories  of  some 
sermon  at  Santa  Croce  in  Florence,  or  at  the  humbler 
establishment  of  the  Order  in  the  centre  of  the  city. 

The  influence  of  St.  Thomas  is  less  ethical  than 
philosophical  and  speculative,  and  it  is  less  to  be 
traced  in  propositions  distinctly  characteristic  of  their 
author  than  in  the  general  logical  and  theological 
apparatus  of  Dante's  mind.  Thomas  is  constantly 
endeavouring  to  trace  order  and  relation  between  the 
abstract  and  the  concrete,  between  the  known  and 
the  hypothetical,  between  causes  and  imperfectly 
discerned  effects.  This  characteristic  of  his  intellect 
is  felt  by  Dante :  "  Dice  Tommaso  conoscer  1'  ordine 
di  una  cosa  a  un  altra  e  proprio  atto  di  ragione."2 
Hence  in  the  Paradiso  Beatrice  proclaims — 

1  Inf.  v.  127,  128.  a  Convito,  iv.  cap.  8. 


Dante  and  Aquinas.  153 

"  Le  cose  tutte  quante 
Hann*  ordine  tra  loro  :  e  questo  6  forma 
Che  T  uni verso  a  Dio  fa  simigliante."1 

In  the  lower  spheres  of  thought  the  desire  to  trace 
this  order  is  satisfied  by  the  operations  of  natural 
reason,  by  experience  and  demonstration:  in  the 
higher  by  Revelation.2  The  conversations  which  Dante 
makes  himself  hold  in  each  sphere  of  existence,  as 
with  Virgil  about  the  pains  of  hell,3  about  the  absence 
of  shadow,  except  in  his  own  case,  at  the  entrance  of 
Purgatory,4  and  at  the  position  of  the  sun  on  their 
left,6  and  about  the  way  in  which  the  dead  are  helped 
by  the  prayers  of  the  living,6  and  respecting  love  in 
its  relation  to  human  action  ; 7  with  Farinata  respect- 
big  the  range  of  knowledge  in  the  lost ; 8  with  Statius 
respecting  the  mystery  of  birth  in  its  relation  to  the 
soul;9  with  Beatrice  respecting  the  Redemption;10 
with  Charles  Martel  of  Hungary  respecting  the  dif 
ference  between  children  and  parents ; u  with  St 
Thomas  himself  respecting  varieties  and  imperfections 
in  nature,12 — not  to  cite  others, — illustrate  the  pro 
found  intellectual  sympathy  of  the  poet  with  the 
theologian.  Dante  is,  like  Thomas,  a  philosopher  in 
the  sense  that  he  must  have  a  combining,  governing, 
harmonising  theory  for  what  he  observes  and  thinks 
piecemeal ;  and  the  conversational  form  in  which  the 

1  Par.  i.  103-105.      *  Ib.  ii.  61.       *  Ii\f.  vi.  sub  fin.      *  Purg.  Hi.  14  sqq. 
•  Purg.  iv.  53  sqq.    •  Ib.  vi.          1 1b.  xvii.,  xviii.        •  Inf.  x.  98  tqq. 
9  Purg.  xxr.  »  Par.  vii.      "  Ib.  viii.  "  Ib.  xiiL 


154  Dante  and  Aquinas. 

sense  of  this  mental  necessity  expresses  itself  belongs 
to  his  art  and  craft  as  a  poet,  just  as  the  questions  and 
articles  of  the  Summa  belong  to  that  of  the  scholastic 
theologian.  The  direct  influence  upon  Dante  of  the 
mind  of  St.  Thomas  may  be  traced  in  each  of  the 
three  spheres  into  which,  speaking  roughly  and  popu 
larly,  his  great  work  as  a  theologian  divides  itself. 

I.  At  the  beginning  of  the  Summa  Thomas  deals 
largely  with  those  ultimate  and  abstract  ideas  which 
are  part  of  the  original  furniture  of  the  human  mind, 
and  which,  upon  analysis,  are  seen  to  lead  up  to  God 
and  His  essential  attributes.  With  St.  Thomas  the 
science  of  Being  is  the  science  of  God.  Unity,  the  law 
which  underlies  all  existence;  goodness,  the  true 
object  of  all  that  lives  and  wills,  and  the  privation  of 
which  is  evil ;  truth,  the  object  and  satisfaction  of  all 
spiritual  existences, — these  are  sure  to  centre  at  last  in 
Him  Whose  essential  attributes  they  are — 

"  Fecemi  la  divina  potestate, 
La  somma  sapienza  e  il  primo  amore." J 

So  frequent  are  the  correspondences  between  these 
early  chapters  of  the  Summa  and  the  strictly  theo 
logical  passages  in  the  Divina  Commedia  that  it  is 
difficult  not  to  believe  that  the  poet  must  have 
studied  them  closely,  or  even  learned  them  by  heart. 
When  Dante  is  questioned  by  St.  Peter  as  to  his  faith, 
his  answer  is  a  condensation  of  Summ.  Theol.  Pt.  L 
qu.  ii.  art.  3  (utrum  Deus  sit) — 

1  Inf.  iii.  5,  6. 


Dante  and  Aquinas.  1 55 

"  Io  credo  in  uno  Iddio 
Solo  ed  eterno,  che  tutto  il  ciel  move, 
Non  moto,  con  amore  e  con  disio  ; 
Iv  1  ,-i  t ;il  creder  non  ho  io  pur  prove 
Fisice  e  metafisice,  ma  dalmi 
Anco  la  verita  che  quinci  piove 
Per  Moise,  per  profeti,  e  per  salmi, 
Per  F  Evangelic. " l 

So  Adam's  saying  to  Dante  that  God 

"  fa  di  se  pareglio  all'  altre  cose,"3 

boldly  condenses  Summ.  Theol.  L  qu.  16,  art.  5,"Deus 
cum  sit  suum  esse  et  intelligere,  et  mensura  omnis 
4M6  et  intellcctus,  in  ipso  non  solum  est  veritas,  sed 
ipse  summa  et  prima  veritas  est."  God  is  said  to  make 
Himself  a  representative  of  His  creatures  when  He 
makes  His  creatures  in  the  image  of  Himself.  (But 
see  the  elaborate  note  of  Blanc  on  this  difficult  pas 
sage,  8.v.  Pareglio). 

So  when  St.  Thomas,  explaining  the  simplicity  of 
the  Divine  Essence,  says  that  God  "  in  uno  actu  vult 
omnia  in  sua  bonitate,"  s  he  is  apparently  echoed  by 
the  eagle  in  Paradise — 

"  La  prima  volonta,  ch'  e  per  se  buona, 
Da  se,  che  e  sonimo  ben,  inai  non  si  mosse."4 

So  the  motives  for  creation,  as  stated  in  Par.  xxix.  1 3, 
recall  Summ.  Theol.  L  19.  3,  contr.  Gentiles  ii.  26. 

And  the  profound  thought  of  Aquinas,  Summ. 
Theol.  i.  qu.  34,  art.  3,  "  Quia  Deus  uno  actu  et  so  et 

1  Par.  xxiv.  130-137.  *  /&.  xxvi.  107. 

•  Summ.  Theol.  i.  qu.  19,  art.  5.  *  Par.  xix.  86,  87. 


156  Dante  and  Aquinas. 

omnia  intelligit,  unicum  verbum  ejus  est  expressivum 
non  solum  Patris  sed  etiam  creaturarum," l  reappears 
in  the  beautiful  lines — 

"  Ci6  che  non  more,  e  ci6  che  pu6  morire, 
Non  e  se  non  splendor  di  quella  idea 
Che  partorisce,  amando,  il  nostro  Sire. "  a 

The  verses  which  connect  creation  with  an  activity 
arising  out  of  the  distinctive  inter-relations  of  the 
Persons  of  the  Holy  Trinity  hi  Par.  x.  i  seem  to  be 
based  on  Summ.  Theol.  i.  qu.  45,  art.  6.  2.  Indeed,  in 
the  region  of  pure  theology  Dante  keeps  close  to  St. 
Thomas.  Thomas,  no  doubt,  on  such  a  subject,  has  no 
beliefs,  scarcely  any  judgments — that  are  exclusively 
his  own ;  he  does  but  exhibit  and  arrange  in  his  own 
way  the  truths  which  in  their  entirety  composed  the 
central  object  of  the  faith  of  the  Church.  But  he  has 
his  own  way  of  approaching  and  exhibiting  them,  and 
here  Dante  seems  to  cling  to  him  with  particular  care: 
he  might  perhaps  feel  more  at  liberty  if  he  were  more 
at  a  distance  from  the  heart  of  the  creed  of  Christen 
dom.  When,  as  they  are  ascending  towards  the  first 
heaven,  Beatrice  answers  Dante's  second  doubt  as  to 
how  they  could  rise  above  the  light  bodies  around 
them,  her  answer  might  have  been  given  substan 
tially  (is  it  audacious  to  say  so  ?)  hi  other  ways,  but 
the  opportunity  is  seized  to  echo  St.  Thomas's  way 
of  representing  all  life  and  nature  tending,  whether 

1  Cf.  Summ.  Theol.  i.  qu.  15,  art.  a.  2  Par.  xiii.  52-54. 


Dante  and  Aquinas.  157 

consciously  or  unconsciously,  towards  God,  as  the 
Last  End  no  less  than  the  Source  of  its  being — 

"  Nell'  ordine  ch'  io  dico  sono  accline 
Tutte  nature,  per  diverse  aorti, 
Piu  al  principle  loro,  e  men  vicine,"  * 

which  is  a  condensation  of  St.  Thomas's  statement 
that  "aliquid  sua  actione  vel  motu  tendit  ad  finem 
dupliciter :  uno  modo  sicut  seipsum  ad  finem  movens, 
sicut  homo :  alio  modo,  sicut  ab  alio  motum  ad  finem 
sicut  sagitta.  .  .  .  Ilia  ergo  quae  rationem  habent 
seipsa  movent  ad  finem.  .  .  .  Ilia  quae  carent  ratione, 
tendunt  in  finem  propter  naturalem  inclinationem, 
quasi  ab  alio  mota."  2 

2.  After  the  science  of  Absolute  Being,  which  is  that 
of  God,  comes  that  of  created  existences  detached 
from  matter,  whether  the  disembodied  souls  of  men, 
or  the  a<T(t>iLaTa  proper,  the  bodiless  ones,  as  St.  Chry- 
sostom  calls  them,  in  their  unfallen  state  as  angels,  or 
in  their  misery  and  ruin  as  devils.  This  vast  sphere 
of  being  is  traversed  by  St.  Thomas  with  great  par 
ticularity  ;  he  follows  these  unseen  existences  into  the 
various  departments  of  their  life  and  activity;  he 
investigates  their  duties,  capacities,  relations  with  each 
other  and  with  living  men.  And  in  all  this  he  gives 
no  deliberate  play  to  imagination,  though  the  subject 
might  well  be  tempting :  he  pursues  his  course  with 
a  cold,  dry,  severe  adherence  to  premises  which  he 

1  Par.  i.  109-111.  «  Stunm.  TheoL  ii.  qu.  i,  art.  a. 


158  Dante  and  Aquinas. 

holds  to  be  axiomatic,  or  at  least  authoritative,  until  a 
vast  world  is  spread  out  before  the  eyes  of  his  readers. 
Others  there  were  in  the  Schools,  no  doubt,  who  ven 
tured  on  these  high  themes ; 

"  perche  in  terra  per  le  vostre  scuole 

fi.  legge  che  1'angelica  natura 
tal,  che  intende,  e  si  ricorda,  e  vuole ; 
Ancor  dir6,  perch  e  tu  veggi  pura 
La  veriti  che  laggiti.  si  confonde, 
Equivocando  in  si  fatta  lettura." J 

But  in  such  lines  as  these  Dante  would  not  permit 
himself  to  think  of  the  teacher  who  is  already 
throned  in  Paradise  among  the  wisest  and  the  holiest. 
No  doubt  Aquinas's  discussions  must  sometimes  seem 
to  us  to  pass  beyond  the  limits  of  the  ascertainable ; 
and  some  who  have  since  expounded  him,  like  Suarez, 
have  extended  his  speculations  not  always,  from  any 
point  of  view,  with  advantage ;  and  much  which  in 
him  was  fresh  and  original  and  reverent,  lost  its  charm 
even  in  a  few  years  when  it  had  been  bandied  to  and 
fro  in  the  Schools  by  men  who  only  saw  in  it  material 
for  exhibiting  logical  dexterity.  But  when  all  deduc 
tions  have  been  made,  this  part  of  the  Summa  remains 
the  great  repertoriurn  of  systematised  religious  thought 
on  this  subject  among  Western  writers,  and  its  remote 
influence  is  traceable  where  we  might  least  expect  it, 
and  where  scholasticism  is  vehemently  denounced, — 
as,  e.g.,  even  in  the  Institutes  of  Calvin. 

1  Par.  xxix.  70-75. 


Dante  and  Aquinas.  1 59 

Twice  in  his  great  work  Aquinas  is  led  to  deal  with 
this  subject.  In  his  survey  of  creation,  the  angels, 
their  substance,  their  numbers,  their  distinctions,  their 
relation  to  the  question  of  probation,  their  relations, 
permanent  and  accidental,  to  the  material  world,  their 
relations  to  the  category  of  space,  the  conditions  and 
limits  of  their  intellectual  life,  their  knowledge  about 
God,  about  the  material  world,  about  mankind,  about 
the  Christian  faith  and  means  of  grace,  their  degree 
of  liability  to  intellectual  or  moral  error,  their  differ 
ences  in  judgment  and  action  arising  from  finiteness 
of  knowledge,  their  hideous  transfiguration  into  devils, 
are  successively  reviewed.1  And,  at  a  later  stage, 
when  he  is  considering,  in  its  broadest  aspects,  the 
influence  of  creatures  over  one  another,  he  encounters 
such  questions  as  the  power  of  one  angel  to  affect  the 
intellect  and  will  of  another,  their  employment  of  any 
thing  corresponding  to  language  in  their  intercourse, 
the  power  of  a  third  angel  to  follow  what  is  passing 
between  two,  the  influence  which  is  wielded  as  a  con 
sequence  of  the  hierarchical  distinctions  between 
angels  revealed  in  Scripture,  the  nature  and  perman 
ence  of  these  distinctions,  the  corresponding  question 
of  distinct  orders  and  governing  power  among  fallen 
spirits,  the  power  of  good  angels  over  material  bodies, 
the  various  influences  which  they  exert  on  human 
beings,  on  their  wills,  on  their  imaginations,  on  their 

1  tfumm.  Theol.  i.  Quattt.  5064. 


160  Dante  and  Aquinas. 

bodily  senses;  their  ministries  of  grace  and  of  justice; 
their  guardianship  of  souls,  and  the  relationships  thus 
involved ;  the  nature,  process,  and  reality  of  tempta 
tion  on  the  part  of  devils,  their  power  of  working  lying 
wonders,  the  limits  of  their  influence  on  mankind, 
and  the  like.1 

Thus,  we  see,  when  Dante  wrote  there  was  a  vast 
body  of  authoritative  language  ready  to  his  hand  on 
the  subject  which  formed,  if  we  may  say  so,  the  very 
framework  and  staple  of  his  poem.  For  from  the 
beginning  of  the  Hell  to  the  close  of  the  Paradise  he 
is  constantly  dealing  with  these  bodiless  existences ; 
and  to  be  acquainted  so  far  as  was  possible  with  what 
might  be  said  without  presumption  respecting  their 
life  and  movements  was  not  less  than  essential  to 
him,  if  he  was  to  write  at  all.  He  is  at  times  so 
fearless,  so  explicit,  at  times  so  reserved  and  vague ; 
he  is  so  altogether  at  ease  and  at  home  in  this 
world  of  mystery,  because  he  has  St.  Thomas  behind 
him. 

We  have  already  seen  that  Dante  keeps  close  to 
Aquinas,  and  rejects  the  authority  of  St.  Jerome  and 
the  Greeks,  in  teaching  that  the  angels  were  created 
coincidently  with  the  rest  of  the  Universe.2  They 
differ  from  men  in  that  they  consist  of  form  without 
matter ;  but  in  their  form  and  essence  they  are  still 
conceived  of  as  distinct  (as  are  capacity  and  act),  and 

i  Summ.  Theol.  Pars  i.  Qusestt.  106-114.  2  Par.  xxix.  37. 


Dante  and  Aquinas.  161 

herein  they  differ  from  God.  So  says  St.  Thomas,1 
and  Dante  is  thinking  of  him  when  Beatrice  explains 
that  at  their  creation, 

"  Forma  e  materia  congiunte  e  purette 
Usciro  ad  esser  che  non  avea  fallo."2 

Aquinas's  striking  a  priori  argument  for  the  existence 
of  beings  who  should  be  more  like  their  Creator  than 
any  invested  with  material  forms3  is  glanced  at  in 
Par.  xxix.  16-19,  and  ms  statement  that  it  is  reason 
able  that  immaterial  beings  should  exceed  in  multi 
tude,  beyond  all  comparison,  beings  clothed  in  matter, 
shapes  the  lines — 

"  Questa  natura  si  oltre  s'  ingrada 

In  numero,  che  mai  non  fu  loquela, 
Ne  concetto  mortal,  che  tanto  vada. 
E  se  tu  guard!  quel  che  si  rivela 
Per  Daniel,  vedrai  che  in  sue  migliaia 
Determinate  numero  si  cela."4 

The  intellectual  life  of  the  angels  consists  in  an 
uninterrupted  sight  of  God.  This  sight  includes 
all  else,  near  and  remote,  past,  present,  and  future. 
There  is  no  division  in  thought,  no  succession  of 
thought,  no  room  for  memory— 

"  Queste  sustan/ie,  poiche  fur  gioconde 
Delia  faccia  di  Dio,  non  volser  viso 
Da  essa,  da  cui  nulla  si  nasconde  : 
Per6  non  hanno  vedere  interciso 
Da  nuovo  obbietto,  e  per6  non  bisogna 
Rimemorar  per  concetto  diviso."0 

And  yet  this  knowledge  of  things  in  God  varies  in 

••  •  9m\*\.  Theol.  L  50,  art.  a.         a  Par.  xxix.  22,  23.        »  Pt  i.  50,  art.  i. 
4  Par.  xxbc.  130-135 ;  cf.  Dan.  vii.  10.  8  Par.  xxix.  76-81. 

L 


1 62  Dante  and  Aquinas. 

degree,  according  to  the  rank  and  capacity  of  the 
angels ; l  the  angels  do  not  know  everything.2  Here 
Dante  has  his  eye  throughout  on  the  discussion  in 
Summ.  Theol.  i.  qu.  57  and  58. 

Dante's  Lucifer  necessarily  suggests  the  familiar 
comparison  with  Milton's ;  and  if  he  is  artistically  less 
interesting,  he  is  much  more  like  the  real  Satan, 
the  Satan  of  Christian  theology,  whether  Biblical  or 
Patristic ;  though  Milton,  it  will  be  remembered,  para 
phrases 

"  vidi  tre  facce  alia  sua  testa  !  "3 
"  his  face, 
Thrice  changed  with  pale  ire,  envy,  and  despair."4 

St.  Thomas  here  as  elsewhere  steadies  and  chastens 
the  imagination  of  Dante ;  often  when  the  poet  might 
seem  to  be  giving  the  utmost  reins  to  fancy,  he  is  in 
reality  following  the  divine.  Take  the  vivid  lines  in 
which  the  instantaneous  character  of  the  probation  of 
the  angels  is  described : — 

"  Ne  giugneriesi,  numerando,  al  venti 
Si  tosto,  come  degli  Angeli  parte 
Turb6  il  suggetto  dei  vostri  elementi."8 
"  Ere  one  had  reckoned  twenty,  e'en  so  soon 
Part  of  the  angels  fell ;  and  in  their  fall 
Confusion  to  your  elements  ensued. " 

But  this  is  a  result  of  St.  Thomas's  principle 
that  "est  proprium  naturae  Angelicae  quod  natu- 
ralem  perfectionein  non  per  discursum  acquirat,  sed 
statim  per  naturam  habeat."6  He  allows  of  two 

1  Par.  i.  103  sqq.  2  76.  xx.  70-72  ;  xxi.  91-96.          3  Inf.  xxxiv.  38. 

4  Paradise  Lost,  iv.  144.    6  Par.  xxix.  49-51.    «  Summ,  Theol,  i.  62.  art.  5. 


Dante  and  Aquinas.  163 

instants  (instantia),  as  implied  in  the  distinctness  of 
probation  from  blessedness  "secundum  successionem  in 
actibus,"  as  he  says ;  but  that  is  all  In  one  moment 
Lucifer  had  in  his  pride  chosen  an  end  of  action,  "  ad 
quod  naturae  suae  viribus  potuit  pcrvenire,"1  turning 
away  his  desire  from  that  supernatural  blessedness 
which  comes  of  the  grace  of  God,  and  thus — 

"  Principle  del  cader  fu  il  maledetto 
Superbir  di  colui,  che  tu  vedesti 
Da  tutti  i  pesi  del  mondo  costretto."8 

Dante,  like  St.  Thomas,  knows  of  no  dTroKardo-Taa-is 
of  the  fallen  angels,  no  possible  lapse  of  the  blessed. 
Satan  is 

"  quel  nial  volcr,  che  pur  inal  chiede, 
Con  1'  intelletto,"8 

while  the  angels  never  turn  their  gaze  from  the  Face 
of  God— 

"  non  volser  viso 
Daewa,"4 

since  "Et  voluntas  bonorum  angelorum  confirmata 
est  in  bono,  et  voluntas  daemonum  obstinata  est  in 
malo." 5 

While  Beatrice  is  engaged  in  pointing  out  to  Dante 
the  nine  orders  of  angels,  she  pauses  at  the  close  of 
the  first  three  to  decide  the  eager  controversy  as  to 
the  formal  cause  of  Blessedness.  The  Cherubim, 
Seraphim,  and  Thrones  all  are  blessed  in  that  they 
see  deepest  into  the  central  and  eternal  Truth— 

"  in  che  »i  queta  ogn'  intcllctto. "  * 

'  Summ.  Thfol  I  63.  art.  3,  5,  6.      »  Par.  xxix.  55-57.      •  Pitrg.  v.  na. 
«  Par.  xxix.  77.        •  Summ.  Thcol.  i.  64.  art.  a.        •  Par.  xxviii   108. 


164  Dante  and  Aquinas. 

Hence  may  be  seen 

"  come  si  fonda 

L'  esser  beato  nell'  atto  che  vede, 
Non  in  quel  ch'  ama,  che  poscia  seconda.'' l 

This  is  in  deference  to  the  somewhat  strained  reason 
ing  of  St.  Thomas,  in  a  passage  in  which  apparently  the 
schoolman  gets  the  better  of  the  mystic.  "Blessed 
ness,"  he  says,  "  cannot  consist  in  the  action  of  the 
will ;  because  the  will  is  constantly  directed  towards 
an  absent  object,  and  desire  of  such  an  object  is  clearly 
not  the  attainment  of  an  end  but  only  a  motion 
towards  an  end.  The  will  only  experiences  enjoy 
ment  when  the  end  which  it  pursues  is  present  to  it ; 
but  an  object  does  not  become  present  because  the 
will  takes  pleasure  in  it.  If  then  an  end  is  to  be  pre 
sent  to  the  will,  something  else  than  the  action  of  the 
will  must  make  it  so;  and  an  intellectual  end  does 
become  present  to  us  by  the  action  of  the  intellect 
whereby  the  end  itself  thus  becomes  present  to  the 
will.  Thus  the  essence  of  blessedness  consists  at  last 
in  an  act  of  the  intellect."  This  analysis  is  not  easily 
reconciled  with  the  general  experience  that  the  essence 
of  happiness  does  reside  in  the  free  play  or  exercise  of 
affection  upon  a  perfect  object,  or  with  the  prominence 
given  to  the  Seraphim  in  the  received  angelology  of 
the  Church ;  but  Dante  is  hi  the  hands  of  St.  Thomas, 
>and  writes  accordingly.2 

1  Par.  xxviii.  109-111.         2  Summ.  Theol.  Prima  Secunda;,  qu.  3,  art.  4. 


Dante  and  Aquinas.  165 

3.  Dante  betrays  the  guiding  influence  of  St. 
Thomas  very  conspicuously  when  he  touches  upon 
human  nature  (in  the  narrower  sense  of  the  term) 
and  on  the  human  soul.  Here  again  the  Convito 
supplies  more  illustrations  than  the  Divina  Corn- 
media:  but  as  regards  the  creation  of  each  single 
soul  l  (in  opposition  to  the  Traducianist  hypothesis), 
the  function  of  apprehension — 

••  ch'  a  ragion  discorso  ammanua,''2 

the  large  experimental  basis  of  our  knowledge — 
"  Principium  nostrae  cognitionis  est  a  sensu," 3  and,  of 
course,  in  such  questions  as  the  theology  of  the  Fall,4 
the  two  are  in  close  accord.  How  closely  Dante 
keeps  Aquinas  in  view  in  his  allusions  to  the  powers 
of  the  human  mind, —  to  memory,5  imagination,0 
understanding,7  will,8 — is  shown  by  Simonetti.9 

But  especially  does  Dante  follow  Aquinas  in  the 
point  of  his  psychology  which  Aquinas  had,  unques 
tionably,  most  at  heart.  Like  his  great  master 
Albert,  Aquinas  viewed  with  alarm  the  progress  which 
was  made  by  the  Averroistic  theory  of  the  unity  and 

1  Pwrg.  xxv.  65  tqq.  ;  Summ.  Theol.  i.  118.  a. 

•  Purg.  xxix.  49  ;  Summ.  Theol.  i.  84.  5. 
>  fhimm.  Theol.  i.  84.  6 ;  cf.  Par.  iv.  40. 

4  Par.  xxri.  114-117;  Summ.  Theol.  aa  aae,  qu.  163,  art.  i. 

•  Par.  L  4-12  ;  Summ.  Theol.  i.  qu.  78.  4. 

•  Pwrg.  xvii.  13-16;  cf.  Summ.  Theol.  i.  qu.  in.  3. 
7  Par.  il  44 ;  Summ.  Theol.  i.  qu.  76. 

•  Par.  ir.  109  ;  Summ.  Theol.  i.  qu.  63.  i. 

•  Philotophia  di  Dante,  pp.  164.192  (Naples,  1845). 


166  Dante  and  Aquinas. 

indivisibility,  whether  of  the  intellectus  possibilis  or 
the  intellectus  agens  in  separation  from  the  soul  itself, 
a  theory  which  was,  as  he  saw,  irreconcilable  with 
the  personal  immortality  of  man.  One  sees  how 
carefully  St.  Thomas  is  on  his  guard  against  this 
throughout  the  psychological  parts  of  his  work:1 
"Omnes  potentiae  animae  comparantur  ad  animam 
solam  sicut  ad  principium.  Sed  quaedam  potentiae 
comparantur  ad  animam  solam  sicut  ad  subjectum, 
ut  intellectus  et  voluntas:  et  hujusmodi  potentiae 
necesse  est  quod  maneant  in  anima  corpore  destructo." 
Here  we  see  the  meaning  of  Dante  in  Statius's 
discourse,  where  the  "piu  savio  di  te  errante"2  is 
doubtless  Averroes — 

"  che,  per  sua  dottriua,  fe  disgiunto 
Dall'  anima  il  possibile  intelletto,"3 

even  if  it  be  true,  as  M.  Kenan  contends,4  that  Aver 
roes  only  meant  the  intellectus  agens. 

So  the  significant  expression, "  one  single  soul,  which 
lives  and  feels  and  revolves  within  itself," 

' '  un'  alma  sola 
Che  vive  e  sente,  e  s6  in  s&  rigira,"5 

and  the  statement  that  when  Lachesis  has  no  more 
thread,  the  soul  looses  itself  from  the  flesh  and  bears 
away  with  it  both  the  human  and  the  divine — what 
belongs  to  natural  character  and  to  supernatural 

i  Summ.  Theol.  i.  79,  art.  2 ;  ib.  i.  77,  art.  8.  2  purg.  xxv.  63. 

3  Ib.  64,  65.  *  Averr.  ii.  2.  8  Purg.  xxv.  74,  75. 


Dante  and  Aquinas.  167 

grace — but  also  that  while  the  other  powers  are 
mute: 

"  Memoria,  intelligenza,  e  volontade, 
In  atto  molto  piii  che  prima  acute. " 1 

Again,  the  passage  at  the  opening  of  Purg.  iv.  1-12 
is  in  point,  where  he  expressly  notices  "that  error 
which  believes  that  one  soul  above  another  is  en 
kindled  in  us."  When  any  one  power  of  the  soul 
duly  performs  any  of  its  functions,  the  soul  cannot 
be  acted  on  by  any  other  power ;  it  is  for  the  time 
being  absorbed ;  it  heeds  not  the  flight  of  time ;  the 
faculty,  e.g.,  which  listens  is  at  large,  that  which  keeps 
the  soul  entire  is  bound.  That  two  powers  cannot 
manifest  themselves  at  once,  as  would  be  the  case  if 
there  were  two  souls,  is  expressly  stated  by  Aquinas, 
who  considers  the  impossibility  of  two  souls  proved 
"per  hoc  quod  una  operatic  animae  cum  fuerit  in- 
tensa  impedit  aliam."  2 

The  guiding  influence  of  St.  Thomas  is  especially 
observable  hi  Dante's  references  to  the  doctrine  of 
Grace.  Thus  he  places  Trajan  and  Ripheus — 

"Ripheus  justissimus  unus 
Qui  fuit  in  Teucris  et  servantiasimus  aeqai"* 

— in  the  circle  round  the  pupil  of  the  Eagle  in  Para 
dise.  Trajan's  case  is,  theologically  speaking,  more 
disturbed  by  the  tradition  of  the  extraordinary  power 

1  Purg.  xxv.  83,  84.  *  Summ.  Theol.  i.  qu.  76,  art  3. 

>  Virgil,  A  en.  ii.  427. 


1 68  Dante  and  Aquinas. 

of  the  prayers  of  St.  Gregory,  but  Kipheus  is  visited 
by  and  corresponds  with  preventive  grace, — which 
led  to  his  conversion  to  Christianity — centuries  before 
Christ  had  come — 

"  per  grazia,  che  da  si  profonda 
Fontana  stilla,  che  mai  creatura 
Non  pinse  1'  occhio  insino  alia  prim'  onda, 

Tutto  BUG  amor  laggiti  pose  a  drittura ; 
Per  che,  di  grazia  in  grazia,  Dio  gli  aperse 
L'  occhio  alia  nostra  redenzion  futura  : 

Ond*  ei  credette  in  quella,  e  non  sofferse 
Da  indi  il  puzzo  piu  del  paganesmo, 
E  riprendeane  le  genti  perverse."1 

This  is  exactly  Aquinas's  teaching :  "  Deus  facienti 
quod  est  in  se  non  denegat  gratiam."  Cornelius,  he 
says,  is  in  point:  he  had  implicit  faith  before  the 
Gospel  truth  was  made  clear  to  him.2  St.  Augustine 
means  this  when  he  speaks  of  "  inchoationes  fidei." 3 
Aquinas  indeed  makes  theological  room  for  Dante's 
account  of  Trajan's  deliverance.4  The  theory  of  con 
gruous  merit,  extended  to  enable  one  man  to  win  for 
another  the  first  grace  in  the  order  towards  conversion, 
is  explained  by  a  reference  to  Scripture  language 
respecting  the  friendship  that  exists  between  God  and 
souls  in  a  state  of  grace :  "  Congruum  est  secundum 
amicitiae  proportionem,  ut  Deus  impleat  hominis 
voluntatem  in  salvatione  alterius." 

We  must  omit  to  trace  Thomas's  influence  in  the 
doctrines  of  the  Atonement,  of  the  Church,  of  the 

»  Par.  xx.  118-126.  2  2a  2£B>  qu.  I0.  art.  4. 

3  Ad  Simpl  i.  2.  §  2  (Ben.  ed.  vi.  89d).         4  ia  2Xi  qu.  II4>  art.  6. 


ERRATA. 

Page  169,  line  17,  before  "  Lucy"  add  "who  summoned. 
Ibid,  note  2,  read  "xxiii."  for  "xxii." 
Ibid,  note  3,  add  reference  "Inf.  n.  94  sqq." 


Dante  and  Aquinas.  \  69 


Sacraments,  and  of  the  Four  Last  Things,  as  referred 
to  by  Dante. 

II. 

THE   RESTRAINING   INFLUENCE  OF  ST.  THOMAS. 

But  there  is  one  subject  on  which  it  may  be  said 
without  impropriety  that  poetry  has  done  much  to 
mislead  theology,  in  which  we  may  trace  not  indis 
tinctly  the  restraining  influence  of  St.  Thomas  on  the 
mind  of  Dante.  Speaking  generally,  both  poet  and 
theologian  are  agreed  in  assigning  a  position  of  extra 
ordinary  glory  to  the  Virgin  Mother  of  our  Lord. 
The  strongest  thing  that  St.  Thomas  permits  himself 
to  say  is  perhaps  this.  When  treating  of  the  Divine 
Omnipotence,  ho  says  that  the  Humanity  of  our 
Lord  and  the  Blessed  Virgin  "habent  quandam 
dignitatem  infinitam  ex  bono  infinite;  quod  est 
Deus."1  In  Dante  she  is  the  "donna  del  cielo,"-' 
Lucy,  who  moved 

"  la  tna  Donna, 
Quando  chinavi  a  ruinar  le  ciglia.  "  3 

"  Thy  lady, 
When  on  the  edge  of  ruin  closed  thy  eye." 

And  he  makes  St.  Bernard  say— 

"  Vergine  madre,  figlia  del  tuo  Figlio, 
Umile  ed  alta  pifc  che  creatura, 
Termine  fisso  d*  eterno  consiglio, 
Tu  sei  colei  che  1*  umana  natura 
Nobilitaati  il,  che  il  suo  Fattore 
Xon  dUdegn6  di  farsi  «ua  fattura."4 


t.  Theol.  i.  qu.  25,  art.  6.  a  /'or-  xxii.  106. 

3  Par.  xxxii.  137.  *  /*•  "»UL  «•*• 


170  Dante  and  Aquinas. 

And  Buonconte  of  Montefeltro,  who  fought  on  the 
Ghibelline  side,  and  was  slain  at  Campaldino,  tells 
Dante  how  he  repented  in  the  act  of  dying — 

"  Quivi  perdei  la  vista,  e  la  parola 
Nel  nome  di  Maria  finii,"1 

while  the  demon  complained  to  his  guardian  angel 
that  he  had  been  robbed  of  a  soul  "per  una  lagri- 
metta."  In  Purgatory  again,  they  who  had  delayed 
repentance  sing  the  pathetic  and  mournful  Salve 
Regina  on  the  green  and  on  the  flowers,2  while  in  the 
ninth  heaven,  around  Mary,  the  "  coronata  fiamma " 
of  the  blessed  chants,  the  Paschal  antiphon — 

"  Regina  caeli  cantando  si  dolce, 

Che  mai  da  me  non  si  parti  il  diletto."8 

It  is  in  this  twenty-third  canto  of  the  Paradise 
that  the  poet  surrenders  himself  to  an  ecstasy  of 
refined  enthusiasm  at  the  feet  of  the  Virgin  Mother — 

"  Quivi  e  la  rosa  in  che  il  Verbo  Divino 
Carne  si  fece."4 

She  bears — 

1 '  II  nome  del  bel  fior,  ch'  io  sempre  invoco 
E  mane  e  sera,"8 

and  in  the  highest  sphere — 

"  tutti  gli  altri  lumi 
Facean  sonar  lo  nome  di  MARIA.  "  « 

For,  as  St.  John  explains,  she  alone,  like  her  Divine 
Son,  had  carried  her  body  into  heaven 

"  Con  le  due  stole  nel  beato  chiostro 
Son  le  due  luci  sole  che  saliro. " 7 

i  Purg.  v.  loo,  101.          a  /j.  yii.  82.         s  par.  xxiii.  I28>  I29 
4  Par-  "i"-  73,  74-      B  lb.  88,  89.       6  /ft.  IIO(  IIIt       7  /j.  xxv.  I2?>  128> 


Dante  and  Aquinas.  \  7 1 

And  when  Beatrice  has  returned  to  her  throne,  St 
Bernard  points  to — 


and  to 


"  la  Regina  del  cielo,  ond*  i'  ardo 
Tutto  d'  amor," 1 


"  il  glorioso  scanno 
Delia  Donna  del  cielo, "  * 


high  between  the  saints  of  the  Old  and  New  Testa 
ment,  and  he  tells  Dante  that  if  he  would  indeed 
penetrate  what  remains  of  the  Vision  of  Heaven  he 
must  unite  with  him  in  the  supplication  to  ^fa^y — 

"  Regina,  che  puoi 
Ci6che  tu  vuoli,  che  conservi  sani, 
Dopo  tanto  veder,  gli  affetti  suoi,"3 

and  then  the  poet  pierces  to  the  inmost  shrine,  and 
enjoys  at  least  a  glimpse  of  the  Highest  Existence. 

Such  is  the  position  assigned  to  Mary :  partly  the 
severe  and  inevitable  result  of  serious  belief  in  such  a 
doctrine  as  the  Divine  Incarnation,  but  partly  also 
the  exaggeration  and  surplusage  of  popular  fancy  and 
poetic  ecstasy.  This  idea  of  Mary,  arising  in  part  out 
of  her  relation  to  the  economy  of  the  Divine  Redemp 
tion,  is  supplemented  in  Dante  by  a  special  sense  of 
her  personal  and  ethical  beauty.  It  is  from  Mary 
that  the  souls  in  Purgatory  gain  an  example  of  each 
of  the  virtues  which  are  opposed  to  each  of  the  deadly 
sins.  They  who  are  expiating  pride  behold  Mary  at 

i  Par.  xxxi.  100,  101.         *  76.  zjcziL  28.  29.         »  75.  zzziii  34  36. 


1 72  Dante  and  Aquinas. 

the  Annunciation  humbly  accepting  the  Divine  pur 
pose — 

"  quella, 

Che  ad  aprir  1'  alto  amor  volse  la  chiave. 
Ed  avea  in  atto  impressa  esta  favella, 
EcceAncillaDei."1 

Among-  the  voices  of  the  unseen  spirits  which  fall 
upon  the  ear  of  the  envious,  the  first  recalls  Mary's 
care  for  others  at  the  feast  of  Cana — 

"  La  prima  voce  che  pass6  volando, 

Vinum  non  habent,  altamente  disse."2 

The  angry  are  confronted  in  vision  with  the  scene 
in  the  temple,  after  the  disappearance  of  the  Child 
Jesus  among  the  doctors,  where 

"in  un  tempio  pin  persone  : 
Ed  una  donna  in  sull'  entrar  con  atto 

Dolce  di  madre,  dicer  :  Figliuol  mio, 

Perche  hai  tu  cosl  verso  noi  fatto  ? 
Ecco,  dolenti,  lo  tuo  padre  ed  io 

Ti  cercavamo.     E  come  qui  si  tacque, 

Gi6,  che  pareva  prima,  dispario."  3 

And  when,  in  the  fourth  circle,  the  mighty  crowd 
of  the  slothful  overtake  Dante — 

"  due  dinanzi  gridavan  piangendo  : 
Maria  corse  con  fretta  alia  montagna,"  4 

—referring  to  the  Visitation. 

And  before  Hugh  Capet  describes  the  miseries 
which  avarice  had  brought  upon  the  royal  house  of 

1  Pur9'  *•  41-44-  2  Ib.  xiii.  28,  29. 

»  lb.  xv.  87-93.  4  rb.  xviii.  09,  ioo. 


Dante  and  Aquinas.  \  73 

France,  he  calls  to  mind  the  poverty  which  surrounded 
the  cradle  of  Him  Who,  when  He  was  rich,  for  our 
sakes  became  poor,  that  we,  through  His  poverty, 
might  be  rich — 

"  Dolce  Maria : 

Povera  fosti  tanto, 

Quanto  veder  si  pu6  per  quell*  ospizio, 
Ove  sponesti  il  tuo  portato  santo." ' 

Again,  in  the  sixth  circle,  a  voice  from  within  the 
leaves  of  the  mysterious  tree  reminds  the  gluttonous, 
as  the  unseen  angel  had  reminded  the  envious,  of 
Mary  at  the  feast  of  Cana,  but  now  with  another  moral 
object— 

"  Poi  disse  :  Piii  pensava  Maria,  onde 
Fosser  le  nozze  orrevoli  ed  intere, 
Ch'allaBuabocca."' 

Once  more,  as  the  spirits  who  are  being  cleansed 
from  sins  of  impurity  sing  the  matin  hymn,  Summe 
Deus  Clementine  in  "  the  bosom  of  the  great  heart," 
they  recall  Mary's  example  at  the  Annunciation  ere 
they  begin  it  again— 

"  Appresso  il  fine  ch'  a  quell'  inno  fassi, 
Gridavano  alto  :    Kirum  non  coynotto ; 
Indi  ricominciavan  1'  inno  bawl."  3 

This  is  no  accident  when  Mary  thus  appears  as 
representing  at  each  of  these  critical  points  of  human 
activity  practical  virtue  in  its  ideal  completeness  us 
confronted  with  the  seven  typical  forms  of  sin.  This 
ethical  glory  of  Mary  runs  parallel  with  that  which 

»  Pvrg.  xx.  19-35.  «  Ib.  xiii.  142-144.  '  /&•  «* 


1 74  Dante  and  Aquinas. 

arises  from  her  unique  share  in  the  Divine  Incarna 
tion  :  and  the  two  currents  of  thought  meet  and  inter 
mingle  in  the  Paradiso.  In  the  Paradiso  it  might 
seem  again  and  again  as  if  the  poet  must  perforce 
yield  to  the  impulse  and  ecstasy  which  rules  him,  and 
place  the  Virgin  Mother  altogether  beyond  the  sphere 
of  sin  by  proclaiming  her  immaculate  in  her  concep 
tion.  There  are  two  or  three  points  at  which  it  might 
have  seemed  natural,  almost  inevitable,  had  it  been 
possible,  for  him  to  give  expression  to  this  idea ;  but 
it  is  only  of  Mary's  Son  that  Dante  sings — 

*'  I'uom  che  nacque  e  visse  senza  pecca. "  x 

What  was  the  restraining  influence?  A  century 
and  a  half  had  passed  since  the  establishment  of  the 
festival  of  the  Conception  by  the  Canons  of  Lyons  and 
the  famous  protest  of  St.  Bernard.  St.  Bonaventure, 
while  shrinking  from  the  full  operation  of  the  doctrine, 
goes  very  near  asserting  it.2  Before  Dante  died,  Duns 
Scotus,  a  young  student  from  Northumberland,  had, 
within  the  newly-built  walls  of  Merton,  shaped  the 
speculations  which  undoubtedly  gave  a  most  powerful 
impulse  to  the  dogma  throughout  the  West.  The 
restraining  influence  was  beyond  question  that  of  St. 
Thomas :  and  that  St.  Thomas  should  have  hesitated 
as  he  did  is  remarkable,  because  his  principle  that  a 
solemnity  sanctioned  by  the  Church — and  this  was 

»  li\f.  xsxiv.  115.  2  Comm.  in  Lib.  Hi.  Sent. 


Dante  and  Aquinas.  175 

already  the  case  with  the  festival  of  the  Conception- 
implies  the  sanctity  of  its  object,  must  have  inclined 
him  in  an  opposite  direction.  He  is  governed,  how 
ever,  by  two  considerations,  one  of  which  he  gets  from 
Scripture  and  one  from  St.  Augustine.  According  to 
Augustine  the  ordinary  laws  of  human  birth  involve 
conception  in  a  transmitted  original  sin.  According 
to  Scripture,  God  the  Son  is  the  Saviour  of  all  men,1 
and  therefore,  argues  Thomas,  of  Mary,  and  therefore 
there  was  something  in  Mary  from  which  she  needed 
to  be  saved.  The  attitude  of  St.  Thomas  on  this 
question  obliged  and  enabled  his  Order  for  six  hundred 
years  to  resist,  first  Franciscans,  then  Jesuits,— a 
religious  world  perpetually  in  arms  around  them : — 
their  resistance  has  only  ceased  in  our  own  day.  And 
not  the  least  of  the  first  results  of  that  attitude  was 
this,  that  in  the  Divina  Commedia  Mary  is  everything 
else, — but  she  is  not  conceived  immaculate. 

On  the  other  hand,  in  the  sphere  of  politics,  more 
perhaps  than  elsewhere,  the  poet  is  independent  of  the 
divine.  Aquinas,  who  looked  at  politics  in  the  light 
of  abstract  truth,  even  to  a  great  extent  in  his  De  re- 
gimine  principum,  was  practically  what  would  have 
been  called  now-a-days  a  liberal.  He  held  that  the 
will  of  the  people  was,  at  any  rate,  one  channel  through 
which  the  Divine  Will  respecting  governmentexpreffled 
itself,  and  after  considering  the  Scriptural  passages 

i  i  Tim.  iv.  10. 


1 76  Dante  and  Aquinas. 

which  were  used  so  largely  by  our  Caroline  divines  for 
a  doctrine  of  absolute  non-resistance,  he  concludes 
that "  principibus  saecularibus  in  tantum  homo  obedire 
tenetur,  in  quantum  ordo  justitiae  requirit.  Et  ideo 
si  non  habeant  jus  turn  principatum  sed  usurpatum, 
vel  si  injusta  praecipiant,  non  tenentur  eis  subditi 
obedire:  nisi  forte  per  accidens,  propter  vitandum 
scandalum  vel  periculuin." l  Kindred  doctrines  were 
no  doubt  carried  forward  to  sanction  terrible  conse 
quences  in  the  sixteenth  and  seventeenth  centuries 
by  the  Jesuit  theologians.  But  we  cannot  imagine 
Aquinas  placing  Brutus,  the  slayer  of  Caesar,  in  the 
jaws  of  Lucifer,  in  the  lowest  depth  of  hell.  Aquinas 
would  have  approached  the  question  as  a  theologian ; 
he  would  have  held  probably  that  the  act  of  Brutus 
made  it  impossible  to  entertain  the  hope  that  there 
was  in  his  case  such  correspondence  with  prevenient 
i^race  as  he  would  have  allowed  in  some  Pagans. 
But  if  hell,  like  heaven,  has  many  mansions,  the 
man  of  general  lofty  integrity,  who  was  also  the 
emancipator  of  Rome,  even  though  the  emancipation 
was  attempted  by  a  deadly  crime,  would  not  have 
been  placed  in  the  lowest  and  the  last.  In  Dante  the 
passions  of  Ghibelline  politics  invest  the  murder  of 
Caesar  with  the  darkest  forms  of  inhuman  atrocity, 
and  Landino  in  vain  endeavours  to  save  the  judg- 

«  Summ.  Theol.  2a  2ce,  qu.  104,  art.  6.    Utrum  Christiani  tenentur  saecu 
laribus  pottttatibus  obedire. 


Dante  and  Aquinas.  177 

ment  of  the  great  poet  at  the  expense  of  the  obvious 
meaning  of  the  text. 

These  are  but  fragments  of  a  vast  subject,  upon 
which  a  few  dashing  generalisations,  perhaps  less 
accurate  than  bold,  would  have  been  more  welcome. 
But  the  truth  is  that  a  really  faithful  treatment  of 
such  a  theme  would  rather  lie  in  a  close  study  of  the 
texts  of  Dante  and  St.  Thomas  respectively  within 
some  very  narrow  and  clearly  marked  out  depart 
ment,  whether  of  philosophy  or  theology.  I  have  only 
recognised  this  when  it  was  too  late  to  act  upon  it. 
As  it  is,  perhaps  enough  has  been  said  to  show  that, 
if  it  is  inaccurate  to  call  Aquinas  the  most  poetical  of 
theologians,  since  though  he  could  write  good  hymns, 
his  theological  methods  were  severely  prosaic,  it  is 
true,  however,  that  Dante,  besides  being  much  else, 
is,  upon  the  whole,  the  most  theological  of  Christian 
poets. 


DANTE    AND    THE    FEANCISCANS.1 

TN  two  former  papers  I  made  an  attempt  to  trace, 
•*-  within  narrow  limits,  and  only  in  a  fragmentary 
manner  within  those  limits,  the  relation  of  Dante's 
mind,  as  we  know  it  in  the  Divina  Commedia,  to  the 
thought,  but  more  particularly  to  the  theological 
thought,  of  St.  Thomas  Aquinas.  It  is  not,  perhaps, 
too  much  to  say  that  Dante  holds  St.  Thomas, 
beyond  any  other  religious  teacher,  as  his  master; 
and  that  hi  this  we  have,  if  it  were  needed,  a  new 
proof  of  his  own  insight  and  genius,  as  anticipating 
in  a  remarkable  degree  the  slowly-reached  but  de 
liberate  verdict  of  a  later  day.  For  although  Aquinas 
enjoyed  immense  authority  among  his  contemporaries, 
yet  it  was  disputed,  and  in  Dante's  own  lifetime,  by 
some  very  considerable  writers,  such  as  Harry  of 
Ghent,  a  monk  of  Aquinas's  own  order,  whose  reputa 
tion  as  a  teacher  in  Paris  earned  for  him  the  title  of 
Doctor  Solemnis,  and  who  died  in  1 293,  at  the  age  of 
seventy-six,  as  Archdeacon  of  Tournay.  Even  before 
his  death  St.  Thomas  was  accused  not  only  of  bad 
philosophy  but  of  bad  theology.  As  we  know  from 

1  This  Paper  was  read  before  the  Oxford  Dante  Society  on  May  19, 
173 


^Dante  and  the  Franciscans.  179 

the  only  treatise  of  his  in  which  his  habitual  im- 
passiveness  is  laid  aside  for  the  finer  irony  of  an 
unwilling  controversialist,1  he  was  accused  of  denying 
the  doctrine  of  the  Creation,  because  he  insisted  that 
it  did  not  admit  of  scientific  demonstration.  His 
reply  silenced  his  opponents;  but  he  was  no  sooner 
laid  in  his  grave  in  1274,  than  his  critics  resumed 
their  attacks.  Dante  can  scarcely  have  failed  to 
know  that  in  1276,  within  two  years  of  the  death  of 
St  Thomas,  a  Board  of  Doctors  of  Divinity  in  the 
University  of  Paris,  presided  over  by  Stephen  Teiii- 
pier,  who  was  from  1 268  to  1 279  bishop  of  the  diocese, 
solemnly  condemned  as  heretical  three  propositions 
extracted  from  St.  Thomas,  and  excommunicated  any 
who  should  maintain  them.  It  ought  in  justice 
to  be  remembered  that  this  sentence  was  not  only 
approved  by  the  theological  faculty  of  the  University 
of  Oxford,— then,  it  would  seem,  as  in  later  days, 
somewhat  given  to  follow  the  lead  of  rival  seats  of 
learning, — but  the  Oxford  doctors,  guided  by  the  then 
Archbishop  of  Canterbury,  Robert  Kilwarby,2  himself, 
strange  to  say,  a  Dominican,  succeeded  in  saving  their 
own  character  for  originality  in  this  department  of 
research  by  extracting  and  condemning  a  fourth 
heretical  proposition  from  the  writings  of  St  Thomas. 

lOptiBcnlum  de  JSternitate  mundi  contra  murniuratores. 

«  Robert  Ktlwarby,  Primate  from  1273  to  1279,  when  be  resigned  the 
See  on  being  made  Cardinal  of  Oporto,  and  WM  succovded  by  ' 
-Collier,  Ecd.  Hi*,  ii.  546. 


1 80  Dante  and  the  Franciscans. 

Whether  Dante  knew  of  these  controversial  enter 
prises  or  not,  he  was  entirely  unaffected  by  them. 
He  certainly  detected  in  the  mind  of  the  greatest 
teacher  of  the  thirteenth  century  those  elements 
which  command  the  attentive  respect  of  men  when 
the  changes  of  thought  and  feeling  which  come  with 
time  have  had  their  full  range  of  influence.  When  the 
Council  of  Trent  met  in  the  Church  of  Santa  Maria 
Maggiore  in  that  city,  the  Summa  of  Aquinas  was 
placed  side  by  side  with  the  Bible  in  the  midst  of  the 
assembled  bishops,  and  on  the  other  hand  he,  and 
with  one  exception  he  alone  among  the  schoolmen,  has 
outlived  the  influence  of  the  Keformation  on  its  own 
ground.  To  take  two  of  our  own  divines :  Hooker  is 
under  great,  though  it  must  be  added  too  often  unac 
knowledged,  obligations  to  him  ;  Sanderson  owes  hhr 
scarcely  less  a  debt,  which  he  is  not  afraid  to  acknow 
ledge.  And  when  the  conventional  contempt  for 
scholasticism — a  literary  fashion  which  was  in  the 
main  the  product  of  ignorance  endeavouring  to  make 
itself  respectable  by  taking  shelter  partly  under  the 
true  but  misapplied  doctrines  of  the  Novum  Organum, 
partly  under  the  forms  of  the  philosophy  of  Locke — 
when  this  had  spent  itself,  and  men  had  begun  to 
suspect  that  they  had  been  turning  their  backs  on 
one  of  the  most  interesting  chapters  in  the  history  of 
the  human  mind,  Aquinas  emerges  from  the  clouds 
as  still  the  teacher  who  beyond  all  others  attracts  and 


Dante  and  tJie  Franciscans.  \  8 1 

repays  the  modern  student  who  would  learn  what  the 
extraordinary  mental  activity  of  the  thirteenth  century, 
exercised  as  it  was  on  very  imperfect  materials,  has 
still  to  teach  him.  And  the  triumphs  of  Aquinas, 
ancient  and  modern,  are  the  triumphs  of  Dante. 

But  it  is  impossible  to  forget  that  side  by  side  with 
Aquinas  and  the  Order  of  St.  Dominic — of  whoso  learn 
ing  and  method  Aquinas  was  the  highest  expression 
— there  was  another  rival  Order,  with  teachers  and  a 
temper  of  its  own,  which  could  not  but  arrest  the 
attention,  if  it  did  not  equally  control  the  mind,  of 
the  poet.  What  was  the  mental  attitude  of  Dante 
towards  the  Order  of  St.  Francis  and  those  of  the 
earlier  teachers  of  whom  he  knew  or  might  have 
known  something  ? 


Here  it  must  be  remembered  that  Dante  reflects 
an  unquestioned  belief  of  religious  people  in  his  day, 
that  the  establishment  of  the  Dominican  and  Fran 
ciscan  Orders  was  a  signal  illustration  of  Christ's 
providential  care  of  His  Church.  It  was 

«'  La  provvidcnza,  che  goveroa  il  mondo 

Con  quel  consiglio  ncl  quale  ogni  Mpetto 
Create  fc  vinto  pria  cho  vada  al  fondo." ' 

It  was  this  Providence  which  ordained  two  princes 
(Dominic  and  Francis)  for  the  Church's  benefit,  to  be 

i  Par.  xi.  28-30. 


1 82  Dante  and  the  Franciscans. 

on  this  and  that  side  of  the  Church's  path  a  guide 
to  her — 

"  Due  Principi  ordin6  in  suo  favore, 
Che  quinci  e  quindi  le  fosser  per  guida. " l 

This  view,  which  is  placed  by  Dante  in  the  mouth 
of  St.  Thomas,  is  echoed  with  greater  detail  by  St. 
Bonaventure.  The  Christian  army,  he  says,  was 
moving  slowly  after  its  standards ;  it  was  sadly  need 
ing  confidence  and  discipline — 

"  dietro  all'  insegna 
Si  movea  tardo,  sospeccioso  e  raro  "  2 

— doubtful  about  the  faith  and  reduced  in  numbers. 
Then  it  was  that  the  heavenly  Emperor  provided  two 
champions,  who  by  word  and  action  would  rally  the 
wandering  host — 

"  lo  imperador  che  sempre  regna, 
Provvide  alia  milizia,  ch'  era  in  forse. "  3 

He  raised  up 

"  due  campioni,  al  cui  fare,  al  cui  dire 
Lo  popol  disviato  si  raccorse."4 

There  was  no  question  with  Dante  that  each  founder 
was  conspicuous  in  sanctity,  or  that  each  Order  was 
necessary  to  the  Church— 

"  com'  elli  ad  una  militaro,- 
Cos!  la  gloria  loro  insieme  luca.  "8 

And  yet  there  was  a  broad  distinction  between  the 
two  Orders,  observable  in  their  respective  founders, 

»  Par.  xi.  35,  36.  *Ib.  xii.  38,  39.  s  /j.  4Oj  4X. 

« Ib.  44,  45.  o  Ib.  35,  36. 


Dante  and  the  Franciscans.  183 

and  in  the  main  adhering  to  them.  Francis  was  a 
man  of  practice,  Dominic  a  man  of  speech — 

"  Al  cui  fare,  al  cui  dire." 

Francis  would  restore  the  life  of  the  Church ;  Dominic 
its  faith.  Francis  had  his  eye  chiefly  on  the  bad  lives 
of  average  Christians ;  Dominic  was  anxious  about  the 
influence  of  the  Arab  philosophy  and  the  progress  of 
the  Albigenses.  The  instrument  by  which  Francis 
made  his  way  was  fervour;  the  weapon  of  Dominic 
was  religious  philosophy.  Both  seemed  angels  to  the 
contemporary  Church  ;  but  Dominic  was  a  cherub, 
Francis  was  a  seraph. 

"  L'  un  fu  tutto  serafico  in  ardore, 
L'  altro  per  sapienza  in  terra  fue 
Di  chenibicn  luce  uno  splendore."  ' 

Thus,  in  the  first  instance  at  any  rate,  the  Domini 
cans  addressed  themselves  to  the  educated;  the 
Franciscans  to  the  people.  The  architecture  of  a 
Dominican  church,  with  its  large  nave,  and  as  few 
chapels  or  side-altars  or  intercepting  columns  as 
might  be,  shows  the  hand  of  an  Order  which  set 
store  on  making  the  most  of  public  teaching.  Tho 
Franciscan  churches,  which,  as  a  rule,  were  broken 
up  by  many  screens  and  many  altars  into  a  collection 
of  associated  but  practically  separate  chapels  and 
oratories,  show  the  temper  of  an  Order  which,  in  its 

i  far.  xi.  37-39- 


1 84  Dante  and  the  Franciscans. 

great  effort  to  raise  the  life  of  the  people  to  a  higher 
moral  level,  would  follow  the  people's  instincts, — with 
more  of  sympathy  perhaps  than  of  effort  at  guidance, 
—in  the  whole  cycle  of  acceptable  devotions  or  super 
stitions. 

Not  that  any  such  contrasts  between  men  or 
societies  are  ever  unmodified  by  a  certain  interchange 
of  distinctive  characteristics.  The  family  of  St.  Francis, 
if  not  Francis  himself,  found  their  way  into  the 
chairs  of  the  Universities — at  one  time  Oxford  was 
practically  in  their  hands, — and  they  made  some  great 
contributions  to  theology;  while  Dominic,  no  less  than 
Francis,  as  Dante  is  careful  to  tell, 

"  Poi  con  dottrina  e  con  volere  insieme 
Con  1'offizio  apostolico  si  mosse. " 1 

And,  indeed,  if  faith,  not  poverty,  was  the  virtue 
which,  on  the  whole,  Dominic  particularly  espoused, 
yet  the  first  desire  which  was  manifest  in  him  was 
towards  the  first  counsel  of  Christ,  the  counsel  to 
"  sell  that  thou  hast  and  give  to  the  poor  " — 

"  il  primo  amor  che  in  lui  fu  manifesto, 
Fu  al  primo  consiglio  che  die  Cristo. "  2 

In  this  "  root  of  the  matter " — as  the  thirteenth 
century  would  have  deemed  it — he  was  at  one  with 
St.  Francis. 

It  was  natural  that  Dante's  moral  and  intellectual 
temper  would  have  inclined  towards  the  Dominican 

1  Par.  xii.  97,  98.  2  zb.  74,  75. 


Dante  and  the  Franciscans.  \  85 

ideal  Dante's  anxious  interest  in  the  problems  of 
the  time,  his  reserve,  his  distant,  proud,  austere 
severity,  not  to  speak  of  other  characteristics,  would 
have  attracted  him  to  the  less  popular  Order  and  its 
founder — 

"  I'amoroso  drndo 
Defla  fede  cristiana,  il  sauto  atleta, 
Benigno  ai  suoi,  ed  ai  nemici  crudo.'  ' 

For  Dante,  St.  Dominic  is  the  "  husbandman,  whom 
Christ  chose  to  place  in  His  garden,  to  aid  Him,"* 
nay,  he  is  "  messo  e  famigliar  di  Cristo," s  "  Christ's 
messenger  and  companion."  Colleague  of  Francis,  ho 
yet  was  worthy  to  guide  the  bark  of  Peter : 

"degno 

Collega  fu  a  mantcner  la  barca 
Di  Pietro  in  alto  mar  per  dritto  segno."4 

With  all  Dominic's  love  for  knowledge  and  thought, 
he  was  not,  Dante  saw,  to  be  classed  with  the  pedants 
who  paraded  ponderous  learning,  and  had  no  higher 
aim  beyond, — with  Cardinal  Henry  of  Ostia,  the  com 
mentator  on  the  Decretals,  or  with  Taddeo  Alderotti 
of  Bologna,  the  translator  of  the  Ethics  into  Italian. 
St.  Dominic's  love  of  learning  was  a  department  of 
his  love  of  an  object  beyond, — 

"  per  amor  della  verace  manna, 
In  picciol  tempo  gran  dottor  si  feo  ; "  • 

his  business  was  to  look  after  the  vino  which  God 

i  Par.  xii.  55-57.  «  76.  7»,  7«  '  /b-  73- 

*  Ib.  xi.  n8-iao.  5  /b.  xii.  84,  85. 


1 86  Dante  and  the  Franciscans. 

had  planted  among  the  nations,  and  the  whitening 
leaves  of  which  betrayed  the  secret  disease  which  was 

killing  it : 

"  si  tnise  a  circuir  la  vigna, 
Che  tosto  imbianca,  se  il  vigiiaio  6  reo. "  * 

All  that  he  asked  of  the  Pope  was  leave  to  fight 
against  an  erring  world;2  where  the  resistance  to 
error  was  stoutest,  there  his  blows  were  most  felt ;  he 
and  his  were  a  fountain  of  thought  and  eloquence  by 
which  the  garden  of  the  Church  was  watered. 

"  Di  lui  si  fecer  poi  diversi  rivi, 
Onde  P  orto  cattolico  si  riga, 
Si  che  i  suoi  arbuscelli  stan  pid  vivi. "  3 

Dante's  language  about  St.  Dominic  places  him,  on 
the  whole,  higher  than  St.  Francis.  And  his  disap 
pointment  at  the  failure  of  the  Dominicans  of  his  own 
lifetime  to  realise  their  ideal  is  greater  than  his  dis 
appointment  at  a  parallel  failure  on  the  part  of  the 
Franciscans.  St.  Thomas  is  made  to  make  larger 
admissions  as  to  the  degeneracy  of  his  brethren  than 
are  made  by  St.  Bonaventure.  Those  who  were  true 
to  their  founder  among  the  Dominicans  were  so  few 
that  a  little  cloth  would  furnish  their  cowls ; 

"son  si  poche, 
Che  le  cappe  fornisce  poco  panno."4 

Dante's  deepest  sympathies  were  with  Dominic; 
but  he  had  too  keen  an  eye  for  moral  beauty,  and, 
it  may  be  added,  was  too  well  furnished  with  the 

1  Par.  xii.  86,  87.         2  Ib.  94.        3  Ib.  103-105.        *  Ib.  xi.  131,  132. 


Dante  and  the  Franciscans.  187 

instincts  of  a  statesman  not  to  be  able  to  do  justice  to 
St.  Francis.  His  quick  and  wide  observation  of  all 
that  touches  the  life  of  humanity, — of  all  that  pro 
motes  individual  wellbeing,  as  well  as  of  all  that  moves 
the  world, — however  secret  the  influence,  however 
humble  the  agency,  would  have  made  him  alive  to 
the  importance  of  an  Order  so  wide  in  its  influence,  so 
penetrating  and  sympathetic  in  its  practical  temper. 
If  in  the  Commedia  Dominic  must  be  allowed  to  rank 
higher  than  Francis,  yet  more  is  said  about  Francis 
than  about  Dominic.  To  a  student  of  humanity  like 
Dante,  the  more  popular  Order  was  necessarily  of  more 
account,  whatever  might  be  his  individual  preference. 
As  we  read  the  panegyric  on  St.  Francis  which 
Dante  has  placed  in  the  mouth  of  St.  Thomas  Aquinas, 
it  is  impossible  not  to  feel  the  way  in  which  the  poet 
had  caught  the  mood  of  popular  devotion  to  the 
"  poverel  di  Dio  " — God's  own  poor  man.1  The  affec 
tionate  and  elaborate  description  of  the  situation  of 
Assisi ;  the  popular  play  upon  the  name,  when  once 
Francis  had  been  recognised  as  the  sun  of  the  con 
temporary  Church,  to  describe  his  rising  (Assisi);1 
then  the  choice  of  poverty,  described  as  a  fair  lady, 
for  whose  sake  Francis  braved  his  father's  displeasure, 
and  whom  he  wooed  and  won  with  the  passionate 
ardour  of  a  devoted  lover, 

"  PoacU  di  dl  in  <1i  1'  «m/>  piti  forte,"  • 
i  Par.  xiii.  33.  *  /«•  xi.  5*.  S3-  '  lb-  **•  6> 


1 88  Dante  and  the  Franciscans. 

is  all  popular  language  of  the  time,  reminding  us  of 
the  beauties  of  the  "fioretti  di  San  Francesco" — 
language  dear  to  the  heart  of  the  poor  because  it 
sheds,  as  St.  Francis  shed  in  an  eminent  degree,  the 
glory  of  moral  beauty  as  well  as  the  glory  of  poetry 
over  their  hard  lot.  Poverty,  voluntarily  accepted  for 
the  good  of  others,  had  as  much  right  to  be  personified 
as  any  other  virtue,  or  mode,  or  choice  of  life ;  and 
Francis,  knowing  that  the  heart  of  the  people  will 
never  care  much  for  an  abstraction,  but  is  easily  won 
by  a  concrete  presentation  of  the  abstract,  made  his 
way  not  least  by  this  characteristic  mode  of  thought 
and  speech. 

"  Francesco  e  Poverta  per  quest!  amanti 
Prendi  oramai  nel  mio  parlar  diffuse. 

La  lor  concordia  e  i  lor  lieti  sembianti, 
Amore  e  maraviglia  e  dolce  sguardo 
Facean  esser  cagion  de  pensier  santi. "  1 

And  thus  it  was  that  the  wealthy,  like  Bernard  of 
Quintavalle,  and  Giles,  and  the  priest  Silvester,  sold 
their  possessions  and  followed  this  ideal  and  idealising 
bridegroom,  who  had  won  so  fair  a  bride — 

"Dietro  allo  sposo  ;  si  la  sposa  piace."2 

For  Poverty  appealed  to  them  not  only  as  a  fair,  but 
as  an  undeservedly  neglected  lady.  She  had  had  her 
day  of  high  recognition  and  honour.  She  had  even, 

i  Par.  xi.  74-78.  2  2b.  xi.  84. 


Dante  and  tlic  Franciscans.  \  89 

on  the  most  solemn  of  all  occasions,  been  assigned  a 
higher  place  than  the  Virgin  Mother : 

"  dove  Maria  rimase  giuso, 
Ella  con  Criato  pianse  in  sulla  croce."1 

But  since  then  how  different  had  been  her  lot! 
Who  can  doubt  that  scores  of  the  early  Franciscan 
sermons,  burning  with  suppressed  fire,  are  compressed 
into  the  lines  in  which  poverty  is  represented  as 
leading  a  widowed  and  neglected  life  in  the  Church 
during  the  eleven  centuries  and  more  that  had  passed 
between  the  Redemption  and  the  appearance  of  St 
Francis — 

"  Questa,  privata  del  primo  Marito, 

Mille  cent1  anni  e  phi  <li«|>etui  e  Bcura 
Fino  a  coatui  si  Btette  senza  invito."2 

Dante  feels  it  to  be  due  to  his  own  literary  and 
cultured  self  to  decorate  his  reproduction  of  popular 
Franciscan  language  by  a  reference  to  Lucan's  account 
of  Caesar's  visit  to  the  hovel  of  the  fisherman 
Amyclas,3  but  ho  is  not  the  less  really,  for  the  time, 
controlled  by  the  enthusiasm  which  ho  describes. 
The  two  sanctions  of  the  Order  by  Rome  (ftigiUo 
a  ma  reliyione)*  accorded  by  Innocent  in.  and 
Honorius  in.,  though  not  without  hesitation;  tho 
thirst  for  martyrdom  which  leads  Francis  to  join  the 
crusading  host  before  Dainietta,  and  then  to  make  a 

i  Par.  xi  71,  7* 

•  Pkan.  T.  504  J  Aw-  «i-  «• 


1 90  Dante  and  the  Franciscans. 

mission  into  the  camp  of  the  Sultan ;  his  reception  of 
the  Stigmata — when 

"  Nel  crudo  sasso,  intra  Tevero  ed  Arno, 
Da  Cristo  prese  1'  ultimo  sigillo, 
Che  le  sue  membra  due  anni  portarno  ; "  * 

and  finally  his  death,  when  he  commended  his  dear 
est  lady  Poverty  to  the  care  of  his  brethren  whom  he 
was  leaving,  need  not  be  dwelt  on  at  greater  length, 
though  each  incident  is  pregnant  with  interest. 
Dante  expresses  his  judgment  on  Francis  when  he 
classes  him  with  St.  Benedict,  and  even  St.  Augus 
tine  ; 2  and  when  he  makes  St.  Benedict  range  Francis 
as  a  moral  workman  with  himself  and  even  St.  Peter, 

"  Pier  cominci6  senz'  oro  e  senza  argento, 
Ed  io  con  ora/ioni  e  con  digiuno, 
E  Francesco  umilmente  il  suo  convento," 3 

it  is  implied  that  the  Church  of  St.  Peter  was  very 
wealthy;  that  the  Benedictines  did  not  fast  and  pray; 
that  the  Franciscans  were  no  longer  humble.  But  this 
does  not  affect  the  position  which  is  assigned  to  Francis. 
Perhaps  the  most  characteristic  notice  of  St. 
Francis  in  the  Gommedia  is  his  momentary  appearance 
after  death  as  the  friend  of  Guido  da  Montefeltro. 
Guido  had  hoped  to  make  amends  for  a  rude  soldier's 
life  by  entering  the  Order  of  St.  Francis  : 

*'  Io  fui  uom  d'  arme,  e  poi  fui  cordelliero, 
Credendomi,  si  cinto,  fare  ammenda. "  4 

*  Par.  xi  106-8.    3  Ib.  xxxii.  35.     8  Ib.  xxii.  88-90.    <  Inf.  xxvii.  67,  68. 


Dante  and  the  Franciscans.  \  9 1 

But  Boniface  vm.  hod  asked  his  advice  as  to 
the  best  method  of  dealing  with  his  enemies  of  the 
Colonna  family  in  Rome,  and  Guido,  after  hesitation, 
had  recommended  large  promise  with  small  intention 
of  keeping  it : 

"  Lunga  promessa  con  1'  attender  corto." * 

Boniface  gave  Guido  absolution  by  anticipation ;  and 
upon  Guide's  death  St.  Francis  came  to  claim  a  soul 
which  had  in  life  been  a  member  of  his  Order.  But 
Francis  had  to  yield  it  to  "  one  of  the  black  cherubin," 
who  insisted  that,  in  consequence  of  Guide's  fraudulent 
counsel,  the  soul  of  Guido  rightly  belonged  to  him, 
and  that,  since  Guido  could  not  have  repented  of  that 
which  he  meant  to  do,  Boniface's  absolution  was 
worthless.  The  position  already  assigned  to  Francis 
in  the  other  world,  as  a  friend  of  sinners  who  had 
become  Franciscans,  belongs  to  Dante's  recognition  of 
the  power  of  the  popular  creed  and  of  the  popular 
Order.  The  victory  of  the  demon,  who  here  has  moral 
right  and  fact  on  his  side,  is  not  merely  a  humiliation 
for  Pope  Boniface;  it  vindicates  Dante's  own  moral 
attitude  towards  a  monastic  conception  which  so 
easily  admitted  of  such  largo  abuse,  and  may  be  more 
particularly  intended  to  mark  his  sense  of  a  wider 
danger  to  which  popular  Orders  arc  likely  to  bo 
exposed. 
The  decline  which  Dante  attributes  to  the  Fran- 

i  Inf.  xxrii.  no. 


192  Dante  and  t lie  Franciscans. 

ciscans  after  their  founder's  death  had  two  distinct 
phases,  each  of  which  is  apparently  noticed  by  Dante. 
The  first  he  describes  by  two  metaphors  which  run 
into  each  other.  Like  a  revolving  wheel,  the  Order 
has  deserted  the  orbit  which  the  highest  part  of  its 
circumference  had  reached :  like  bad  wine,  it  deposits 
mould,  not  crust,  in  the  cask : — 

"  Ma  P  orbita,  che  fe  la  parte  somma 
Di  sua  circonferenza,  6  derelitta, 
SI  ch'  k.  la  muffa  dov'  era  la  gromma."  ] 

Dante  mentions  no  names ;  perhaps  the  subject  was 
too  delicate,  but  history  supplies  the  omission. 

One  of  the  more  perplexing  characters  in  the 
Church  history  of  the  period  is  Elias,  the  first  General 
of  the  Franciscan  Order  after  the  founder's  death. 
He  entered  it  in  1211,  fifteen  years  before  the  death 
of  St.  Francis,  and  became  Provincial  of  Etruria  in 
1216.  His  preaching  won  many  adherents;  among 
others  Cesarius  of  Spires,  who  afterwards  opposed 
him  so  vehemently.  Even  within  the  lifetime  of  St. 
Francis  there  was  a  great  division  of  opinion  within 
the  Order  as  to  the  degree  of  poverty  which  was 
obligatory  upon  its  members.  The  stricter  opinion 
was  that  such  poverty  should  be  absolute,  like  that  of 
St.  Francis ;  but  a  laxer  opinion  maintained  that  this 
was  impossible  for  all  but  a  small  number  of  elect 
souls,  and  that  certain  goods  might  be  possessed,  and 

1  Par.  xii.  112-114. 


Dante  and  the  Franciscans.  \  93 

certain  relations  with  the  world  maintained,  without 
disloyalty  to  the  spirit  of  the  Order.  Of  this  view 
Elias  was  the  champion ;  he  was  apparently,  in  fact,  a 
refined  man  of  the  world,  who  had  heart  and  piety 
enough  to  admire  a  life  like  that  of  Francis,  but  who 
could  not  think  that  it  was  necessary  that  every  monk 
should  lead  it.  A  good  sort  of  man,  he  had  made  a 
mistake  in  being  a  monk, — at  any  rate,  a  monk  of  the 
Order  of  St.  Francis,  whose  concentration  and  intensity 
of  purpose  were  wholly  unwelcome  to  him. 

Thus  it  came  to  pass  that  Elias  was  a  trouble  to 
St.  Francis  during  the  last  eight  years  of  his  life. 
Elias  contrived  to  win  over  Cardinal  Ugolino,  after 
wards  Gregory  IX.,  and  to  induce  him  to  use  his 
authority  to  urge  St.  Francis  to  soften  the  rigour  of 
the  rule  of  poverty,  and  to  govern  the  Order  through 
a  council  of  wise  brethren.  Francis  refused ;  and  yet 
such  were  the  practical  qualities  of  Elias  that,  when 
Francis  left  Italy  for  Egypt,  he  made  Elias  his  Vicar- 
General.  Elias  seized  the  opportunity  to  promote  a 
general  relaxation  of  discipline,  and  St.  Francis  returned 
to  depose  him  from  his  office  in  1220.  In  1221,  Elias 
was  again  reinstated;  in  1223,  he  was  again  at  war 
with  St.  Francis  about  a  new  rule;  and  when  St. 
Francis  sickened  for  death,  Elias  was  still  in  such  a 
position  that  the  whole  practical  direction  of  the 
Order  fell  into  his  hands. 

Thus  when  Francis  was  gone,  and  the  chapter  of 
N 


1 94  Dante  and  the  Franciscans. 

the  Order,  held  in  1227  at  Rome,  had  to  elect  a 
General,  they  elected  Elias.  He  pleaded  that  his 
health  would  not  allow  him  to  walk  on  foot,  and  to 
submit  to  other  privations  enjoined  by  the  rule. 
"  Very  well,"  cried  the  monks,  "  eat  gold  and  ride  on 
horseback."  The  administration  of  the  Order  by  Elias 
was,  from  his  own  point  of  view,  brilliant.  Many 
learned  men  were  attracted  to  the  Order;  it  filled 
professorships  at  the  universities ;  the  splendid  church 
at  Assisi,  decorated  by  Giotto,  was  prepared  as  a  worthy 
resting-place  for  the  body  of  St.  Francis ;  money  was 
collected,  under  Papal  sanction,  and,  despite  of  the 
rule,  in  all  the  provinces  of  the  Order.  Elias  himself 
had  a  well-furnished  cell,  rode  a  splendid  charger,  and 
was  followed  by  a  train  of  servants.  At  last  the 
stricter  party  in  the  Order  could  bear  it  no  longer ;  in 
the  chapter  of  1230,  under  the  guidance  of  St.  Antony 
of  Padua  (not  to  be  confounded  with  the  St.  Antony 
of  Par.  xxix.  124,  with  his  pig),  and  of  Adam  de 
Marisco,  they  protested  against  this  extreme  viola 
tion  of  the  rule.  Gregory  ix.,  now  Pope,  was  obliged 
to  side  with  them,  and  Elias,  notwithstanding  an 
ingenious  defence  of  his  proceedings,  was  deposed. 
In  1236  his  partisans  were  strong  enough  to  elect  him 
again;  again  the  old  luxury  and  laxity  recurred; 
again,  through  the  influence  of  his  most  distinguished 
convert,  Cesarius  of  Spires,1  he  was  deposed  in  1239. 

1  Cesarius  was  murdered  in  gaol. 


Dante  and  the  Franciscans.  195 

He  then  became  intimate  with  the  Emperor  Frederic 
II.,  who  was  alive  to  his  practical  abilities ;  and,  after 
a  chequered  life,  he  was  excommunicated  as  a 
partisan  of  the  Emperor,  and  stripped  of  his  cowl  and 
his  clerical  privileges.  Before  his  death  in  1253  he 
was  reconciled  with  the  Church,  but  was  not  re 
admitted  to  the  Order;  although,  as  he  understood  it, 
it  had  to  the  end  a  first  place  in  his  heart,  and  his 
last  years  were  occupied  with  building  a  line  church 
at  Cortona  for  the  Minorites. 

The  general  result  of  the  influence  of  Klias  was  to 
introduce  into  the  Order  a  standard  of  life  and  dis 
cipline  much  below  that  which  was  contemplated  by  St. 
Francis.  Connected  with,  but  distinct  from,  this  feature 
of  the  decline  were  the  controversies  within  the  Order 
on  the  nature  and  obligations  of  poverty.  To  discuss 
these  controversies  would  take  us  much  too  fur ;  in 
fact  they  only  reached  a  Hnal  climax  at  a  date  be 
yond  the  lifetime  of  Dante.  Hut  Dante  must  have 
been  well  aware  of  the  influence  of  the  writings  of 
the  Abbot  Joachim,  and  the  history  of  the  generalship 
of  John  of  Parma,  12501260.  He  must  have  heard  a 
great  deal  of  the  Zelatores  or  Xelantes,  who  appealed 
to  the  authority  of  the  now  canonised  St.  Antony  of 
Padua,  and  who  were  the  spiritual  ancestors  of  the 
Fraticelli  of  the  next  half  century.  But  he  selects 
two  contemporary  names  to  represent  a  long  and 
intricate  controversy.  Two  prominent  figures  of  the 


1 96  Dante  and  the  Franciscans. 

time  were  the  easy-going  Cardinal  Matthew  of  Acqua- 
sparta,  General  of  the  Order,  who  according  to  Wadding 
was  a  patron  of  laxity  in  general;  and  the  austere 
Ubertino  da  Casale,  the  pupil  of  Peter  John  Olivi,  the 
head  of  the  spiritual  or  zealous  party  in  the  Order, 
the  author  of  the  Arbor  vitae  Crucifixae  and  the 
Opus  de  Septem  Statibus  Ecclesiae.1  Ubertino  finally 
broke  away  from  the  Franciscans.  He  asked  permis 
sion  from  Pope  John  xxn.  to  live  in  a  separate  com 
munity  with  those  who  agreed  with  him,  and  he  was 
refused.  In  1317  he  obtained  permission  to  join  the 
Benedictines,  and  at  a  later  date  the  Carthusians. 
He  took  a  prominent  part  in  the  controversy  about 
the  poverty  of  Christ  and  His  Apostles.  When 
pressed  by  John  xxn.  he  would  admit  that  it 
was  right  to  say  that,  spiritually,  Christ  possessed 
something  hi  common  with  the  Apostles;  but  he 
thought  it  heretical  to  say,  as  did  the  conventual 
Franciscans,  that  He  and  His  Apostles  possessed 
singly  or  in  common  any  worldly  goods  whatever.2 

Dante  holds  a  middle  course  between  what  he 
deems  opposite  exaggerations.  According  to  him 
the  true  Franciscan  may  still  find  the  genuine  tradi 
tion  of  the  life  of  the  saintly  founder — 

"  Io  mi  son  quel  ch'  io  soglio."3 

1  Wadding's  Annal.  Franc,  tom.  iii.  ad  ann.  1321. 

2  See  for  this  Responsio  circa  quaestionem  de  paupertate  Christi  et 
Apostolorum ;  Wadding's  Anna!,  iii.  ad   ann.  1321;    Baluzius,  Misccll. 
torn.  i.  pp.  293-307.  a  pftr.  xjj.  I23. 


Dante  and  the  Franciscatis.  197 

But  neither  the  laxity  of  Cardinal  Acquasparta  nor 
the  morbid  rigorism  of  Ubertino  da  Casalo  will  fur- 
nish  this — 

"  Ma  non  fia  da  Caaal,  no  d'  Acqiia*|»arta, 
L;\  onde  vegnon  tali  alia  scrittura, 
Che  1'  un  la  f ugge,  e  1'  altro  la  coart*. " ' 

Dante  has  immortalised  four  of  the  immediate 
companions  of  St.  Francis, — Bernard  of  Quintavalle, 
his  first  convert,  wealthy  and  venerable,  who  after 
doubting  the  wisdom  or  the  sincerity  of  Francis,  at  last 
surrendered  himself  to  the  moral  fascination  of  his 
character,  sold  his  property,  and  embraced  the  Fran 
ciscan  rule ;  (Pietro,  the  second  adherent  of  St.  Francis, 
is  not  mentioned  by  Dante;)  Egidio  or  (tiles,  another 
well-to-do  layman,  the  author  of  the  Verlm  A  urea, 
who  lived  even  so  late  as  1272;*  Illuminato  and 
Agostino — 

"  Che  fur  dei  primi  scal/i  poverelli, 
Che  nel  capestro  a  Dio  si  fero  ami-  i. " 

Illuminato  of  Rieti,  who  accompanied  St.  Francis  into 
Egypt ;  Agostino,  who  according  to  the  story,  died  in 
time  to  keep  St.  Francis  company  on  his  \vuy  t<> 
heaven,— these  owe  their  immortality  in  human 
memories  to  Dante.  But  there  is  one  Franciscan  who 
occupies  a  high  place  in  the  Commedia,  and  who 
would  have  certainly  lived  in  the  history  of  the 
Church  if  Dante  had  never  sung. 

>  Par.  xii.  124-126.  «  76.  li.  83.  •  /*  •«•  «3».  «3* 


1 98  Dante  and  the  Franciscans. 


Bonaventure  of  Bagnoregio  or  Bagnarea,  a  village 
on  the  Lake  of  Bolsena  and  not  far  from  Orvieto,  was 
born  in  1221.  At  the  age  of  twenty- two  he  entered 
the  Order  of  St.  Francis;  became  a  pupil  of  the 
English  monk  Alexander  of  Hales  at  Paris;  and  in 
a  short  time  a  professor  of  theology  in  that  University. 
He  there  wrote  his  most  considerable  work, — a  Com 
mentary  on  the  Sentences  of  Peter  Lombard ;  but  he 
had  not  been  more  than  three  years  at  work  when^ 
notwithstanding  his  youth,  he  was  made  General 
of  his  Order; — the  troublesome  controversies  which 
divided  it  required  a  ruler  with  no  ordinary  gifts.  His 
gifts,  indeed,  were  of  a  kind  to  mark  him  out  in  early 
life  for  a  high  position  in  the  Church.  Only  by  the 
most  earnest  entreaties  could  he  prevail  on  Clement 
iv.  not  to  insist  on  his  becoming  Archbishop  of  York. 
With  Gregory  x.  he  was  less  successful,  and  by  the  com 
mand  of  that  pontiff  he  became  Cardinal  and  Bishop 
of  Albano.  He  was  throughout  his  life  an  unworldly 
and  disinterested  character,  and  his  shade  has  a  right, 
to  say  that  he  ever  postponed  riches  and  honour, 
which,  according  to  the  language  of  the  Proverbs,  are 
in  the  keeping  of  the  left  hand,1  to  that  true  wisdom 
which  is  guarded  by  the  right — 

"  Io  son  la  vita  di  Bonaventura 

Da  Bagnoregio,  che  nei  grand!  offici 
Sempre  posposi  la  sinistra  cura. " 2 

1  /You.  iii.  16.  a  Par.  xii.  127-129. 


Dante  and  the  Franciscans.  \     > 

He  died  at  the  Council  of  Lyons  on  .July  15,  1274, 
four  months  after  the  death  of  St  Thomas. 

This  coincidence  of  the  date  of  the  disapj>earance 
from  the  scene  of  two  men  of  such  commanding  titles 
to  the  attention  of  the  Church  may  have  had  more 
than  anything  else  to  do  with  the  position  assigned 
to  Bonaventure  in  the  Paradi*o.  For  Dante,  St. 
Honaventure  is  the  representative  Franciscan,  just 
as  St.  Thomas  is  the  representative  Dominican.  In 
Dante's  conception,  what  Thomas  is  to  Dominic,  that 
Bonaventure  is  to  Francis.  Historically  speaking,  St 
Dominic  is  eclipsed  l>y  St.  Thomas,  while  St.  Francis 
is  most  assuredly  not  eclipsed  by  St.  Bonaventure. 
But  the  real  proportions  of  minds  and  characters  are 
rarely  quite  understood  even  by  their  greatest  Con 
temporaries  ;  and  if  St.  Bonaventure  could  not  rank 
with  the  great  Dominican,  he  was  the  greatest  Fran 
ciscan  who  was  exactly  contemporary  with  St.  Thomas. 
So  he  is  chosen  to  interchange  the  courtesies  which  in 
those  early  times,  as  to  this  day,  disguise  a  certain 
rivalry  between  the  Orders:  and  as  St.  Thomas  is  the 
eulogist  of  St.  Francis  and  the  critic  who  In-wails  the 
degeneracy  of  his  own  Dominicans,  so  St.  Bonaven 
ture  is  the  eulogist  of  St.  Dominic,  and  he  corre 
spondingly  deplores  the  decline  of  his  brethren,  the 
children  of  St.  Francis. 

Comparing  Bonaventure  with  Aquinas,  it  must  l»e  at 
once  said  that  as  a  Christian  thinker  he  is  greatly  his 


2OO  Dante  and  the  Franciscans. 

inferior.  Indeed,  they  do  not  easily  admit  of  being 
compared,  as  Bonaventure  is  a  natural  Platonist 
just  as  Thomas  is  a  natural  Aristotelian.  But  as 
the  original  modes  and  forms  of  their  thought  are 
different,  so  in  point  of  vigour  and  fibre  Bonaventure 
bears  no  comparison  to  Thomas.  It  is  enough  to  say, 
further,  that  he  never  heard  the  lectures  of  Albert, 
and  that  he  knew  little  or  nothing  of  Aristotle. 

On  the  mystical  or  devotional  side  the  case  is  very 
different.  Thomas  could  write  prayers  and  hymns, 
as  we  know,  of  great  beauty,  and  which  will  always 
live ;  but  such  works  as  The  Soul's  Journey  to  God 
(Itinerarium  Mentis  ad  Deum)  and  Meditations  on 
the  Life  of  Christ,  place  Bonaventure  at  the  head  of 
the  masters  of  Christian  devotion  m  the  thirteenth 
century.  In  his  case,  as  in  that  of  Aquinas,  Dante 
anticipated  the  official  judgment  of  the  Church  by 
placing  him  among  the  saints. 

Perhaps  even  more  remarkable  than  his  allusions 
to  great  Franciscans  are  Dante's  omissions  to  allude  to 
them.  There  are  at  least  three  names,  of  all  of  whom 
Dante  must  have  known  something,  of  some  probably 
a  great  deal,  but  who  find  no  place  in  the  poem  which 
leaves  so  little  unnoticed  that  could  interest  the 
thought  or  heart  of  the  world  in  the  thirteenth 
century.  And  it  may  be  added,  they  are  all  three 
the  names  of  Englishmen. 

(a)    Alexander  of  Hales,  Doctor   Irrefragabilis,  so 


Dante  and  tlu  Franciscans.  20 1 


called  from  the  Gloucestershire  convent  in  which  he 
went  to  school,  completed  his  studies,  as  did  so  many 
young  Englishmen  of  the  time,  at  Paris,  and  hail 
already  become  a  professor  and  doctor  of  philosophy  of 
that  University  when  in  1222  he  entered  the  Order  of 
St.  Francis.  He  seems  to  have  been  entreated  to  do  so 
by  a  poor  Franciscan,  so  that  the  young  Order  might 
gain  in  his  person  the  attraction  and  authority  of 
learning  and  culture.  Certainly  he  brought  these,  then 
rare,  gifts  with  him  when  he  took  the  vow  of  poverty. 
In  him  the  Franciscans  appear  in  a  capacity  which 
lies  outside  the  scope  of  their  founder's  activity : — in 
him  they  made  the  first,  and  that  a  very  great 
step,  towards  the  conquest  of  the  universities 
of  Europe.  If  Alexander  was  not  the  author  of  the 
first  Summa  of  theology,  his  was  the  first  which  com 
manded  general  attention,  and  was  prescribed  by 
Papal  authority  for  general  use  in  the  theological 
schools  of  Europe,  until  it  was  superseded  by  the 
works  of  the  great  Dominicans,  Albert  and  Thomas. 
The  specialty  of  Alexander  was  that  he  led  the  way 
in  resistance  to  the  attacks  upon  the  Faith  of  the 
Church  which  had  been  made  by  writers  like  David 
of  Dinant,  who  took  as  their  basis  of  operations  the  Arab 
philosophy,— then  recently  dirt  used  throughout  Euro|>e, 
and  read  with  the  greatest  avidity.  Alexander  studied 
the  Arabians  thoroughly,  as  he  studied  Aristotle,  and 
made  both  Aristotle  and  Avicenna  furnish  defensive 


2O2  Dante  and  the  Franciscans. 

weapons  to  orthodoxy.  In  this  effort  he  was  after 
wards  surpassed  by  Albert,  whose  work  was  in  turn 
extended  and  completed  by  Aquinas;  but  it  was 
Alexander — it  was  a  Franciscan — who  had  led  the  way. 
His  greatest  work,  as  was  usual  in  that  age,  was  a 
Commentary  on  the  Sentences  of  Peter  Lombard ;  but, 
in  fact,  this  was  the  conventional  form  into  which  a 
theologian  of  that  time  threw  whatever  he  had  to  say 
that  was  independent  and  original.  Among  his  many 
pupils  the  greatest  was  St.  Bonaventure.  Alexander 
died  in  1245. 

We  might  have  expected  that  the  master  of  Bona 
venture  would  have  been  noticed  by  Dante,  just  as 
Dante  notices  Albert,  the  master  of  Thomas.  Aver- 
roes  and  Avicenna1  too  might  have  suggested  the 
teacher  who  taught  the  Church  to  make  them  the 
servants  and  not  the  masters  of  her  thought :  but,  for 
some  reason,  Alexander  is  not  named.  Englishman 
as  he  was,  he  passed  his  life  in  Paris,  and  Dante 
knew  Paris,  and  what  it  had  been  to  Thomas,  and 
what  it  was  to  the  world  of  the  thirteenth  cen 
tury.  Was  it  his  prolixity,  or  his  innovation  on  the 
Franciscan  ideal  of  life,  or  his  claim  to  laurels  which 
the  poet  may  have  thought  the  monopoly  of  his  own 
Dominicans,  that  have  excluded  this  eminent  man 
from  a  line  of  recognition  in  the  great  poem  ?  We  can 
only  ask,  we  cannot  answer  the  question. 

i  Inf.  iv.  143,  144. 


Dante  and  the  Franciscans.  203 

(#)  Roger  Bacon,  Doctor  Mirabilis,  is  so  near  a 
neighbour,  and  such  a  familiar  name  to  Oxford 
residents  that  they  may  be  tempted  to  overlook  his 
real  importance.  He  was  a  contemporary  both  of  St. 
Thomas  and  Dante,  born  as  he  was  in  1214,  and  dying 
in  1292.  «A  Somersetshire  lad,  of  good  family,  he 
came  to  Oxford,  made  the  friendship  of  Grostete,  after 
wards  Bishop  of  Lincoln,  and  got  into  trouble,  political 
and  other,  which  led  him  to  seek  a  change  in  France. 
When  he  visited  Paris,  Scholasticism  was  at  the  height 
of  its  activity.  But  instead  of  listening  to  the  discus 
sions  which  filled  the  air  in  every  school  and  convent, 
— instead  of  resorting  to  any  of  the  teachers  whose 
names  were  then  repeated  throughout  Europe,  Roger 
Bacon  sought  a  tutor  whom  he  does  not  name,  and  who 
was  strongly  unlike  the  rest  of  the  world  about  him. 
This  unnamed  instructor  had  no  taste  for  metaphysics, 
cared  nothing  about  the  nature  of  universals,  or  for 
discussions  which  turned  on  the  meaning  of  words. 
While  these  were  going  on,  he  lived  in  a  little  litlmra- 
tory,  a  dominus  experimentorum,  as  men  called  him, 
testing  and  fusing  metals,  inventing  new  weapons  of 
war,  new  implements  of  husbandry,  new  tools  for 
artisans ;  learning  mathematics,  optics,  medicine, 
alchemy ;  learning  something  too  of  Eastern  languages, 
Hebrew  and  Arabic,  as  well  as  Greek.  The  influence 
of  this  odd  tutor  upon  an  apt  pupil  was  to  give  to 
Bacon's  mind  what  was  then  an  original,  what  wo 


204  Dante  and  the  Franciscans. 

should  now  call  a  very  modern  direction;— to  teach  him 
to  observe  everything,  to  think  nothing  unworthy  of 
notice,  to  use  his  hands  and  his  eyes  as  well  as  his 
brain,  to  distrust  the  abstract,  to  distrust  both  logic 
and  rhetoric,  and  to  make  the  results  of  sensible 
observation  the  main,  if  not  the  only,  basis  of  know 
ledge.  As  far  as  his  habits  of  thought  went,  Roger 
Bacon  might  as  well  have  lived  in  the  full  bloom  of 
the  Renaissance;  or  he  might  have  been  his  great 
namesake  of  the  seventeenth  century.  But,  in  fact, 
he  did  live  in  the  thirteenth,  and,  for  some  reason 
unknown  to  us,  he  became  a  Franciscan.  Back  he 
went  to  Oxford,  to  spend  some  six  years  in  the  Fran 
ciscan  house  close  to  Paradise  Square, — or  in  the 
tower  on  Folly  Bridge, — to  pursue  his  experiments 
and  studies,  to  gain  an  ever-increasing  reputation  in 
the  University,  and  finally  to  come  into  hopeless  con 
flict  with  his  superiors.  St.  Bonaventure,  then  General 
of  the  Order,  was  not  the  sort  of  person  to  understand 
Bacon ;  and  he  was  ordered  to  Paris  —to  spend  ten 
years  in  quite  unspeakable  discomfort,  with  the  Fran 
ciscans  in  that  city.  The  history  of  his  troubles  would 
detain  us  too  long.  He  was  forbidden  to  possess 
books,  to  write,  or  to  teach,  and  was  put  upon  short 
commons  and  shut  up  when  he  broke  these  orders. 
He  was  delivered  from  this  thraldom  when  Guy  de 
Foulques,  Cardinal-Legate  of  the  Pope  in  England, 
ascended' the  Papal  throne  hi  1265  as  Clement  iv. 


Dante  and  the  Franciscans.  205 

The  Pope  wrote  Bacon  a  letter,  which  still  exist*, 
relieving  him  from  the  silence  to  which  he  was  con 
demned,  and  desiring  him  to  compose  a  work  setting 
forth  his  ideas  on  controverted  matters  and  send  it 
to  Rome.  The  Paris  Franciscans  were  indignant, 
but  they  had  to  submit,  contenting  themselves  with 
making  it,  by  a  variety  of  ingenious  regulations,  as 
difficult  as  they  could  to  Bacon  to  write  his  book. 
At  last  it  appeared  in  1 267,  the  Opus  M«jwt  followed 
by  an  appendix,  the  Opus  Minus,  and  even  by  an 
Opus  Tertium  in  which,  under  the  disguise  of  a  dedi 
catory  letter,  Bacon  relates  to  the  Pope  at  length  all 
the  annoyances  to  which  he  has  been  exposed  by  his 
brethren.  Shielded  by  the  Papal  protection,  Bacon 
could  return  to  Oxford.  But  in  1 268  Clement  died. 
Bacon  was  again  face  to  face  with  his  opponents,  and 
in  1278  Jerome  of  Ascoli,  the  General,  convoked  a 
chapter  of  the  Order  of  St.  Francis,  and  condemned 
Bacon.  No  doubt  the  friar  was  irritating:  he  dis 
liked  his  Order  and  everything  about  him;  he 
sneered  at  the  great  doctor  Alexander  of  Hales;  he 
made  the  utmost  fun  of  the  Dominicans  Albert  and 
Thomas ;  he  condemned  as  sterile  and  worthless  four- 
fifths  of  the  teaching  of  his  brother  professors.  "  But 
he  was  also  condemned,"  says  Wadding,  the  historian 
of  the  Order,  "  propter  quasdam  novitates  susjxictaa." 
Of  these  the  most  serious  probably  was  that  ho  be 
lieved,  with  the  Arab  astronomer  Albuinozar,  and 


206  Dante  and  the  Franciscans. 

Averroes,  that  there  was  a  real  connection  between 
the  conjunction  of  the  planets  and  the  appearance  of 
new  religions  on  the  earth. 

Bacon  passed  fourteen  years  in  obscurity,  probably 
in  prison,  and  only  regained  his  liberty  in  old  age, 
just  before  his  death.  As  the  apostle  of  experimental- 
ism  and  observation,  against  Schoolmen  and  Fathers, 
even  against  the  Bible,  as  being,  in  his  own  words, 
"  badly  translated ; " — ot  observation,  as  more  fruitful 
than  any  interpretation  of  texts  or  abstract  reasoning ; 
of  observation,  "  domina  scientiarum  omnium,  et  finis 
totius  speculationis," — Bacon  in  that  age  stands  alone. 
Dante  can  hardly  have  failed  to  hear  of  so  original 
and  so  public  a  career.  What  did  he  think  of  it  ? 
If  Bacon  could  not  be  introduced  into  the  Commedia 
as  the  authority  for  some  physical  statement,  might 
he  not  have  had  a  message  sent  him  like  that  from 
Mahomet  to  Era  Dolcino,1 — or  have  been  grouped  in 
punishment  with  the  Arabs  who  misled  him,2 — or  have 
been  pitied  by  the  exiled  poet,  who  had  been  treated 
by  his  fellow-citizens  after  a  fashion  not  altogether 
dissimilar  to  the  treatment  of  Bacon  at  the  hands  of 
the  Oxford  and  Paris  Franciscans  ? 

(7)  The  third,  and  by  far  the  greatest,  Franciscan 
name  that  falls  within  the  period  of  Dante's  lifetime 
is  Duns  Scotus,  "  the  Subtle  Doctor  "  in  the  language 
of  the  schools.  I  say  the  greatest,  for  although  Bacon 

i  Inf.  xxviii.  55-62.  2  Inf.  iv.  143,  144. 


Dante  and  the  Franciscans:  207 


has  attracted  more  notice  on  account  of  the  modern 
character  of  his  interests  and  his  method,  he  cannot 
compare,  for  grasp  or  penetration  of  thought,  with  the 
only  schoolman  who  really  or  nearly  takes  rank  with 
Aquinas. 

Duns  Scotus  was  probably  born  (though  this  is  a 
matter  of  controversy)  in  1274,  the  year  in  which 
Aquinas  and  St.  Bonaventure  died.  A  Northumbrian 
lad,  as  it  would  seem,  he  came  up  early  to  Oxford  and 
spent  all  his  short  life  here,  with  the  exception  of  the 
last  four  years.  It  is  doubtful  when  he  entered  the 
Order  of  St.  Francis,  but  he  was  already  a  Franciscan 
when,  at  the  age  of  twenty-three,  ho  succeeded  his 
master,  William  Varron  or  Ware,  as  a  professor  of 
philosophy  in  the  Order.  The  legend  of  thirty  thou 
sand  students  is  connected  with  the  lectures  of  Duns 
Scotus,  but  it  is  certain  that  the  bulk  of  his  vast  lite 
rary  work  was  done  at  Oxford.  In  the  Lyons  edition 
of  his  works,  1639,  no  less  than  tive  out  of  the  twelve 
folio  volumes  are  taken  up  with  his  most  celebrated 
treatise,  which  is,  of  course,  his  Commentary  on  Peter 
Lombard:  it  is  generally  referred  to  as  Script  urn 
Oxonien»e.  His  other  works  are  apparently  all 
philosophical,  and  such 'as  would  have  been  suggested 
by  his  lectures  and  the  controversies  of  the  time.  In 
1304  he  was  sent  by  his  sujHjriors  to  Paris,  where  ho 
taught  in  the  University  for  four  years  with  ever 
increasing  brilliancy  and  success,  and  took  part  in  a 


208  Dante  and  the  Franciscans. 

disputation  which  has  become  historical,  on  the  ques 
tion  of  the  Immaculate  Conception.  In  1 308  he  was 
sent  by  the  General  of  the  Order  to  Cologne,  but  had 
hardly  made  himself  at  home  there  when  he  died  on 
November  8,  in  his  thirty-fourth  year. 

Certainly  Duns  Scotus,  as  a  writer,  has  neither  the 
grace  of  St.  Bonaventure  nor  the  clearness  of  St. 
Thomas.  He  is  more  careful  about  his  matter  than 
about  his  style,  which  is  often  pulverised  into  obscurity 
by  his  exaggerated  passion  for  distinctions.  He 
attacks  St.  Thomas  all  along  the  line :  sometimes  his 
method,  nrore  rarely  his  premises,  very  often  his  con 
clusions.  His  weapon  is  his  inexhaustible  facility  in 
projecting  distinctions,  which  he  drives  like  a  wedge 
into  the  heart  of  the  opposing  argument.  There  can 
be  no  doubt  that  while  his  contemporaries  warmly 
admired  his  originality  and  his  boldness,  the  general 
result  of  his  influence  in  the  next  generation  was  to 
pave  the  way  for  the  downfall  of  scholasticism.  To 
many  minds  he  must  have  even  appeared  to  have 
unsettled  those  bases  of  certainty  beyond  the  precincts 
of  Revelation,  which  had  been  elaborated,  or  rather 
exhibited,  with  such  laborious  completeness  by  Albert 
of  Cologne  and  St.  Thomas.  On  two  points,  at  least, 
he  went  near  coming  into  conflict  not  merely  with  the 
distinctive  methods  of  the  Thomist  theologians,  but 
with  the  general  sense  and  doctrine  of  the  Church. 
His  exaggerated  realism,  as  applied  to  universals,  led 


Dante  and  the  Franciscans.  209 


him  to  ascribe  to  each  of  the  Divine  Attributes  an 
objectively  distinct  existence,— a  doctrine  which  it 
might  be  difficult  to  reconcile  with  that  aTrXonj?  of 
the  Divine  Nature  which  is  only  one  way  of  expressing 
the  Essential  Unity  of  God.  This  passionate  anxiety 
to  assert  the  freedom  of  the  Divine  Will  led  him  into 
the  exaggeration  of  treating  the  moral  laws  of  Clod  as 
arbitrary,  as  depending  on  His  Will,  apart  from  any 
intrinsic  necessity  of  His  Nature,  so  that  although 
what  He  commands  is  obligatory,  He  might  have  just 
as  well  sanctioned  adultery  as  conjugal  fidelity,  or 
murder  as  the  love  of  our  neighbour.  Duns  Scotus 
probably  would  have  got  into  trouble  with  the  Church 
if  he  had  not,  in  perfect  good  faith,  thrown  the  shield 
of  his  great  ability  over  popular  devotions  or  sii|>er- 
stitions  which  were  struggling  for  recognition  among 
the  less  gifted  members  of  his  Order:  just  as  in  our 
own  day  we  have  seen  powerful  intellects  pass  from 
the  higher  spheres  of  audacious  speculation  to  fondle 
some  odd  detail  of  popular  practice  or  belief,  as  if  in 
the  very  spirit  of  paradox.  Thus  it  was  with  the 
Immaculate  Conception.  Discountenanced  by  St 
Bernard  in  the  twelfth  century, — deliberately  rejected 
by  St.  Thomas  in  the  Summa, — repudiated  in  the 
Franciscan  Order  by  St.  Ikmaventure,  it  was  first 
raised  from  the  rank  of  a  scarcely  recognised  opinion 
to  that  of  a  doctrine  claiming  formal  sanction  by  tho 
dialectical  resources  of  Duns  Scotus  and  when,  in 


2 1  o  Dante  and  the  Franciscans. 

the  year  1854,  this  doctrine  was  declared  to  be  defide 
in  the  Bull  Ineffabilis,  the  rnind  which  really 
triumphed,  five  hundred  and  fifty  years  after  it  had 
passed  from  this  earthly  scene,  was  that  of  the  Oxford 
Franciscan. 

It  was  natural  that  the  Franciscans  welcomed  a  man 
who  at  once  relieved  them  from  the  sense  of  intellec 
tual  inferiority  to  the  family  of  St.  Dominic.  Hence 
forth,  as  every  Dominican  theologian  was  a  Thomist, 
so  every  Franciscan  was  a  Scotist.  Sometimes,  as  was 
the  case  of  the  distinguished  Spaniard  Antonio 
Andrea,  the  theologians  of  the  Order  did  not  disguise 
from  themselves  that  they  shut  their  eyes  when  they 
were  compelled  "  jurare  in  verba  magistri."  But  they 
were  not  deceived  as  to  the  rank  of  their  Subtle  Doctor 
among  minds  which  have  at  any  time  devoted  them 
selves  to  studies  in  philosophy  or  theology.1  When 
the  Renaissance  first,  and  then  the  Reformation,  had 
swept  over  the  mind  of  Europe,  and  Dominicans  and 
Franciscans  alike  had  fallen  into  relative  insignificance, 
to  make  way  within  the  Roman  Church  for  a  more 
powerful  organisation,  demanded,  as  it  was  thought,  by 
the  necessities  of  the  times,  the  first  of  Jesuit  theo 
logians — the  first,  he  may  well  be  thought,  of  Roman 
Catholic  theologians  since  Aquinas — shows  us  what  he 


1  Our  own  Hooker  quotes  Scotus  only  once,  but  approvingly,  and  as 
against  the  opinion  of  St.  Thomas.  E.  P.  vi.  vi.  9,  On  the  nature  of 
Sacramental  Grace. 


Dante  and  the  Franciscans.  2 1 1 

thought  of  the  place  and  weight  of  Duns  Scotus.  In 
the  course  of  his  vast  survey  of  the  field  of  theology, 
Francis  Suarez  constantly  contrasts  the  judgments  of 
Duns  Scotus  and  Thomas,  and,  where  his  decision  is 
not  controlled  by  the  present  authority  of  the  lliurch, 
he  generally  inclines  to  take  part  with  the  former. 

Had  Dante  been  merely  a  man  of  the  world,  indif 
ferent  to  what  theology  is  in  itself,  and  to  its  vast 
significance  for  the  life  of  human  beings,  ho  might 
have  missed  the  significance  of  such  a  career  as  that 
of  Scotus — so  brilliant,  so  pregnant  with  consequences, 
so  pathetically  short.  But  it  is  impossible  to  think 
this  of  the  author  of  the  eleventh  and  twelfth  and 
thirteenth  cantos  of  the  Paradise;  and  Scotus 
reached  the  climax  of  his  life  in  Paris,  and  ho  died— 
twelve  years  before  Dante's  death.  Why  is  he  un 
noticed  ?  Did  Dante  resent  here  also  an  apparition 
which  threatened  so  altogether  to  destroy  the  historic 
and  poetic  contrast  between  the  Orders  as  being 
respectively  Intellect  and  Benevolence  *  Did  he 
detect  in  the  thought  of  Duns  Scotus  elements  of  un 
certain  character :  did  ho  fear  whither  this  new  and 
fearless  analyst  might  not  have  been  tending  /  Or 
is  it  the  Italian  in  Dante  which  still  measures  the 
world  from  the  standpoint  of  the  Old  Empire,  and 
cannot  understand  how  Normans  and  Saxons,  who 
had  come  from  remote  Britain,  should  challenge  com 
parison  with  men  of  Latin  blood  like  St  Thomas  and 


2 1 2  Dante  and  the  Franciscans. 

St.  Bonaventure  ?  We  cannot  say ;  but  his  silence 
is  even  more  remarkable  in  the  case  of  Scotus  than 
in  the  cases  of  Bacon  or  Alexander  of  Hales.  As 
we  read  the  great  poem  we  feel  that  its  reserves 
may  not  be  less  full  of  meaning  than  its  allusions,  and 
that  currents  of  thought  and  currents  of  feeling — 
which  may  some  day  be  explored — may  be  the  secret 
of  a  silence  which,  for  the  present,  is  so  interesting 
because  we  are  so  entirely  unable  to  account  for  it. 


Printed  by  T.  and  A.  CONSTABLE,  Printers  to  Her  Majesty, 
at  the  Edinburgh  University  Press. 


1892 
iddon,  Henry  Par 


BR  85  L53  1892  TRIM 

Liddon,  Henry  Parry, 

Essays  and  addresses   138952